Home

Communication/CompoWay/F

1. Operation at startup SP ramp 5 8 The SP ramp function limits the amount of change of the SP to a set rate VVhen this function is enabled and the amount of change exceeds the set rate a space that limits the SP is created as shown in the diagram belovv During SP ramp control takes place not by changing the SP but rather by using a value that is limited by the set rate of change this is called the ramp SP On the E5AR ER an SP ramp rise value and an SP ramp fall value can be set separately SP SP after change SP ramp rise value SP ramp time units SP before change Change point The rate of change during SP ramp is set in SP ramp rise value SP ramp fall value and SP ramp time unit The initial settings for SP ramp rise value and SP ramp fall value are 0 which means that SP ramp is disabled EU sec EU min or EU hour can be selected for SP ramp time unit The initial setting is EU min The ramp SP can be viewed using Set point during SP ramp VVhen the povver is turned on including operation startup the PV is regarded as the pre change SP SP ramp operation at startup depends on the relation betvveen the PV and
2. E5AR A4B 500 A B C D E f EsAR A4B 500 EBAR A4B 500 B C D E EsAR A4B 500 24 VACIDC 100 240VAC 1117 fob Auxiliary outputs 24 VACIDC 100 240 VAC ez Auxiliary outputs 5 Relay outputs Relay outputs 7 22 14 ff Input power supply 5 EM nput power supply depends on the l6 depends on the model leas model 100 to 240 VAC m r 100 to 240 VAC or 24 VAC DC or 24 VAC DC no polarity 2 b 21 no polarity 51 62 53 EBAR A4B 500 050 ad vent inputs Event inputs EV1 e 1 EV2 OUT2 PVA has al 4 20 mA DC 500 Q max m Voltage output 12 V COM 0 20 mA 500 Q max COM 40 mA l Switch using OUTI 17 output type setting b 27 Voltage output 12 V _ 5 OUT1 Haz 40 mA or ub Current output lt Current output iT 4 20 mA DC 500 Q max 1 16 4 20 mA DC 500 Q max ds 0 20 mA DC 500 Q max v PT TK 0 20 mA DC 500 Q max Cure AN gee Svvitch using output Current Voltage Thermocouple Switch using output type setting Resistance thermometer type setting Resistance thermometer J E5AR A4B 500 E5AR A4B 500 E5AR A4B 500 ESAR A4B 500 Auxiliary outputs Relay outputs 100 240 VAC Auxiliary outputs Relay outputs 100 240 VAC E53 ARQC3 RS
3. Input data e gt X mr m N 0 63A Operation result Time constant Default value 0 0 to 999 9 OFF Disabled ON Enabled OFF E Move average Move average e The move average operation reduces sudden changes in the input operation 1 enabled due to noise and other factors and can be enabled for each input e To use the move average operation set Move average enable to ON the initial setting is OFF e A count must also be selected in the Move average setting Selec tions are 1 2 4 8 16 and 32 times Time Default Move average OFF Disabled OFF 1 to 4 enable ON Enabled Move average 1 to 4 1 2 4 8 16 32 count 5 5 I Section 5 Functions and Operations M Broken line approximation 5 6 Relation to input types Broken line approximation 1 enabled Broken line approximation 1 Input 1 Broken line approximation 1 Output 1 This function is used to correct non linearity in the input Tvventy broken line approximation operation points are available for input 1
4. key 1 second or more Input initial setting gt Control initial setting Control initial setting m gt Alarm setting m gt Display adjustment level level 2 level level level 4 i 2 8 key Less h key Less gas key Less e 3 key Less ELL key Less level L i than 1 second than 1 second than 1 second than 1 second than 1 second key Less than 1 second i C Control in progress C Control stop Protocol selection Communication unit no 0 99 BPS Communication speed 9 6 19 2 38 4 LEN Communication data lengih 7 8 SBIT Communication stop bit 1 2 PRTY Communication parity NONE EVEN ODD SDWT Transmission wait time 0 99 8 63 l Section 8 Setting data Communication protocol selection 252 This setting is used to select the communication protocol Selections are CompoWay F OMRON s unified protocol for general purpose serial communication or Modbus Modicon Inc s protocol based on RTU Mode of Modbus Protocol Specifications PI MBUS 300 Rev 4 A Setting range Units Default value 1 CompoWay F aoe ned Modbus L 7 CompoWay F Setting Communication Unit No e After changing the communication unit No setting execute a software rese
5. Travel time RUN level 4 Hold down the _ at least 1 second to return to RUN level PV SP MV 71 t Present value PV SP will appear Press the A key to set the SP to 250 0 K 21 41 Valve opening uue oe ii li w X g X l l 5 Press the _ key less than 1 second to move from RUN level to Adiustment level 6 Press the el key to select 5 H SP ramp rise value and press the A key to set the value to 10 0 SP ramp rise value M Adjustment To adjust the PID constants run AT For more information see 4 10 Determining the PID constants AT manual settings P 4 20 On the E5AR ER the SP ramp rise value and the SP ramp fall value can be set separately I Section 3 Typical Control Examples M Settings for position proportional control Closed Floating Motor calibration and travel time Position proportional dead band and Open Close hysterisis PV dead band Operation at potentiometer input error When position proportional control is selected Closed Floating Motor calibration Travel time
6. The following is an example when the input type is K 1 200 to 1300 C The temperature of the object will be obtained Room temperature When B 25 C the controller reading is A 40 C Temperature near the SP When B 550 C the controller reading is A 500 C In this case the input shift values are obtained as follows Input value for input shift 1 Controller reading A 40 C Input shift 1 Temperature of object B Controller reading A 25 40 15 00 C Input value for input shift 2 Controller reading A 500 C Input shift 2 Temperature of object B Controller reading A 550 500 50 00 C 5 1 Input adjustment functions I E First order lag operation 1st order lag e First order lag operation serves as a filter for each input For a multi operation 1 enabled input type the operation is set for each of inputs 1 to 4 in First order lag operation 1 4 w x 4 no gt mel m m lt To use first order lag operation set First order lag operation enable to ON the initial setting is OFF A time constant must also be set and this is selected so that the result of the operation is 0 63 times 1st order lag operation the input data 1 time constant PIP FI b o m4
7. Present value PV SP MV AT Execute Cancel wa w X 2 IL 1 1 3 16 3 Press the key less than 1 second to move from RUN level to Adiustment level Press the kel key repeatedly to select the secondary ch 2 524 SP mode Press the key to set the SP mode to 57 Local SP The RPS operation indicator is off in local SP mode indicating independent control cascade open in the secondary loop Press the L_ key repeatedly to return to RUN level The secondary ch 2 PV SP MV will appear Set the secondary SP to 230 0 which is the PV obtained in step 2 Press the key less than 1 second to move from RUN level to Adjustment level uu Press the ce key to select the secondary ch 2 R AT Execute Cancel uu Press the A to change the set value to X and run AT During AT the automatically selected PID Set No is displayed and display 1 Fit blinks Kun Display 2 shows 622 when AT finishes and display 1 Rt stops blinking Press the cel key to select the secondary ch 2 5242 SP mode Press the A key to select 5 Remote SP The RSP operation indicator vvill light up in remote SP mode to indicate cascade control cascade c
8. Voltage output lt 12 V 40 mA OUTI Voltage output 12V 40 mAor Current output 4 20 mA DC 500 Q max 0 20 mA DC 500 Q max Switch using output type setting C oTl s c M A IHD lorl Rio we gt E53 ART2 E5ER AB 500 f E53 ART2 E5ER AB 500 R Event inputs Event inputs Auxiliary outputs EV1 Auxiliary outputs EV1 k o 1 Transistor outputs EV Transistor outputs EV2 Ha o 2 COM COM 3 SUB1 i 1 SUB1 o _ 01 87 9 SUB2 zm sak DE 7 SUB 1 16 I V PT T I v PT TC E Current Voltage Thermocouple Current Voltage J Resistance thermometer Resistance thermometer J E5ER QC43B FLK E5ER AB 500 E53 ARR4 24VACIDC 100 240 VAC Auxiliary outputs Relay outputs Input power supply depends on the model 100 to 240 VAC or 24 VAC DC no polarity J Voltage output 12 V 40 mA or Current output 4 20 mA DC 500 max 0 20 mA DC 500 Q max Switch using output type setting E53 ARCC E5ER AB 500 Event inputs EV1 o OUT2 2 Ev2 Current output 4 20 mA DC 500 Q max COM 0 20 mA 500 Q max t Switch using output db type setting I Le OUT1 _ 1 Current output i 4 20 mA DC 500 Q
9. Display scan Operation I 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 I F m m b HEHEEEEEHEHEHEHEH EN sm EE R malla r 1 I I m m S B A i Display automatically changes to next channel i when the period in Display scan period elapses 1 A nu nu uu uu um uu uu uu uu a m Gu m m m Eu s Eu m uu m ae m m um m uu um uu a un m m um m m um m m m zil a U E S U 2 Ma e 55255 n cH Stop using key Stop display scan 1 second or more Present value PV SP Display 1 Normal operation Channel indication is not updated when display scan stops in above example display remains at channel 2 5 20 5 4 Display and key adjustment functions I M PF settings function keys PF1 setting The and serve as function keys and the functions of these keys can be selected w ap asss e Note that on a multi point input type the key functions as a key and thus it cannot be used as a function key the PF2 setting does not appear However the key can be used as a function key if the number of enabled channels is set to 1 w
10. Multi output Output type P 57 Linear current output Output type Pulse voltage output Linear current output eee 4 to 20 mA M Output assignment e This is used to assign what type of data is output from each output On multi point input types the data assignment can be set for channels 2 and higher as appropriate for the number of channels Control Transfer output assignment Channel A Channel 1rampSP i Channel t present value PV hy Channel 1 MV heat sid H Channel 1 MV cool side 0000 Channel 1 valve opening 7 M ih Channel 2 eors annel 4 MV heat side e When used for control output the assignments are made automati cally based on the control mode setting as shown on the following page There is no need to change the assignments e To use an output for transfer output assign the data you wish to transfer to an unused output Note that if transfer output is assigned to a pulse voltage output the output will turn OFF 4 15 Section 4 Settings Required for Basic Control 1 input Control mode 2 input type Standard control Heating cooling control Standard control vvith remote SP Remote SP Heating cooling control vvith remote SP Remote SP Ratio control IN2 Ratio setting Cascade standard control
11. than 1 second than 1 second than 1 second than 1 second than 1 second key less than 1 second key key 1 second 3 seconds or more or more LSO w m um m m m mom s eet eee ees eee om om om m im im m m im im im m im om im im m im mu im im m m im im im m im im im im im m mu m m s im s m mu mu s m x m s x um x x x x x x x x x uu m mu mu eee eS mu s Alarm setting Display adjustment setting Control initial setting setting 1 EJ Llevel t r res level eyta Evel 3 kete S kW key Less Level L 6 5 Input initial setting Control initial Communication level than 1 second than 1 second than 1 second than 1 second than 1 second key less than 1 second C Control in progress C Control stop Control initial setting 2 level Control Transfer output 1 allocation Transfer output 4 upper limit OUT4 Control Transfer output 4 allocation HRL 4 Transfer output 4 lower limit EV 6 Event input 6 allocation OFF ON SBO 1 Auxiliary output 1 allocation Movement average 1 0 36 enabled OFF ON SBO4 Auxiliary output 4 allocation 4 Movement average 4 0 36 enabled OFF ON Extraction of square root 1 enab
12. 1 _ SBIN Auxiliary output 1 non exciting ILI 0 Close in alarm N O nn Open in alarm N C Alarm 2 hysteresis 0 01 99 99 _ SB3N Auxiliary output 3 non exciting Close in alarm N O amp Open in alarm N C c 17 au SB4N Auxiliary output 4 non exciting Alarm 3 hysteresis Close in alarm N O 0 01 99 99 a Open in alarm N C 8 53 I Section 8 Setting data CH Alarm 1 type Alarm 2 type Alarm 3 type Alarm 4 type 8 54 m Setting al y y na r 2 y r Ki yu al lt r Alarm 1 type Alarm 2 type Alarm 3 type Alarm 4 type Alarm is assigned to auxiliary output e These settings are used to select the type of alarms 1 through 4 Setting data Setting range Units Default value No alarm function Upper and lower limit alarm Upper limit alarm Lower limit alarm Upper and lower limit range alarm Upper and lower limit alarm with standby sequence Upper limit alarm with standby sequence Lower limit alarm with standby sequence Absolute value upper limit alarm Absolute value lower limit alarm 10 Absolute value upper limit alarm with standby sequence 11 A
13. 2 Press the key continuously to decrease the set value When the lower limit of the setting is reached the set value will blink and cannot be further decreased 3 Follow steps 1 and 2 to change the set value to the desired value The setting is saved 2 seconds after it is changed or when a key other than the IAI keys are pressed 4 a Lm wa a lt 4 yur 7 Note that when setting a manual MV default the set value is output every 50 ms The set value is saved as explained above 4 4 4 3 Initial setting examples I 4 3 Initial setting examples This section explains how to configure the initial settings for the sensor input type alarm type control period and other parameters Use the _ key and key to move through the display screens The desti nation screen will vary depending on how long each key is held down Typical example Changing setting data ce The dotted line arrow shown on the left indicates that more setting data follows Press the mode key several times to switch to the desired setting data Changing numeric values The numeric data and selections in each screen can be changed with th
14. L B z than 1 second than 1 second key less key less i than 1 sec than 1 second 777 PID setting Bank setting I level i level p EET rey ess E E FTA Oey iess Le than 1 second LL Control in progress Adiustment 2 level First order lag operation 1 Time constant LAGP 2 First order lag operation 2 Time constant 0 0 999 9 LAGP 3 First order lag operation 3 Time constant 0 0 999 9 LAGP4 First order lag operation 4 Time constant MAVP Moveaverage4 Move average count 1 2 4 8 16 32 SQRP 1 Extraction of square root 1 Low cut point 0 000 9 999 SQRP 2 Extraction of square root 2 Low cut point 0 000 9 999 SQRP 3 Extraction of square root 3 Low cut point 0 000 9 999 SQRP 4 Extraction of square root 4 Low cut point 0 000 9 999 MAVP Move average 1 Move average count 1 2 4 8 16 32 AP 1 Analog parameter Control rate 1 999 9 999 MAVP Moveaverage2 Move average count 1 2 4 8 16 32 MAVP Moveaverage3 Move average count 1 2 4 8 16 32 First order lag operation 1 Time constant LALF i First order lag operation 2 Time constant ALPS First order lag operation 3 Time constant ALPS First order lag operation 4 Time constant L RL P First order lag opera
15. PF key protect This function prevents use of the PF1 PF2 keys PF key protect Setting 5 Description urn 0 a ms L I OFF PF1 PF2 keys are enabled ON PF1 PF2 keys are disabled Prohibits use as a function key or a channel key e The initial setting for PF key protect is OFF x 5 25 I Section 5 Functions and Operations 5 6 Alarm adjustment functions E Alarm hysteresis Alarm 1 hysteresis M Standby sequence Standby sequence reset CLL K nl L w ww j bos 6 Standby sequence restart 5 26 e Hysteresis can be applied when alarm outputs switch on and off as shown below Upper limit alarm Lower limit alarm Alarm hysteresis Alarm hysteresis gt ON OFF OF A A Alarm value Alarm value e Alarm hysteresis can be set separately for each alarm in Alarm 1 to 4 hysteresis All default values are 0 02 FS e Standby sequence is used to delay alarm output until the PV leaves the alarm range once and then subsequently enters it again e For example in the case of a lower limit the PV is normally smaller than the SP when the power is turned on and thus is within the alarm range whic
16. For a multi point input type connect as explained in step 2 and repeat steps 5 to 9 f linear current output is selected continue with the procedure explained in 9 6 Output calibration P 9 12 10 Turn off the power to quit calibration mode I Section 9 User calibration 9 6 Output calibration e The procedure for calibration when linear current output is selected is explained in the following Output calibration is displayed after input calibration is finished after the input calibration values are saved Perform aging for at least 30 minutes Output upper limit The input calibration value save state appears as shown at left Connect a precision digital meter DMM in the following to the output terminal of the linear current output as shown below Press the ce key to obtain the display at left and begin 20 mA calibration While viewing the output on the DMM use the AI keys to set the output to 20 mA In the example at left 20 mA appears at a value 2 digits smaller than before calibration Press the key to obtain the display at left and begin 4 mA calibration While viewing the output on th
17. 8 9 Rato Controles 1 9 3 18 Read setting data Communication Modbus 7 18 Registering calibration data 9 4 Remote SP lower limit 8 38 Remote SP monitor 8 8 Remote SP upper limit 8 38 Remote SP local SP 8 14 Resistance temperature input sensor calibra TOU 122 2 kan akaun ukhu 9 10 Reverse operation 4 14 Reverse operation heating 1 9 ya aaa 2 17 RSP operation indicator 1 5 HoPBUnputetor cd d sa 10 3 H n r 6 21 7 21 R N STOD 4 27 5 30 8 11 SAVING setting 4 4 SCAG oa b R 4 9 Scaling display value 8 37 Scaling input value 8 37 Sensor induction noise reduction 8 40 SE VANS eb so l 4 4 Setting and changing the SP 4 17 Selling areas n 6 13 Setting change protect 5 25 Setting communication parameters 5 34 Setting data compound write Communication CompovVVay F 6 18 Setting data read Communication CompoWay F 6 15 Setting data vvrite Communication CompoWay F 6 17 S
18. aaa 6 25 6 25 Move 16 SGLIng area amaya aya 6 26 Move to protect level 6 26 Auto aaa as Da 6 27 NAN ZO SOS uu u uu O A 6 27 Cancellati asma anan qusa hos uha 6 28 SP m ode Zo UDDU lat 6 28 Read machine attributes 6 29 Controller status read Communication CompovVVay F 6 30 ECHO DECK TESSU k z a qhapaq 6 31 6 10 rodram exampiec a DB Rai 6 32 NGS BASIC A d 6 32 Section 7 Communication Modbus r Comim nicat on metod ce u 7 2 Modbus communication protocol 7 2 COMMUNICATION SPECIFICATIONS 7 2 Transfer protocol Communication Modbus 7 2 2 lines a a aa aslan 7 4 Command frame uu u LD m a baa 7 4 Response a 7 5 ZO VASHOR MUNCTONS a u ul L lal a a daaa 7 7 TA Valable 7 8 7 5 Reading the variable area 7 10 7 6 Writing to the Variable area 5 2 7 12 7 7 Operation commands Communication M
19. q 1 c mal A 25 Appendix K J on r moi Um 4 PP Ru yax pa rw a LL LL a a 81 lq ssod s Buijes Pwu q ddi 21000000 21 lqissod s Buijs Pwu seddn wely 1000000 H 91 q ssod si um s p 000000 lq ssod s puy q ddi wuely 40000000 H 1 lq ssod si Bunjes yu q ddn 30000000 lqissod s Dum s uutelv d0000000 H ZL lqissod s Bull s 2 11 Jaddn uue v 200000000 H 2 lqissod s um s uuelv 0000000 H 9 lq ssod s Dum s q w tenu l lil 90000000 H 9 lqissod si um s tin Ie16 jul s0000000 H r lqissod si q pueq feuonodold 0000000 H Ajuo 1OHUOVN UONE A Q Ad 60000000 H z as lq ssod s AW dS Ad Z0000000 H 1 as lq ssod s um s yueg dS Ad 10000000 H m Ol p lqesiq 00000000 wo Buin s JoWUOW dd 0ZL LL 16500 s Bull s z lil Jeddn uue v 80000000 H 01 lqissod si um s z uue v v0000000 H AOQE SE Owes 1 ci se ewes 244 2021 6 4444 60000000 6666 01 6661 U0UU0 0 AON 1 NYH pow li anya poul dnyoeq uowwog h t 0 1 10000000HH 01 10000000HH
20. ywi Bue1 indul o Ww Jamo Hues qS 1 WW Oz 01 t L 0000000 H o 0 Vui Oz 01 00000000 L Vui Oz 01 7 10000000 H o 0 Vui Oz 01 00000000 1 Vui 02 O t 10000000 H o Vui Oz O 00000000 1 WW Oz 01 t 10000000 H o 0 WW Oz 01 00000000 1 indino uano se ur 10000000 H nd no sinci 00000000 L indino 1u uino reau 10000000 0 nd no sinci 00000000 d 1ndul o Buipio55v H l ye se ywl JAMO dS d 1ndul o Buipio55v 43 ye se 1 Jaddn qS d y indino 1 d g indino uuna Je ur d z ndino uun Jeau ad indino 1 d Indino d Imdino 00q0 0000 2 I A Hunyes jeu 0 1140 uonsod uolluouu um s uolluouu 2 Aq 199 S D BA JOWUOW S D EA 195 Ul P9 edIPU H 18 Setting list gM 56 IU AOQE SE ulES AOQE SE BUCS noe 99 oll 9002 99 aw AOQE SE ulES AOQE SE ulES AOQE SE AOQE SE AQE 56 IU OAOQE SE SUES AOQE SE ulES AOQE SE ulES AOQE SE AOQE SE OAOQE SE OURS SZ 01 02 THO 61000000HH 01 71000000 H 61 91 L EHO 6 1000
21. values mada values Disabled Does not function as a function key STOP iba Stop currently displayed channel R S 5 Run Stop Switch between run and stop for currently displayed channel Run all Run all channels Stop all Stop all channels AT Execute Cancel Switch between AT execute and AT cancel AT run is executed for the currently selected PID set Bank selection Switch through the bank numbers adds 1 to the current bank number A M R Switch between auto and manual Monitor Setting item Display monitor setting item Select Monitor Setting item 1 to Monitor Setting item 5 Special function level e Hold down the PF1 or PF2 for at least 1 second to execute the function selected in PF1 setting or PF2 setting If Monitor Setting item is selected the display will scroll through monitor setting items 1 to 5 each time you press the key The initial settings for the function keys are as follovvs PF1 setting A M aw key PF2 setting R S run stop toggle The function keys are only effective in the Operation Adiustment Adjustment 2 Bank setting PID setting Approximation setting Monitor item level and Protect levels The keys are only effective when PF key protect is OFF Operation adjustment protect and Setting change protect do not apply to the function keys Run Stop and Bank No parameter settings can be changed and saved using a functio
22. 3230 2100 yuul 4addn z indino OZIO 9100 ndino Vz30 9100 vowwog yw aeddn indino seysuey 8230 100 h d J p OLI uoneoolIe indino 9230 2100 c AOQE SE AOQE SE nd no Aieilixny yego cl00 AOQE SE ulES AOQE SE z ndino 40 1100 96 01 06 PHO 2000000 01 01000000 01 Z EHO 01000000 O Z 000000 9 91000000 12 10149 Indu dSH ZHO 91000000 OZ 10119 1104 2 71 000000 H 61 iy wely ZHO 61000000 81 wely ZHO 21000000 ZL g wely ZHO L L000000 H 91 L wely ZHO 01000000 30000000 H indino YO 10119 yndul asi sjauueyo IIV 30000000 H ndino HO 10119 Indu sjeuueyp 00000000 ZL 1Indino HO p wey sieuueu2 00000000 LL ndino HO wuejy sieuueu2 jiy 80000000 OL INdyno HO Z wuejy sieuueuo jiy Y0000000 H 6 nd no HO 1 uuel v sjouueyo 60000000 8 W1V N 80000000 H 40000000 H 9 10119 ind l qSH VHO 90000000 H 9 40149 indul LHO S0000000 H r y wely LHO F0000000 H 6 wely LHO 0000000 H z z wely LHO 20000000 1 L wely LHO 10000000 H 0 p lqes q 00000000H uoneoolle indino Aienlixny 0230 0100 30 uonsod D EBA SS HDDV sseuppy adh 6 nIEA 1 9S ET
23. EV4 al EV5 9 1 EV6 a o gt 6 2 4 5 6 E53 ARQC OUT4 Voltage output lt t 12V 40mA _ OUT3 4 Voltage output 12 V 40 mA or Current output 4 20 mA DC 500 Q max G l v PT Tc 0 20 mA DC 500 Q max Current Voltage me C Bil Switch using output type setting Resistance thermometer 2 6 E5AR CC43DWW FLK 4 loop Control E5AR A4W 500 n Input power supply depends on the model 100 to 240 VAG or 24 VAC DC no polarity V 24 VAC DC 1100 240 VAC E53 ARCC3 RS 485 Bt OUT2 A Current output 4 20 mA DC 500 Q max 0 20 mA DC 500 Q max Switch using output type setting OUT1 Current output 4 20 mA DC 500 Q max 0 20 mA DC 500 Q max Switch using output type setting E5AR A4WW 500 Auxiliary outputs B Relay outputs D COM a SUB G gt SUB2 COM S gt SUB3 53 4 Event inputs EV3 0 20 mA 500 Q max Switch using output type setting OUT3 Current output 6 4 20 mA DC 500 Q max 0 20 mA DC 500 Q max Switch using output type setting E5AR PR4DF E5AR PA4F 500 Input 2 K Input 4 J
24. L SWU AHEAH P Ald L Owl did SDUOD S L 616666 01 070 2060000 01 00000000 ANEAH p did 616666 01 170 46060000H 01 10000000 G zl Indu ye STEO1 10 s nuhuo uoeJado p solo euol luodoid uollisoq 6 666 0 070 46060000 H 01 00000000 10119 1ndul 1 1 uuollu lod ye sdo s uole1 do p soyo SDUO29S L o eez 2 01 00 uollisod 1009 1E H Puepue S 66666 01 100 46991000H 01 10000000H l8uolluodo1d uollisod 66666 01 0070 46981000 H O 00000000 H 1002 1eE H prepue1S oul esS lul did pueq jeuonsodoid did Sd 0001 _ Gx 8 91 L 80000000 H 01 10000000 H nIPA 1 sliu 5 qo uoul Bue AIS SHUN uicodieuno q inet q JBI ea 101 m s Golluoul uongoliunuuuuoo Aq 195 S nD PA S D PA 10 11UOUl S D BA 195 Ul paeyedipul H HO HO HO m HO HO HO HO HO HO HO HO HO s nquyy eyep Bumes 0109 95 gid Aeids q 2000 9000 S000 000 90V0 000 vovo 2000 00 0 1000 00Y0 0000 m SS 1PPY 9lq8ueA napon eMOduroO um s did A 15 000 1 01 000 0 SNIEA 2 ou lu l eAInb si 2 00061 01 0 00Z 2 0700 1 01 0 00Z Ad ndu Bels indul y l p pnioul si uoneuuixoidde
25. On models with only a single channel the CH key is disabled Setting data for selected channel appears If you continue to hold down the key after changing channels you will not move to the next channel To con tinue changing channels release and press the cH key again For more information see 5 4 Display and key adjust ment functions P 5 19 4 31 l Section 4 Settings Required for Basic Control 4 15 Operational considerations 1 About four seconds is required for the output to turn on after the power is turned on Take this into consideration when incorporating the controller into a sequence circuit 2 Using the controller near radios televisions or other wireless devices may cause reception inter ference 4 32 Section 5 Functions and Operations 5 1 Input adjustment functions 5 2 CGonirolluliciions eea b aila 5 8 5 3 Output adjustment FUNCTIONS 5 16 5 4 Display and key adjustment functions 5 19 5 5 Protecting set n s u uy uu sa an 5 24 5 6 Alarm adjustment functions 5 26 5 7 USING eventunpu t uss uuu unai uwa sunqu 5 29 5 88 Using transfer output 5 32 5 9 Using communication functions 5 34 ce
26. NENE o elmimi ir ov n m ir s sli sis ii r ei r iv wef effets le sm eee forsee cc Bil 1 isvl l 1 se l A 5 Appendix Setting list The setting list shows addresses for CompoWay F communication and Modbus communication Refer to the addresses of the protocol that you are using The hexadecimal values in the Setting monitor value column are the setting ranges in CompoWay F and Modbus and the values in parentheses are the actual setting ranges The monitor and setting values can be specified for each channel and addresses include a channel identifier The addresses in the variable area map are for channel 1 To specify addresses of other channels on a multi point input type refer to the table below Address CompoWay F ModBus Channel Address in setting list in Appendix Address in setting list in Appendix Address in setting list in Appendix 0100 Address in setting list in Appendix 4000 Address in setting list in Appendix 0200 Address in setting list in Appendix 8000 Address in setting list in Appendix 0300 Address in setting list in Appendix C000 A 6 Setting list adj 1ndul o 2 1 x x x 66666 01 66661 46981000 H 01 Lal sasasa H 66666 01 66661 46981000 H 01 3184 gt mn uonno x JO 5 yueLq 10 dS 8201 ar m adj 1ndul o 2 66666 01 666
27. 1000 sjeuueyo s qum 8121 Dues qq se guueS Fid S w Dum s 11 40 4 Z4q 9121 8000 Bum s 11 qq SE ewes y wa um s JoWUOW Z4q Vol 000 Bum s 11 qq se ewes well Dum s JoWUOW Z4q 2121 6000 Buas 1olluouu 44 se ewes 2 z Wall Bum s 40114014 Z4q 0121 8000 Buas 1 3dq SE owes way Bues JOWUOW zg3d 2021 Z000 Buas JOPUOW qq SE owes 5 S we Bum s 40114011 1 4 021 9000 6 lq ssod s Buje s llul ddn uuelv 60000000 H 8 W V 80000000 H cd Buas 1olluouu y way um s dq VOZL 9000 8 ajqissod s um s ywy seddn 80000000 8 0000000 9 17 90000000 sS ST1V S0000000 H r 11 0000000 g 3 60000000 dO1S Z0000000 H y 1 IAA n i One al al Ong LL un 1 N H L0000000 H 8 W V iq 440 00000000 H uowwuog L4d 0021 5 0 NO 34 0 440 uonez ennul 4 enn 9501 5501 d jqene s suun sepse A 1 1 O0pJeuO onuoul Bues s lnquv erep umes pp EE ui jewioeq neeg snqpoN 4 hemodwoy 1olluouu uoneolunululo Ag 195 s
28. 4 21 8 78 Thermocouple calibration 9 5 Transfer output lower limit 8 49 Transfer output upper limit 8 49 Transfer protocol Communication CompoWay F 6 2 Transfer protocol Communication Modbus 7 2 Transmission wait time 8 66 Travel time 3 12 8 52 aerei malda 10 1 Typical Control Examples 3 1 Unit performance specifications A 3 se Ba a EER 2 1 6 User calibration 9 1 9 4 User calibration completion information 9 3 Using auxiliary output 4 23 Using transfer output 5 32 Valve opening monitor 8 10 Variable areas 6 7 Write mode 6 24 7 24 Write setting data Communication Modbus 7 19 VVrite via communication 5 c66 5 35 6 21 7 21 8 14
29. RAMM RAM write mode BKUP RAM PVTR PV tracking PMEC OFF ON Operation at potentiometer input error Stop OFF Continue ON Manual output method HOLD INIT CMOV OFF ON 10 41 Move to calibration level 1999 9999 1 Heating cooling control Setting data list See page A 30 to input initial setting level A key 1 second or more Control starts Alarm Setting Level ALT1 Alarm 1 type 0 11 ATLT Alarm 1 latch OFF ON ALH1 Alarm 1 hysteresis 0 01 99 99 ALT2 Alarm 2 type 0 11 A2LT Alarm 2 latch OFF ON ALH2 Alarm 2 hysteresis 0 01 99 99 ALT3 Alarm 3 type 0 11 A3LT Alarm 3 latch OFF ON ALH3 Alarm 3 hysteresis 0 01 99 99 ALT4 Alarm 4 type 0 11 A4LT Alarm 4 latch less than 1 second Display Adjustment Level x1 Disabled Input initial SPDP PV SP display screen selection 0 3 ODSL MV display selection MV heating O MV cooing C O BART Bar graph display item OFF Deviation 1 EU 10 EU 20 EU 100 EU MV heating Valve opening O MV cooling C O RET Display auto return time 0 99 0 Display auto return disabled D REF Display
30. ul ayes AN OLEL 3000 poujew 1ndino enuen PAPA 1 NO UO L0000000 H 66666 01 0 46981000 H 01 00000000 H pueq peep Ad 8061 000 eq 0 1901 0 4 HO 00000000 Buen Ad 9121 8000 66 66 01 0110 10220000H VOO00000 H SIS 1 S u 0109 95 195 did 902 2000 ai o 1 AG 10000000 H 0 Ad 00000000 eyep uollo l s one ulo ne 195 did vOEl 2000 Pid L NO UO 10000000 0 440 HO 00000000 Burjoe 49 2061 1000 Z ANYIN epow enuen 20000000 1 dOLS dolS L0000000 H INOO 04945 0 LNOO nunuo2 00000000 uo ye uonel dO 0061 0000 5501 952 adh ajqeue anjeA 1 8S s lun Soles qouuoul um s 99110 1 eyep uas jujod yewioeq 4nejeq snqpoyy GOMHuoul 21 Aq 1 5 ase S D PA JOWUOW S D PA 199 Ul papu H 01 U09 uoisuedx A 27 d ings that are initialize Related sett Added channels n lalized A ini Not hanged are shown lized itia In O ings are c d when related sett Meaning of symbols lize ia In Appendix ings that are tialized Initialization due to setting changes Sett ini aul 64 Jeo Jeo yenueyy oiny doysyuny
31. 5 27 Closed Floating 3 12 8 44 CMW operation indicator 1 5 Cold junction compensation 8 75 Commands and responses Communication CompoWay F 6 14 Commands and responses Communication Modbus 7 17 Communication terminals 2 17 Communication data length 8 65 Communication parity 8 65 Communication protocol selection 8 64 Communication setting level 8 63 A 25 Communication speed 8 64 Communication stop bit 8 65 Communication Unit No 8 64 Communication write OFF ON 5 29 CompoWay F communication protocol 6 2 Connecting the cold junction compensator 9 5 2 4 Constant at disturbance 5 14 Control Transfer output assignment 4 15 Control initial setting level 8 41 A 18 Control initial setting level 2 8 45 A 19 Control mode 4 13 8 43 Control outputs Transfer outputs terminals 2 12 Control period 4 14 Control period cooling 8 16 Control period heating 8 16 Control Transfer o
32. 8 70 Obtaining input shift values 5 3 ON OFF CONO v o da yad a wocsuenadees 4 18 Open Close hysteresis 3 12 8 17 Operation adjustment protect 5 24 Operation at potentiometer error 8 79 Operation at potentiometer input error 3 12 Operation at power ON 4 27 8 73 Operation at startup SP ramp 5 8 Operation commands Communication CompoWay F 6 11 Operation commands Communication Modbus 7 14 Operation indicators 1 5 Operation level 8 5 A 11 Operational considerations 4 32 OUT1 operation indicator 1 5 OUT2 operation indicator 1 5 OUTS operation indicator 1 5 OUT4 operation indicator 1 5 Output Calibration 9 12 Output state at error 10 3 OUTPUT TW DG ashen a a sl 4 15 OVE rap Dand iss a a s s 3 8 8 15 Panel cutout dimensions 2 2 Part Names and Functions 1 4 PF key protect 5 25 77970 009900000000007 5 21 PF1 monitor setting item 8 69 PF Sellii0 u uya usan uuu oa 8 68
33. 9 8 9 5 Resistance temperature input sensor calibration 9 10 9 6 Oblbutiealiprali u n L u aaa aa 9 12 9 7 Inspecting indicator accuracy 9 13 T 2 o D N I Section 9 User calibration 9 1 Setting data for user calibration To perform user calibration enter 1201 in Move to user calibration in Special setting level The controller will enter calibration mode and Za will appear in the display the Move to user calibration setting does not appear set Initial setting protect to O in Protect level and then move to Special setting level e Calibration is ended by turning off the power e The setting data for input calibration is shown below The last digit of Display 1 shovvs the input number The example belovv shovvs 1 for input 1 n the case of input 2 the display would show P 35ti 2 Riz Asno men Input type 1 K 1 lt 2 gt J 1 lt 4 gt K 2 7 7 7 PT100 1 lt 0 gt Strat 1 lt gt shows set value in general of input type 6 Output calibration setting data The setting data for output calibration is shown below The display varies depending on the output type of each output In the following example the last digit of Display 1 shows 1 for output 1 For output 2 this would be 52202 SO wII IITSNSNII Store input calibration value At linear current output 9 2
34. 99 99 to 99 99 FS width I Section 5 Functions and Operations 5 3 Output adjustment functions MN MV limit Upper limit value of MV limit m A Lovver limit value of MV limit Upper and lovver limits can be applied to the output of the calculated MV When using ON OFF control the MV will be the MV upper limit when output is ON and the MV lower limit when output is OFF The MV limit function does not operate vvhen floating control is selected on a position proportional type The following MVs take precedence over the MV limit function Manual MV default MV at stop MV at PV error The MV upper limit and MV lower limit can also be set in each PID set Output 100 Upper limit value of MV limit Lovver limit value of MV limit e In the case of heating cooling control overall upper and lower limits 5 16 are set for heating and cooling Separate limit settings are not possible Output Heating side MV mon Cooling side MV q mm _ 6 Lower limit value of MV limit Upper limit value of MV limit 5 3 Output adiustment functions Default Setting data Setting range 22 V Ae Standard control MV lower limit 0 1 to 105 0 iow MV upper limit Heating cooling control 0 0 to 105 0 bu Stand
35. 7 EV3 eo Switch using output 4 1 EV3 o o oltage outpu ype setting 5 12V 40 mA or lt Eva 3 7 b i Ev4 a G Current output La Current output B A EVsS Lo o gt 4 20 mA DC 500 Q max Eve 4 20 mA DC 500 Q max FIGIH lI J 4 0 20 mA DC 500 Q max Eve o 5 0 20 mA DC 500 Q max EV6 5 Switch using output type setting Switch using output COM 6 type setting COM 6 ne J E5AR A4W 500 E5AR A4W 500 p 10 r 71 12 92 7 50 e 2 nput 2 2 Input 2 m 3 l V PT 1 4l V PT 1014 r i i QO i i i i L x TIKA 1 4 nput 1 Tt 6 nput 1 JER 6 a ot I v PT TC K v PT TC K Current Voltage Thermocouple Current Voltage me Resistance thermometer Resistance thermometer J J E5AR QQ43DW FLK 2 loop Control E5AR A4W 500 h EBAR A4VV 500 24 VACIDC 100 240 VAC Auxiliary outputs Relay outputs o m Lae H Input power supply depend on the model 100 to 240 VAC J S or 24 VAC DC no polarity E53 ARQC3 B RS 485 A Voltage output 12V 40mA OUT1 Voltage output 12V 40 mA or _ Current output 4 20 mA DC 500 O max F 1 0 20 mA DC 500 Q max Switch using output type setting E53 ARB4 Event inputs
36. 1 a a a Settings are shown when 4 to 20 mA is used in the input from the dye flow sensor 4 to 20 mA is used in the input from the sand weight measurement sensor and a pump is used that is driven by an inverter with a 4 to 20 mA input is used in the manipulation system Control of the proportion of gas to air is also carried out in firing control in gas kilns VVith the goal of preventing pollution and saving energy the proportion of gas to air is strictly controlled to prevent incomplete combustion and improve combustion effi ciency 3 5 Ratio control of dyeing machines I E Wiring M Settings IN1 is connected to the adjustment system and IN2 is connected to the sensor in the reference system A flow meter is connected to IN1 a sand weight scale is connected to IN2 and a pump drive inverter is connected to OUT1 When using the EBAR QQ43VV FLK wire as shown below Color liquid Sensor 2 flow meter Sand weight meter Sensor 2 Beet Lo The scale of sensor 1 which measures the flow of dye is 0 0 to 25 0 kg s and the scale of sensor 2 which measures the weight of sand is 0 0 to 500 0 kg s The ratio value is set to 0 05 so that the proportion of sand to dye will be 110 5 Related setting data and settings are as follows Input 1 type switch ANALOG Input 2 type switch ANALOG Input 1 type 15 4 to 20 mA Ch 1 scaling input value 1 4
37. Standard control SNr o m ne heating sid Heating cooling OUT2 Channel 1 control output cooling sid control OUT3 Channel 2 control output heating side N2 e OUT4 Channel 1 control output cooling side Standard control IN1 t with remote SP IN2 Remote SP OUT1 Channel 1 control output heating side pee Meee 1 OUT1 1 Channel 1 control output heating side control vvith IN2 Remote SP i remote SP OUT2 Channel 1 control output cooling side IN1 Ratio control IN2 Ratio setting OUT1 Channel 1 control output heating side D Cascade standard IN1 Primary loop l 4 IN2 Secondary loop OUT1 Channel 2 control output heating side Cascade heating IN1 Primary loop OUT1 Channel 1 control output heating side cooling control IN2 Secondary loop OUT2 1 Channel 1 control output cooling side Direct Reverse Description operation Control whereby the MV is increased as the Direct present value increases operation When the present value PV is higher than the cooling set point SP the MV is increased in proportion to the difference between the PV and the SP Control whereby the MV is decreased as the Reverse present value increases operation When the present value PV is lower than the heating set point SP the MV is increased in proportion to the difference between the PV and the SP e When pulse output is used the co
38. af w a 1 e When Bumpless at RUN is enabled an integral MV correction bumpless is performed to prevent abrupt changes in the MV when switching from stop to run e Even when the setting is disabled the bumpless correction is performed when PID values change including changing the PID set and when AT ends or is stopped Setting range Units Default value e FF Disable Enable Setting CH X Operation at potentiometer input error 2422 Position proportional type Closed control e This setting is used to select whether control is stopped or changed to floating control when a potentiometer error occurs during closed control in position proportional control Setting Related setting data Closed Floating Control initial setting level P 8 44 8 79 I Section 8 Setting data CH 8 80 Disturbance overshoot adjustment function 2056 e This setting is used to enable or disable disturbance overshoot adjustment Setting Related information 22 5 2 Control functions W Disturbance overshoot adjustment P 5 14 Section 9 User calibration 9 1 Setting data for user Calibration 9 2 92 Usercalbration A a s t 9 4 9 3 Thermocouple input Calibration 9 5 9 4 Analog input Calibration
39. Channel 1 present value Channel 1 control output heat Channel 1 control output cool Channel 1 valve opening Channel 2 control output heat Channel 2 control output cool Channel 3 control output heat Channel 4 control output heat When used for control output assignments are made automatically based on the control mode setting as explained on the previous page No changes are necessary 1 3 Input output Configuration and Main Functions I Auxiliary output assignments Auxiliary output Auxiliary output assignment Channel 1 alarm 2 a When used for transfer output type assign the data to be transferred to an unused output For outputs supporting multi output specify pulse voltage output or linear current output according to the multi output output type For linear current output 0 to 20 mA or 4 to 20 mA can be selected Pulse voltage output is 12 V DC 40 mA Multi output output type Pulse voltage output Linear output output type Linear current output 75 4 20mA Use this setting to assign what type of data is output from each auxiliary output For the multi point input type assignment data can be set for channels 2 and higher as needed for the number of channels The U ALM output is an OR output with alarm functions 1 to 4 for all channels Channel 1 All channel alarm 1 OR output All channel alarm 2 OR output All channel alarm 3 OR output All channel
40. d indul Aq 1 Z lun y yms d indul ey Aq p uluui p se indul Boleue 104 61 0 SL pue ind l ainyesodu9 40 t 0 0 ue s um s d indul 0 6666 01 6661 JOZZO000 H 01 LE844444 H uowwog peaa Bues uonouni p oueApe o anonw ZH 09 10000000 zH 09 0 zH 0S 00000000 H wowwog uollonp 1 siou UOHONpuUl iosu9S 0200 0100 1 NO 1 0000000 NO 440 00000000 Aelds p julod jewloep Ad 41090 4000 q ddn ndu o uajeanba nicA eydsip pue 66666 10 0 uij JAMO indul o 10 yeuinb nip eydsip pue 6666 10 196127 Pojeuy ue Sum s sosuas Jo lluui Jaddn o B5uei Buas iosu s ad dul o Buy OOZ yo ye se aunyesoduuay dS D190 4000 Setting list na Jaddn o lu lpAinb anjen eydsip pue 66666 Jo llPUUS o luij JMO indul o JUsjeninba anjena eydsip pue 6666 10 19617 Pojeuy ue JOSUaS Jo llul J ddn o uci m s JOSUAS JO Pulj 19407 edi indul o 2 OOE L yo ye se aunyesoduuay Jeddn qS 10 WLOO d000 Us R ULU Lk z u A H l ye SE L g anjea Aeldsip Dullleos 0 66661 1414444 H H l ye se owes ywuij ddn indul o 1uull 1 AO 1nd l L 4 10000000
41. x y Input 1 K Input 3 J i V PT Current Voltage J Thermocouple Resistance thermometer E5AR PA4F 500 Auxiliary outputs 24 VAC DC 100 240 VAC B Relay outputs 67 Input power supply depends on the model 100 to 240 VAC or 24 VAC DC no polarity A Event inputs EV3 EV4 EV5 olal o s o m o NN E53 ARRR OUT2 gt A COM E53 ARB4 EV6 2 Relay outputs 250 VAC 1A Closed E5AR PA4F 500 Potentiometer 4 OUT1 Ae Li V Current Voltage Thermocouple Resistance thermometer 2 2 How to Use the Terminals E5AR QQ43DWW FLK 4 loop Control E5AR A4WW 500 100 240 VAC RS 485 A 2 Voltage output 12V 21mA 4 OUT1 Voltage output n 12V 21 mA or x Current output 4 20 mA DC 500 O max F 0 20 mA DC 500 Q max Switch using output type setting Pi E53 ARQC3 E5AR A4WW 500 Auxiliary outputs B Relay outputs COM O suBt E53 ARB4 Event inputs EV4 m Ga EV5 a _ EV6 ima dal 4 20 mA DC 500 Q max 0 20 mA DC 500 Q max Switch us
42. 1010 Joyuow um s 4OHUOW uoneolunululo Aq 18s SEN eA ase S D PA JOWUOW S D PA 195 Ul papu H T TL TL 1 5655588 En s lnqlny uono l s yueg Aejds q 0060 1 0000 lQELEA snqpoyy 4 Hues yueq A 14 Setting list HO HO pueq euolluodoiud 9 did HO HO pueq euolluodoiud id HO HO pueq euolluodoiud y did HO d ndul o Buipio55v d ndul o 66666 0 66661 446981000H o 1318 pueq jeuolsodoid did uu Jeddn Bueu UOH f S Sneuuolne did Ad 1 ull q ddn ebuel UOH f s Sneuuolne did 070 01 0 501 00000000 H 01 V Lr00000 H 1009 yeaH L O 1uuli Yo Je Se OWES 1 ddn AI 01 0 S 39444444 H Psepuejs HUI JOMO AN did Jaddn AW L Ald L 0901 01070 VL 700000 H 01 00000000HH 000 L 0001 V l 1 Se SWS 07901 V FOOOODOH 01 170 ywi AN D EPUE S SpUO29S Z 00 07 06 666 01 000 92V 19000 H 01 00000000 H 06666 01 0170 9ZV19000 H 01 0000000 10119 indul 19 uuollu od ye S1EO1 10 s nuhuo uolyes do p solo euolluodoid uollisoq 066666 0 0070 92V19000H 01 00000000 108 1ndul 1 ye sdo s 0 8 p soyo 401 00 uonlsod 1009 E H DIEpUE1S SDUO2 S Z 00
43. 4 15 4 8 Setting and changing the SP 4 17 Setting and changing the SP 4 17 4 9 Performing ON OFF control 4 18 ON OFF Conlroluauc o o li 4 18 SENOS ocat a 00 4 19 4 10 Determining the PID constants AT manual settings 4 20 crois 4 20 Manual setUngS aa a 4 22 42 11 Using pa utasa 4 23 Auxiliary output assignment 4 23 Atti TY OCS u um aaa a adda Us 030 4 24 Alarm VAIUCS o bn Li 4 25 SENOS on a ob b 4 25 4 12 Starting and stopping control 4 27 Control run COntrOl L l 222 muu u SIRA eanais 4 27 DEL R S s amas b 4 28 4 13 Performing manual control 4 29 Manual ModE ws a ADU si 4 29 4 14 Changing channels 4 31 aa 4 31 4 15 Operational considerations 4 32 Section 5 Functions and Operations XIV 5 1 Input adiu
44. 6 7 Reading the variable area 6 9 Writing to the variable area 6 10 Operation commands Communication CompoWay F 6 11 SOWING arcas aaa load sunami aban daun 6 13 Commands and responses Communication CompoWay F 6 14 Monitor value read Communication CompoWay F 6 14 Setting data read Communication CompovVVay F 6 15 Monitor value setting data compound read Communication CompoVVay F 6 16 Protect level setting data write 6 17 Setting data write Communication CompovVVay F 6 17 Setting data compound write Communication CompovVVay F 6 18 Monitor value setting data compound read store write 6 19 Monitor value setting data compound read store check read 6 20 Monitor value setting data compound store read 6 20 XV Writevia communication aa RDA Ra Su uyu u Su us 6 21 Control Fun Control S Oo0 a u a 6 21 Palllec hali uuu a m dd 6 22 A Figo 1010 2 u uuu S Qu Sium Sama aa ua a ee 6 23 A 630661 unu 00000 0000 6 23 VV TING node LL DK 6 24
45. 7 9 Commands and responses Communication Modbus M Write via communication Response Slave Function Write start Instruction Related address mode address code information CRC 16 roe oo im Tim 1 1 2 2 2 bytes Related PN Description information VVrite via communication disable VVrite via communication enable This command is used to enable or disable VVrite via communication VVhen sent it changes the set value of VVrite via communication When Write via communication is disabled communication cannot be used to write setting data or send operation commands such as Run Stop The initial setting is disabled This command can be used in both setting area O and setting area 1 Slave Function Write start Instruction Related address mode address code information CRC 16 1 1 2 2 2 bytes The above indicates a normal end For information on error responses see 7 7 Operation commands Communication Modbus P 7 14 MN Control Run Control Stop Slave Function Write start Instruction Related address mode address code information CRC 16 1 1 2 2 2 bytes Related Run Run Run Run This is used to run or stop control H F1 This command can be used in both setting area 0 and setting area 1 7 21 Section 7 Communication Modbus Response M Bank change 7 22 Response VVhen the control mode is set to cascade control perform the Run Stop operation command of chan
46. Buijooo B5une ri O1JUOD PULPURIS x O O j de yu wufisse y indino 1u uuuBisse indino ju uuuBisse z indino 1u uuuBisse indino d indu 1 140 1402 1 14 JOJSUBL OAJUOD dS I0nuo2 Buijooo 6une H dS louu 1 YIM 01 U09 p4EpuE1S MO 9Q UMOYUS poul O1 UOO9 YORS Ul s um s EnuI Zx A 22 Setting list WUE UI 901 WUE U 501 0 WUE UI 501 0 WUE UI 9800 1 O N wueyje l uado uolle l9X9 uoN 10000000 H 0 O N uuele u uolle lox3 00000000 1 O N wueyje l uado oHEMOX UON 10000000 H 0 O N Waele u uolle lox3 00000000 1 O N wueyje l uado uolle l9x9 uoN 10000000 H 0 O N uuele l uolle lox3 00000000 H 1 O N wueyje l uado uolle l9X9 uoN 10000000 H 0 O N uuele ul uolle lox3 00000000 L g uonipuoO 10000000 H V uonipuoO 00000000 H UOWWO UOWWO UOWWWO UOWWO r indino Ayerixny g indino Ayelixny Buniox uou z indino Ayeixny Buniox uou Indino Ayerixny He s i ou nb s AqpueiS 6666 01 1070 40 20000 0 0000000 1 NO L0000000 H 0 440 00000000 H d4 ullele se owes IJI c c c c I O SIS l 1S U y ULE V yel wey
47. RUN level PV SP MV 1 Press the _ key repeatedly to move to Bank setting level Display 3 shows L bnt 2 Use the AI keys to set Display bank selection to 2 5 2 Control functions I Local SP 3 Press the key to select Local SP 4 Use the Al keys to set the value to 250 0 lt K x K lt s ad 23 r n 1 5 Press the key to select PID Set No Use the AIM keys to set the value to 3 om O w bos di pe _ a To use a bank specify it by event input key operation or communi cation Bank specification by key input 7 Press the _ key repeatedly to move to Adjustment level Display 3 shows Ale 8 Use the zs szi keys to select 2 to execute Bank 2 9 Press the _ key repeatedly to move to RUN level and then press the cel key to move to PV SP Bank No C I Section 5 Functions and Operations M SP limits SP setting upper limit The SP setting upper and lo
48. The measured value rises above the SP Possible cause Solution Abnormal measured value See section 10 3 The load is connected to the vvrong channel and Wire correctly the heater is being controlled by the control output of another channel The contact of the control output drive relay has Replace the relay melted Short circuit failure in SSR Replace the SSR Current flows to heater due to SSR leakage Connect a bleeder resistor to prevent action due current to leakage current Direct action and reverse action settings are Set the correct settings incorrect The PID values are not suitable e Run AT e Set suitable PID values The output does not decrease due to MV limits Change the output limits to suitable values Output is taking place in manual mode Stop manual mode The object of control generates heat Use heating cooling control Large overshoot See the Overshoot or undershoot troubleshooting table l Section 10 Troubleshooting Overshoot or undershoot occurs o Abnormal measured value See section 10 3 A regular slow thermal response temperature Change to a sheath type temperature sensor sensor is connected to a fast thermal response control system Connection The proportional band is too narrow the P value is Increase the P value within the limit that the too small response speed does not become too slovv e Run AT The integral time is too short the value is too e Incr
49. am mm mmm mmm m BANK Bank No 0 7 CMWT Write via communication OFF ON SPRH SP ramp rise value 0 99999 0 Disable SP ramp function key less L 12 key less AT AT execute cancel OFF SPRL SP ramp fall value than 1 second than 1 second 0 8 0 99999 key less key less 0 Disable SP ramp function than 1 sec than 1 second MV S MV at stop 5 0 105 0 standard type 1 level 1 EET key less level E Prd key less L bat SPMD SP mode MV E MV at PV error than 1 second than 1 second LSP RSP 5 0 105 0 mumxuumumum SS Se eee bim in ni si lm lm il ee mim s standard type 1 C Control in C SC Cooling coefficient ORL progress 01 99 99 MV change rate limit heating 8 12 uu m C DB Dead band 199 99 999 99 OF R Manual reset value 0 0 100 0 HYS Hysteresis heating 0 01 99 99 CHYS Hysteresis cooling 0 01 99 99 r heating 070 C CP Control period cooling DB Position proportional dead band Open close hysteresis SPRU SP ramp time unit EU s S EU min M EU hour H 0 0 100 0 C
50. 666 0 24600000HH 01 10000000 H A 21 Oui EARL 0940 0600 0 NO 0 440 uonelqileo 10101N m 10000000 00000000 10000000 00000000 p lqeu uoljpuuixoidde ul u yolgq p lqeu z uoneulxoisdde ulub ens 3930 9930 9930 3200 00 8200 10000000 00000000 p lqeu uoneuluxoidde ulubiens 930 Vc00 10000000 00000000 10000000 00000000 10000000 00000000 10000000 00000000 10000000 00000000 10000000 00000000 p lqeu r 1001 5 Jo uon opuxq p lqeu 1004 ayenbs o uonoeuaxq p lqeu z 1001 asenbs o uonoeuaxq p lqeu 1001 5 Jo 1 2 p lqeu abesene 1lu uu AO N p lqeu JUBWSAO 20 8730 9750 1600 9200 9000 Fc00 c00 cc00 L0000000 H 00000000 H p lqeu z abesane 1U UM AOV N cvo 1200 10000000 00000000H p lqeu juswaroy 0F30 0200 39 ss ss adh lqe sngpow uolluouu um s uonsod anjea Appendix s ndul s ndul Z 01 U09 Nuijooo Hue y apeosey I0 1U02 piepue s pe5seo su M C S j f j aa az 04u09 oneki s ndul s ndul Z 1001 s ndul s ndul Z ndul s ndurz
51. In the following the control mode SP and cooling coefficient are set and the initial settings are used for the other parameters 1 Turn on the power and then hold down the _ key for at least 3 seconds to move from RUN level to Input initial setting level 3 2 Heating cooling control of a chemical reaction device I 2 Press the _ key for less than 1 second to move from Input initial setting level to Control initial setting level Control initial setting level Output 1 Output type 3 Press the cel repeatedly to select Aaa Control mode Press the Al key to select 1 Heating cooling control _4 Pe a p mn r 4 L I lt a 4 Hold down the _ key for at least 1 second to return to RUN level PV SP MV will appear Press the lAl key to set the value to 250 0 cx lt zs 5 Press the key less than 1 second to move from RUN level to oz Adiustment level 4 Z 6 Press the repeatedly to select X 52 Cooling coefficient Press the 221 key to set the SP to 0 50 Cooling coefficient E Adjustment To
52. Operation procedure Before performing communication follow the steps below to set the communication unit number communications speed and other communication parameters 1 Protocol selection Communication unit No Communication speed ce Communication data length Communication stop bit Communication parity Transmission wait time Configure communication setting data in accordance with the other computers Hold down the for 3 seconds to move from RUN level to Initial setting level Press the key to move from Input initial setting level to Communica tions setting level Press the cel key to scroll through the setting item as shown at left Press the keys to change a setting M Write via communication Bank No To allow a host computer to write setting data to a controller set Write 1 2 Press the Press the Adiustme via communication Adjustment level to 37 Enabled key less than 1 second to move from RUN level to nt level cel key to set Write via communication to an Setting data can be vvritten 100 000 times If you vvill be vvriting sett
53. hm e This sets the upper and lower limit of remote SP The remote SP upper limit is set with respect to the upper input range limit of input 2 and the remote SP lower limit is set with respect to the lower input range limit of input 2 For example if the input 2 type is 4 to 20 mA the remote SP upper limit is set vvith respect to 20 mA and the remote SP lovver limit is set vvith respect to 4 mA e If the input type temperature units and scaling of input 1 are changed the settings are changed to the upper and lower limits of the sensor e The decimal point position depends on the selected sensor For analog input the decimal point position depends on the Decimal point position setting RSP Remote SP upper limit gt Using input type of 4 to 20 mA Remote SP lovver limit Input mA 4 20 Note that the SP limits are in effect and therefore if the input remote SP is above or belovv the SP limits the SP vvill be clamped to the upper or lower limit During cascade control only Ch2 is displayed Setting data Setting range Units Default value Temperature Lower limit of sensor set ting range to upper limit of sensor setting range Analog Remote SP a Smaller of 99999 and dis upper limit play value equivalent to upper input limit to smaller of 99999 and dis play value equivalent to upper input limit 8 9 Input initial setting level 2 2 Setting data
54. lt 1 JOA 40 EZ L00000 Ls 7 6 a 0 uonoes snomeid o s p Hof Snme8S 200 9000 8 0 L 80000000 01 10000000 H JOWUOW ON 18S did S000 Z 0 0 0000000 01 00000000 H JOWUOW ON yueg 8OVO Y000 adh indul o 22 dS 9070 000 d indul o 22 ndul p l ds o Buipio55v Ad nieA 1u s lci 2000 3 01 000 U01100 d 2070 1000 344 01 000 WOLUWO uoISJ A 0000 9501 9501 d ajqeue qouuoul um s s nquyy eyep um s EE OENE ulod yewi0eq ynejeq snqpoyy 4 2 Goluouu uoneolunululo Ag 195 S n A SONJA 195 Ul PS eDIPUI H v JOWUOW 1 A 10 Setting list 1 9 l Ase SILI dS YEU BION Yx 0 0 ON Jueg 0011 01 0701 leuonuodo d uonlso i 01501 0 0 9 I000 18 U p4Epue1s AIN sBun s uonisod julod jewioep pue d indul Aq Buryoes Ad n 8A jueseaig BUNG 19 JJ Ul Be slluu GS JEU SION yw j q ddn YS O lluul JS pOul qS louu91 Ul l q ddn Hues dS O WI Jamo Hues qS dS 15907 ul dS indul Josuas jo Bue1 p l ds Ad SAO O SE Be 10 s njea JOWUOW um s u L ON xueg dS Ad nleA ju
55. mon gt MV MV 100 100 0 0 Temperature is low Temperature is high Temperature is low Temperature is high Set value in general Set value in general Direct action Reverse action For example when the present value PV is less than the set point SP during heating control the manipulated valuable MV is increased in proportion to the difference between the PV and SP As such heating control is reverse operation Cooling control which does the opposite is direct operation e Set Direct reverse operation to a Reverse operation or gr a Direct operation The initial setting is Reverse operation heat e When each channel is used independently for control set the direct reverse operation separately for each channel 4 7 Setting output parameters I E Output type Multi output is available on the E5AR ER which allows selection of pulse voltage output or linear current output Select the output type in Output Output type The E5AR QLILILILJ output 1 of the E5ER QLILILJ and outputs 1 and 3 of the 11 are multi outputs Output Output type Linear current output can be set to 4 to 20 mA or 0 to 20 mA in Linear current output Output type Pulse voltage output is 12 V DC 40 mA
56. 9 1 Setting data for user calibration I If user calibration was performed on any of inputs 1 to 4 or outputs 1 to 6 following purchase of the controller user calibration completion infor mation will appear as shown below when you move to Calibration level Displays dots 9 3 l Section 9 User calibration 9 2 User calibration The E5AR ER is calibrated before shipment from the factory and thus there is normally no need for the user to calibrate the controller In the event that user calibration is necessary use the calibration functions for temperature input analog input and output that are provide in the controller However note that OMRON cannot ensure the results of calibration by the user Also calibration data is overwritten with the latest settings The default calibration settings cannot be returned to after user calibration Input calibration The input type selected in the setting data is calibrated Input types consist of the following 20 types e Thermocouple 13 types Analog input 5 types Resistance temperature input sensor 2 types Output calibration The output type selected in the setting data is calibrated There is only one output type that can be selected e Linear current output Registering The new calibration data for each item is temporarily registered It can calibration data be offcia
57. Auto Manual Page 8 12 DOTC Disturbance time constant under Adjustment level corrected to 0 01 99 997 Pages 8 15 8 16 8 19 8 27 8 31 and 8 32 PID Set No corrected to PID Page 8 26 The seven segment display 7 LSP at the right top placed in a white box Page 8 35 Description added to RSPH and RSPL in the bottom graphic Page 8 46 Description under Setting range in the top table corrected Page 8 49 The second Cascade standard control in the bottom table corrected to Cascade heating cooling control Page 8 51 The default value under straight line approximation corrected from ON to OFF Page A 2 Note 3 added belovv the Unit Ratings table Page A 2 Outflow current Approx 7 mA under Unit ratings corrected to Short circuit current Approx 4 mA Page A 3 596 FS digit or less under Indication accuracy corrected to 596 5 1 digit max Page A 3 0 2 to 99 9 seconds under Control period corrected to 0 2 to 99 0 seconds 2 Page A 3 Acceleration 10 m s under Vibration tolerance corrected to Acceleration 20 m 5 Page A 19 Description under Setting monitor value for OEOC corrected Page A 20 Description under Setting monitor value for OE20 corrected Page A 22 The second Cascade standard control in the table corrected to Cascade heating cooling control 02A November 2004 The following changes were made Page A 3 In
58. IN1 Primary loop IN2 Secondary loop Cascade heating cooling control Position proportional control 4 16 IN1 Primary loop IN2 Secondary loop 2 VA PA F VA Sme pm i s type assignment Channel 4 control output heating side OUT1 Channel 1 control output heating side OUT2 Channel 1 control output OUT3 Channel 2 control output 4 Channel 2 control output cooling side OUT1 OUT1 OUT2 OUT1 OUT1 OUT1 OUT2 OUT1 OUT2 IN1 cooling side heating side IN2 Channel 1 control output heating side Channel 1 control output heating side Channel 1 control output cooling side Channel 1 control output heating side Channel 2 control output heating side Channel 2 control output heating side Channel 2 control output cooling side Channel 1 control output open Cannot be changed Channel 1 control output close Cannot be changed 4 8 Setting and changing the SP i 4 8 Setting and changing the SP M Setting and changing the SP e When Operation adjustment protect is set to 4 and Setting change protect is set to ON the SP cannot be changed For more information see 5 5 Protecting settings P 5 24 e To change the SP press the keys in PV SP RUN level to select the desired value The new setting becomes effective 2 seconds after the change The bank function can be used to switch through as many as eight SPs For more i
59. Manual operation e This sets the MV or valve opening during manual operation On a standard type the MV is changed by pressing the keys On a position proportional type the 24 key turns on open and the key turns on close e On a standard type Display 1 shows the PV and Display 2 shows the MV 8 5 I Section 8 Setting data 8 6 Present value PV Manipulated variable MV MANU lights up When changed with the keys the MV is output once every 50 ms and updated in the system When a potentiometer is connected to a position proportional type Display 1 shows the PV and Display 2 shows the valve opening When a potentiometer is not connected to a position proportional type Display 2 shows With potentiometer Without potentiometer CH H Present value ale opening Valve opening 7 1 MANU 111 1 4 MANU lights up MANU lights up In manual mode operation is performed manually and the MANU indicator lights up Manual output method is used to select the MV that is used when entering manual mode The MV prior to entering manual mode can be held or the manual MV default value can be used Switching between manual and auto mode is accomplished with the key or with Auto
60. Position proportional dead band Open Close hysterisis Operation at potentiometer input error and PV dead band can be used e Closed control Control whereby a potentiometer is connected to feed back the amount of opening of the valve e Floating control Control without feedback of the amount of opening of the valve Control is possible without connecting a potentiometer Run Motor calibration when a potentiometer is connected for closed control or floating control that monitors the amount of valve opening This will also automatically set the Travel time which is the amount of time from when the valve is completely open to when the valve is completely closed When performing floating control without a potentiometer it is necessary to manually set the Travel time Set the travel time to the amount of time from when the valve is completely open to when the valve is completely closed The valve output hold interval the duration of ON OFF switching of open output and closed output is set in Position proportional dead band and the hysteresis is set in Open Close hysterisis The relation to valve opening is shown below Open close hysteresis ON OFF A 100 MV Valve opening 100 A 0 When the present value is inside the PV dead band this function is used to perform control for PV SP and stop unnecessary output when the PV is close to the SP Use this setting to selec
61. SOW 26 91 8 2 1 50000000 00000000 H nM gt u _ 2 Ki SpUO29 al gt u 1 yu R X 6 666 01 070 40 20000 01 00000000 H Er z Er Er al al 1UE SU09 awl p uogesado Hej 151 9080 SpUO29 SpUO29 1 Ki 1 m 1 1 1 1 1 nn gt Ki gt Ki Ki Ki gt K gt K 61666 01 070 40 20000 01 00000000 H 1 0uu mal mal 1 619400 uogesado 151 090 spuodes 3 al uowwor al a a 6 666 0 070 40 20000 01 00000000 6 666 01 070 40 20000 01 00000000 H K K uoljisod n BA 5 uolluouu seinqu neeg 2030 qoyuoul umes JOBIeYO is nnqimy Goluoul uoneolunululo Aq 18s SEN eA ale S D PA Jolluouu S D BA 199 Ul papu H z l Ja aweved ouy 9190 2000 1ulod m Mo 1001 asenbs Jo 4012 9190 4000 1100 m Mo 1001 auenbs Jo 4019 190 1100 12 0 Z 1001 auenbs Jo 0 1ulod 12 0 1001 5 Jo 40 1uno2 E AB AON iz IHL AON 1uno2 aene ano aL 2080 unos E AB ano z Hene Src VOSO 1uno2 E A
62. The settings are grouped into levels and the set values are called setting data On the E5AR ER the settings are grouped into 17 levels as shown below When the power is turned on all indicators light up for 1 second The initial level after power on is RUN Power on level Adjustment level Adjustment 2 level Bank setting level Blinks at Less than Less than Less than 1 seconds 1 seconds 1 seconds Less inan RUN level 11 seconds q Less than Less than Less than al taf 1 seconds 1 seconds 1 seconds n N revan mre Monitor item level PE PID setting level WER setting level 3 seconds 1 second Blinks at 1 seconds or longer Protect level 1 seconds or longer 13 seconds or longer Control initial Control initial setting level setting 2 level es han Less than Less than 1 seconds Input WN 1 seconds 1 seconds ut initi i Alarm setting level setting levelli ass than Less than lam seting level 1 seconds 1 seconds Less than Communications Display 1 seconds setting level adiustment level Passvvord input Set value in general 169 1 seconds or longer Less than 1 seconds Special functi
63. 0 0 MV change rate limit cooling 0 0 to 100 0 sec 00 Related setting data PID Proportional band PID setting level P 8 31 MV change rate limit mode Expansion control setting level P 8 78 I Section 8 Setting data CH Input value 1 for input correction Input shift 1 Input value 2 for input correction Input shift 2 hm e ae na me F Me Me mm bee be bm Pe hee me Mog Input shift can be performed at any two points 8 20 m Setting iy These settings are used to set input shift 1 and input shift 2 for any two points input value 1 for input correction and input value 2 for input correction two point correction Present value PV Adjustment value 2 1 300 Before adjustment Adjustment value 1 200 0 1 000 1 300 Input value 1 Input value 2 200 Input Setting data Setting range Units Default value Input value 1 for input 19999 to 99999 1 200 0 correction Input shift 1 199 99 to 999 99 2 19999 to 99999 1 1300 0 correction Input shift 2 199 99 to 999 99 1 The decimal point position will vary depending on the input type 2 If the input type is changed the default values of the input value for input calibration will change to the upper and lower limits of the input range of the sensor type being used 6 Related setting data Input type Input initial setting level P
64. CH PV dead band H b Position proportional type when the PV is within the PV dead band e This function prevents unnecessary output when the PV is near the SP uu M uuuHu uu m PV dead band 0 to 999995 EU o r e This setting is used on a position proportional type to have PV SP Setting 8 74 8 16 Expansion control setting level 1 ZuL Related information 8 3 Position proportional control of a ceramic kiln P 3 9 Reference Related setting data Closed Floating Control initial setting level 8 44 Motor calibration Control initial setting 2 level P 8 52 Travel time Control initial setting 2 level 8 52 Position proportional dead band Adjustment level P 8 17 Open Close hysterisis Adjustment level P 8 17 Operation at potentiometer input error Expansion control setting level P 8 79 y r Q ea Input 1 cold junction compensation ater r r Input 2 cold junction compensation P P tee bee Input 3 cold junction compensation y ar yi ya Input type is thermocouple input ni Input 4 cold function compensation e When the input type is thermocouple input this setting is used to specify whether cold junction compensation is performed inside the controller or outside the controller e Select External cold junction compensation when two thermo couples are used to measure the
65. Default value e R Control period 0 2 to 99 0 Sec 20 0 heat x Setting Control period 0 2 to 99 0 Sec 20 0 cooling 6 Related setting data PID Proportional band PID setting level P 8 31 CH Position proportional dead band CH Open Close hysterisis 8 4 Adjustment level L Aids Position proportional control type D f lt e This sets the output hold interval the interval while switching the open output and close output ON and OFF during position propor tional control i 0 1 to 10 0 2 0 Setting Related setting data Open Close hysterisis Adjustment level P 8 17 Position proportional control type Re a P lt e This setting is used to add hysteresis when switching the open output and close output ON and OFF during position proportional control A 0 1 to 20 0 08 Setting Related setting data m Position proportional dead band Adiustment level P 8 17 I Section 8 Setting data CH SP ramp time unit SP ramp rise value SP ramp fall value CH MV at stop MV at PV error 8 18 Setting m Setting 4 eae d w X K hee w This specifies the change rate during SP ramp The maximum allovved change per unit of time is set as the SP ramp rise value and SP ramp fall value
66. Default value e ye The cooling P in heating cooling control is obtained and the coefficient 0 01 to 99 99 1 00 Setting 6 Related information uu 3 2 Heating cooling control of a chemical reaction device P 3 5 Related setting data PID Proportional band PID setting level P 8 31 CH KIE OISIIIEII TI II II I I I I WWW I IIOIQ I I W AI I YWI WP I M IK IBIY KXI IW KIIXZq I 9II IX WX W I I IWUN q Q IO W V Q 0 II IZYHA NY WSY K amp I9 I I IQXWR W IYI IXIZI6I OUWI Z XWQ ll lt l lt vZk X M VyYWWK WI l lt Ol yxy x VWWIWwW KIW K IIIQWQ QII W W I I A I lt I XIKI I I IK YWHVSYIW QK IK O qII I IIK WRQAW I WIIWIK Q I W I 1 gt g 5kxY layYK lt U ZI I III III IKI IINe IOIIISIEIUW II I I EIItIT a Dead band bb Heating cooling control This sets an output dead band for heating cooling control A negative value can also be set to create an overlap band Set an area centered on the SP where the control amount is 0 during heating cooling control Setting range Units Default value Setting CH me m Manual reset value Advanced PID control Proportional band 0 00 Integral time e This is used to set an MV for rectification during P and PD control to eliminate the offset
67. ETET ngeq OI lt IIII9SISIII uolluouu um s seere l na eyep um s eNxoduloo OTOA UOLULO UIOLULUO UIOLULUO A 20 s 1ndino 1 JSUB1 01 1U00 Hulpuodsai09 v U UM 21 6110 110 1 qS pue anea eydsip Sulleos syiun sunyesodwe adA indul BHuluedo ALA APIS p solo JO pis 002 nd no qonuo apis u do apis 15 H nd no qonuo 0 0 0 001 07011 010 01 7700000H 01 06444444 H Setting list 0 0 0 001 0901 01 070 00000 01 00000000 0901 01070 VE 700000 H 01 00000000HH 1000 2 0 0 07001 07901 01 0 S VLP00000H 01 40 1 14444 H puepuels L e enjen Aejdsip Suleos Goyeue 66666 0 66661 46991000H ol 151G4444H buci G m s wosuas Jo Bue1 Sum s 1094095 Jo yw ISAo 1 ddn ywi g ddn o bu Huljjes 1OSUdS JO yw Ad nieA 1u s lci 0 002 0 00 L yu q ddn S m s dS o LUI S m s qS ds dwey 0 002 0 00 L yu q ddn Humes dS o 1101 S m s qS ds ILUI 49MO UUI 4eddn nd no sajsued n eA yNejeq na uo spu d q ng edAj uo spu d qq na edAj uo spu d q na d ndul uo spu d q s un uonsod ulod qeuuo q niPA uoluoul Huas
68. L l _ E53 ARB4 iW E53 ARB4 OUT2 Event input g Event inputs sl Event inputs vent inputs Voltage output 6 bo o 2 15 i 12V 40mA ID 51 a ai a OUT1 st EV3 om Voltage output 16 4 3 EV4 La o 4 EV4 s 3 12V 40 mA or BE fas s sili i esha r sa siTT 0 20 mA DC 500 Q max Eve s 5 jki 6 s 5 Switch using output type setting 2161 11 COM 6 K K COM E5AR A4B 500 E53 ARCC3 E5AR A4B 500 Event inputs B 44 Event inputs _ OUT2 A i Current output 4 Eya ag 2 4 20 mA 500 Q max R 77 0 20 mA DC 510 0 max COM b Switch using output 17 i 4 type setting _ x OUTI o du m 4 T i Current output T E 4 20 mA DC 500 0 max V PT 0 20 mA DC 500 Q max v PT THK Current Voltage Thermocouple Switch using output Current Voltage Resistance thermometer type setting Resistance thermometer E5AR QC43DB FLK 4 500 ESAR A4B 500 i Auxiliary outputs 24 VAC DC 100 240 VAC tput 22201 R A B C D Relay outputs t t 9 2 Input power supply depends bi on the model 3 100 to 240 VAC or 24 VAC DC no polarity 4 E53 ARQC3 5 E a 1 J a 49 bb N E53 ARB4 2
69. Note that different input terminals are used for current input and voltage input Make sure the connections are correct Turn on the power Move to calibration level A 30 minute aging time begins Perform aging using this time as a guideline When 30 minutes elapses Display 2 will show O Note that you can proceed to the next stop before the display shows 0 Press the key Ce to obtain the display at left The count value that was input will appear in Display 2 in hexadecimal Set the STV as follovvs e For input types 15 and 16 20 mA For input types 17 and 18 5V e For input type 19 10V 9 4 Analog input calibration I 6 Wait until the count in Display 2 is sufficiently stable and then press the key This tentatively saves the calibration data at this point Input types 15 and 16 7 Press the key tel to obtain the display at left Set the STV as follovvs e Input types 15 and 16 1 mA e Input types 17 and 18 1V e Input type 19 1V 8 Wait until the count in Display 2 is sufficiently stable and then press the key This tentatively saves the calibration data at this point 9 Press the key el to obtain the display at left Note that this display will not appear if not all of the required data
70. T Alam upper limitq Canset Rtun 18 Alam lover mit Canst Ru Banno Canst bh 6 Displaying Monitor Setting item To display Monitor Setting item press the function key in Operation Adiustment Adiustment 2 Bank setting PID setting Approximation setting or Monitor item level Press the key repeatedly to scroll from Monitor Setting item 1 to Monitor Setting item 5 After Monitor Setting item 5 the display changes to the first parameter in RUN level If any of settings Monitor Setting item 1 through Monitor Setting item 5 are disabled those settings vvill not appear and the display vvill shovv the next enabled setting 5 4 Display and key adjustment functions I If another key is pressed during display of Monitor Setting item the following will take place e If the mode or level key is pressed the first parameter in RUN level will appear e If a function key set as a channel key is pressed the channel will change and the first parameter in RUN level of the new channel will appear e f the other function key is pressed and it is also set to Monitor Setting item the Monitor Setting item of that key vvill appear If the other function key is pressed and it is set to a function other than the above such as the key that function will activate Display 3 operates as follows during Monitor Setting item f PV SP Bank No is displayed Display 3 shows the bank nu
71. Transmission wait time Communication setting level 8 66 coe ot OE Control mode is standard control with remote SP cascade control or proportional control e Use this setting to select the SP mode e In local SP mode the local SP set in the bank in the controller is used for control In remote SP mode the remote SP specified by an external signal 4 to 20 mA etc is used Use the AIM keys to select L 5 Local SP for local SP mode or e 52 Remote SP for remote SP mode When remote SP mode is selected the RSP indicator lights up Operation l e When cascade control is used cascade open secondary loop independent control takes place when the SP mode of channel 2 is local SP mode and cascade closed cascade control takes place when the SP mode is remote SP mode 6 Related setting data Control mode Control initial setting level P 8 43 1 8 4 Adjustment level L Aids CH Cooling coefficient hm rm Heating cooling control Advanced PID control Proportional band z 0 00 When there is a large difference in the heating and cooling characteristics of the object and satisfactory control is not possible using the same PID constants the heating P proportional band is multiplied by a coefficient for use in cooling control is set using the following equation Cooling P Cooling coefficient x P heating proportional band A Setting range Units
72. d y ULE V 66 66 01 1070 40 20000 01 L0000000 H 1 NO L0000000 H 0 440 00000000 L I 5 8 SIS 1SZU ULE V uoyel g Wey d4 se owes H d wey 66 66 01 1070 402Cc0000HH 01 10000000 H HO sis 1 s u g Wel 1 NO L0000000 H 0 440 00000000 HO yoye z wey d4 ullele se owes H adil Z ULE V 66 66 01 100 402c00001H 01 L0000000 H gt u x al gt Ki sis 1 1s u uup V 1 NO L0000000 H 0 440 00000000 yoe Wey 18S d00 440 _ uonsod anjea 1100 jewioeq ynejaq m v nb s fqpueis yym Y llH mol anjea apnjosqy 80000000 01 sousnbes fqpueis yym y lleddn enjen aynjosqy Y0000000 H 6 wieje 1 1 n eA niosqv 60000000 8 Wee nieA lnlosqv 90000000 H 2 souanbas qpueis y m uue e llull I8M01 0000000 H 9 souanbes Aqpue s ym Wee pw 1addN 90000000 H 2 xu nb s Aqnueys yym were Jlulli I8M0 puc l ddn 90000000 H y uup e aue JO 11 puE l ddn OO00000 H g uute e WI 18MO7 20000000 z uureye h ui d ddn 20000000 L wee pue l ddn 10000000 H uute e ON 00000000 njea uolluouu um s GOMHuoul uonepolunululo Aq 15 SEN eA ase S D PA JOWUOW S D PA 195 Ul papu H E s pnquyy d4 ULE V Oc 0 0100
73. 1 e uayM uohouni uone1 do au Jo 1104 au uo p seq SaNjeA p ziyeuulou 195 suonounj aU JO YORE 10 S NJLA JOS oz 1ndino uoneuxoldde aul ueyorg 3980 2600 H O LE844444 H 177 223 bonuoo ndio uowewxoudde eull ueyoug grago 200 go ndul uoneulxoidde 1 0280 Z Indjno z uolewixoudde aulj jyubrens 3080 Indjno z uoNewixoudde sul jybrens DOGO z Indu z uoneuuxoidde sul yyBreys 000 0 ndul z uowewixosdde aul jybiens 80g0 t000 000 1 Z Indjno uowewixoidde eul jybrens 9040 2000 000 0 yndjno uowewixoidde uzu vogo 2000 000 1 Z Indu uowewixoidde eul jybrens zogo 1000 1 1 K pu pu a 4 J R D R R pu fq 1 pu fq 1 d yu fq 1 JPI q q q q 4 Ms re kr re rw 2 q Or UK L q Or UK re kr re k r q q UK Lx l HEH 00070 6556 1ndul uopewixosdde ull u6ies 0080 0000 SS 9501 d ajqeue ener 19S suun DEN olo Buas 191061242 s nqiny eyep Bues Sseuppy ss rppy 177 julod yewioeq ynejeq snqpoN 4 2 Goluouu uoneolunululo Ag 195 s njea ale S n BA 195 Ul P TE LDUL
74. 1070 402Z0000 H O L0000000 H lu loljJ9o2 ulloo 00 0 0000 L dSH 49 18207 0 497 dS 12907 HO BPOW qS 0 NO 0 440 011110 UOIJEOIUNLULUOD BIA ss ippv snqpoiy A 12 Setting list 6666 Ol 666 1 40220000H 01 168 4 d 6666 01 070 40220000 H 01 00000000 ef 2b5 uu 7 2 K 1 Ki a 000 1 01 00070 paezijewsoU ay y fe mnb si 2 0700 1 0 0 002 0700 1 01 0 00Z d indul Bels Indu y u p pnioul s uoneuuxoldde oul jyBrejs e u u A uolouni uones do y JO eyep indul y UO p seq S nIEA p zifeulou 199 5 uone4 do y JO JO S n EA 1 5 De 1 666 6 0 0 0 40 20000 01 00000000 H un 6666 01 0 0 40 20000 01 00000000 H voww pa f al al 1 666 6 01 0 0 40 20000 01 00000000 U01100 Ki a a S r E 2 L O 318 uonpolunuluo Buisn s nipA Buas SOU 26 91 8 2 1 50000000 01 00000000H R U0UU0Q S r 2 L O 318 uonPolunuluo Buisn s nipA Huas SOU Z 9 L 8 v Z 4 50000000 0 00000000 S r 2 L O uonpolunuluo Buisn s nipA Huas SOU 26 91 8 2 1 50000000 0 00000000 6 2 1 ase uoneoiunuuuioo Hulsn s nicA Huas
75. 1ndu YODO d 1ndu S000 9 L SL lias sun A 17 uu z wij G MOL niPA eldsip Bui e5s ndul Bolp y Indu JOSUAS JO slluui pue J ddn jas ndul SAMO O Se pezijeliul ase s um s pebueyo si Aejdsip Sulleos Jo Silun d 4 indul v L 1 38012 09010 Buneolj3 1 1 B5uneolj 10000000 00000000 50 9200 uoloe 1 q HO uol e io liq SH A H 0 H HO UOL SM A M 10000000 00000000 1461 9 pe5seo S 5 peoseEo r Ieuoniodoid g Builooo 65une u dS louu ti Z prepue1s qS L Iooone H 90000000 H 90000000 H YOO00000 H 20000000 00000000 10000000 Appendix piepue1S 00000000 d indul Z 1 10094429H 110000000 0 piepue1S 00000000 d ndul rt d indul L Boyeue jomluoo 1 1 d ddn YS 0 D PA Jamo Indu Jo 1lu pAinb njen Aeldsip pue 66661 31 84444 H 10 196127 llul dS 0 aue Indu Jo ywl 19407 Goyeue wij i ddn indul jo juayeninba anyjen Aejdsip 10 66666 10 19ss 16991000H O Hu Humes qS
76. Auxiliary output assignment Control initial setting 2 level P 8 48 Alarm type Alarm setting level P 8 54 Alarm latch Alarm setting level P 8 55 Standby sequence restart Alarm setting level P 8 57 8 56 CH Standby sequence restart e Setting 8 12 Alarm setting level 1 3 Alarm types 1 to 4 With standby sequence x mn hm e Use this setting to select the condition for restarting the standby sequence after it has been canceled e Condition A Operation startup including power on when an alarm value alarm upper and lower limit or input shift value input value for input calibration 1 and 2 input shift 1 and 2 is changed or when the SP is changed e Condition B Power on e The following example shows operation using a lower limit alarm with standby sequence SP change Y Condition A only Alarm point 4 J 2 7 Alarm hysteresis l Condition A only Standby sequence I off point l Alarm point F f 1 Standby sequence l l restart point Alarm output Condition A Alarm output Condition B e After changing the standby sequence restart setting a software reset must be executed or the power turned off and on to make the change take effect Setting range Units Default value m Condition A m u h Condition B n Condition A 6 Related setting data Alarm typ
77. Clear Potentiometer error Clear e Display range exceeded Clear e Input error Clear e Control output heating control output cooling Clear e Alarm 1 Alarm 2 Alarm 3 Alarm 4 Clear e AT Clear Run Stop ON stop e Auto Manual Hold previous value e SP mode MV tracking Update e Control output heating control output cooling Update Control output heating and control output cooling are respectively open output and close output during position proportional control Control output heating and control output cooling are normally OFF during linear output The control output heating type and or control output cooling type is off when the corresponding output is pulse voltage output A 9 Appendix Z 0 0 20000000 01 00000000HH 17227 vouw yoajoid jenu zoso 1000 t 01 0 Y0000000H 01 00000000 dH un 991o1d lu unsn pv 00S0 0000 92 uonisod onjen 550 550 adh Goluouu uoneolunululo Aq 195 s njea ale SAN eA S n BA 195 Ul DP TB LUL Hi 1 091O1d 1 NO 10000000 H 1 NO 10000000 H Co ee 115 sBun s uonsod 1104 jewioep pue d 4 indul Aq Huye Ad bung H Ul Be SPUI GS 181 VION Wu qS 1 JWI GS dS sjJOWs U 4addn Hues dS 0 yw Jamo HUMOS dS poui dS 8907 U Z
78. Control Transfer output assignment Control initial setting 2 level P 8 46 P Ke mr Linear current output 1 type ra 4 ena Linear current output 2 type kup Da 4 P Z m mr Linear current output 3 type r Nu w a gt mr Linear current output 4 type Output is current output Use this setting to select the linear current output type Select 0 to 20 mA output or 4 to 20 mA output a Setting data Setting range Default value 1 0 0 to 20 mA Setting Related setting data m Control Transfer output assignment Control initial setting 2 level 8 46 8 42 CH SP upper limit SP lovver limit Control mode 8 10 Control initial setting level L ah 74 e Use this setting to set upper and limits for the SP setting The SP can only be set between these limits Note that if the limits are changed and a previously set SP falls outside of the limits due to the change the SP will automatically change to the upper or lower limit e If the input type and temperature units are changed the settings will change to the upper and lower limits of the sensor e The decimal point position depends on the selected sensor In the case of analog input the decimal point position is determined by the Decimal point position setting Setting data Setting range Unts Default value e Temperature
79. Event inputs terminals 2 15 Expansion control setting level 8 72 A 27 Explanation of the keys 1 6 Extraction of square root lovv cut point 8 24 Extraction of square root operations 5 7 First order lag operation 5 5 First order lag operation enable 8 50 First order lag operation time constant 8 22 Forward reverse operation 8 44 Frames Communication CompoWay F 6 4 TONA o kasuk As 1 4 Function codes Communication Modbus 7 7 Function Key l ala 1 6 Function key 2 channel key 1 6 Heating cooling control 1 9 3 5 4 13 Heating cooling control with remote SP 1 9 4 13 H US OTOS S ra DA RB 4 18 Hysteresis cooling 8 16 Hysteresis heating 8 16 Indicator control ranges A 4 Inferring causes from conditions 10 4 Initial setting examples 4 5 Initial setting protect 5 24 Initialization due to setting changes A 28 Initialize settings 6 27 7 27 input sane aus S 10 3 Input initial setting level 8 35 A 17 RDULESRU uuu uuu ma uns 5 2 8 20 DUE TY DC saa ya ao sassa
80. MH Controller Banks PID sets 1 2 50 ms sampling period Accuracy Thermocouple Larger of 0 1 PV or 1 C 1 digit max Platinum resistance temperature input sensor Larger of 0 1 PV or 0 5 C 1 digit max Analog input 0 1 FS 1 digit max For non standard specifications see Specifications on page A 2 of the Appendix Input resolution 1 100 C Pt 100 Resolution range 0 01 C 150 00 to 150 00 C is available High speed sampling and high accuracy high resolution are simul taneously achieved to enable high accuracy high speed control to match the application Wide range of temperature inputs and analog inputs are available Temperature inputs Thermocouples K J T E L U N R S B W Platinum resistance temperature input sensors Pt 100 Analog inputs Current inputs 4 to 20 mA O to 20mA Voltage inputs 1 to 5 V 0 to 5V 0 to 10V A 2 input type and a 4 point input type are available for the E5AR A 2 point input type is available for the E5ER All multi point inputs also support multi input eliminating the need for an externally connected converter Up to 8 banks can be created to store SPs local SP alarm values and PID set numbers Switch between banks by bank selection event input key operation or communication Up to 8 PID sets can be created to store settings PID value MV limits and automatic selection range upper limit for PID control 1 1 Main Features of the EBAR
81. Press the _ key twice less than 1 second each time to move to Control initial setting 2 level 3 In Control initial setting 2 level Display 3 shows L z Press the cel key repeatedly less than 1 second each time to select Auxiliary output 2 assignment 4 25 I Section 4 Settings Required for Basic Control Z to set the auxiliary output 2 assignment to 1 CH 1 alarm 1 4 Press the Set Alarm 1 type to Lovver limit alarm in Alarm setting level _ key less than 1 second to move to Alarm setting level 5 Press the The display vvill shovv Alarm 1 type Alarm 1 type A key to select 3 Lower limit alarm 6 Press the Set Bank Alarm 1 value to 10 0 C in Bank setting level _ key at least 1 second to move to RUN level 7 Hold down the gt KJ yu Da a w key three times less than 1 second each time to move to 8 Press the Bank setting level B 9 Press the cel key repeatedly to select Bank alarm 1 value ank 0 Alarm value 1 Press the Al
82. RESPONSE RESP GOTO SENDDATA EXITSEND CLOSE 1 END 6 10 Program example I Operation example Reading the present value of Unit No 01 RUNI J SEND DATA 010000101C000000000011 J RESPONSE 010000010100000000014F SEND DATA STX 01 00 0 0101 CO 0000 00 0001 ETX BCC Number of elements Bit position Read start address Variable type MRC SRC SID Sub address Node No RESPONSE STX 01 00 00 0101 0000 0000014F ETX BCC Data to be read Response code MRC SRC End code Sub address Node No 6 33 Section 6 Communication CompoWay F 6 34 Section 7 Communication Modbus 7 1 Communication methodq 7 2 LN am vane E A EA 7 4 To ASL orilihciiofnseuuuueoa S don 7 7 Vanable area aban 7 8 7 5 Reading the variable area 7 10 7 6 Writing to the variable area 7 12 7 7 Operation commands Communication Modbus 7 14 FeO SOWING ACAS zam OLAR 7 16 7 9 Commands and responses Communication Modbus 7 17 CSD o E o o 7 1 Section 7 Communication Modbus 7 1 Communication method E Modbus communication protocol This communication method is based on RTU Mode of the Modbus The communication function is Protocol o
83. SP lower limit 1 to upper limit of Setting input range SP upper limit Analog SP lower limit 1 EU 1300 0 to smaller of 99999 and display value equivalent of input upper limit Temperature Lower limit of input range to SP upper limit 1 SP lower limit Analog Larger of FU 200 0 19999 and display value equivalent of input lower limit to SP upper limit 1 6 Related setting data m Input type Input initial setting level P 8 36 777 Input temperature units Input initial setting level P 8 37 LLL Use this setting to select the control mode e On single input or 4 input types select standard control or heating cooling control e On two input types select standard control heating cooling control standard control with remote SP heating cooling control with remote SP proportional control cascade standard control or cascade heating cooling control 8 43 Section 8 Setting data CH Setting Forvvard reverse operation CH Closed Floating 8 44 d Setting 1 Setting Setting range Units Default value Standard Heating cooling Remote SP standard Remote SP heating cooling Proportional Cascade standard Cascade heating cooling The setting range is O to 1 on a single or 4 input type or O to 6 on a 2 input type 6 Related information Section 3 Typical Control Examples P 3 1 4
84. The PID values are calcu lated from the results and the Proportional band Integral time and Derivative time are automatically set Normally this is 622 AT can be run by pressing the key to select the PID set number AT cannot be run while control is stopped e Select O to specify the PID set currently used for control Select a number from 1 to 8 to specify a PID set number e AT automatically returns to 622 when finished The SP blinks if PV SP are monitored during AT The channel cannot be changed during AT Related setting data PID Proportional band PID Integral time PID Derivative time PID setting level P 8 31 I Section 8 Setting data Write via communication Leyk CH SP mode Models that support communication e This enables or disables the writing of setting data from a host computer to the controller 1 The initial setting is Disabled aFF Select to enable or 62 to disable write via communication Operation Related setting data Reference Communication protocol selection Communication setting level P 8 64 Communication unit No Communication setting level P 8 64 Communication speed Communication setting level P 8 64 Communication data length Communication setting level P 8 65 Communication stop bit Communication setting level P 8 65 Communication parity Communication setting level P 8 65
85. The default value and setting range vary depending on the control mode setting of the multi point input type 2 input type Proportional control standard control with remote SP heating cooling control with remote SP 1 Other modes 2 4 input type 4 6 Related setting data Begin display scan after power on Display scan period Display adjustment level P 8 62 91 1 4 e Use this setting to select the write mode When writing setting data to setting area 0 by Backup mode communication the data is also written to internal non volatile memory When writing setting data to setting area 0 by communication the data is not written to internal RAM write mode non volatile memory However changes to setting data by key operation are written to non volatile memory e When the write mode is changed from RAM write mode to backup mode the setting data in setting area 0 is written to internal non volatile memory Setting range a Default value n Backup mode RAM write mode Related information 5 9 Using communication functions P 5 34 8 15 Advanced function setting level L AldF Move to calibration level Lu This setting is used to move to calibration level e Use this setting to enter the password to access calibration level 1999 to 9999 Setting range Units Default value a P 09 Setting Related information Section 9 User calibration P 9 1 8 71 Section 8
86. The setting range is 0002 to H 006A 2 to 106 Example If the number of setting data sets is 2 specify H 0004 Check code calculated based on the value from the cli ent address to the data end For the calculation method see 7 2 Frames W Command frame 6 Example of CRC 16 calculation P 7 4 Response frame Slave Function Byte Read data address mode count Data 1 Data 1 fe waspaaa tat 1 1 1 Number of elements x 2 bytes I Data n Data n CRC 16 Most significant Least significant 2 Client address Number of elements Explanation Client address The value from the command frame appears here This is the received function code In an error response frame H 80 is added to the received function code to indicate that it is an error Function code response Example Received function code H 03 Function code in error response frame H 83 Byte count Number of bytes of data that were read Read data The setting data that was read This is a check code calculated from the client address CRC 16 to the data end For the calculation method see 7 2 Frames Command frame Example of CRC 16 cal culation P 7 4 7 10 7 5 Reading the variable area Response codes Function Error Cause code code O HO2 02 Variable address error Error in leading address of read H 03 Variable data error The number of elements exceeds the speci fied range Operation error Unit error unit change
87. VVhen these are set to 0 the SP ramp function is disabled e The decimal point position of the SP ramp rise and fall values is determined by the selected sensor during temperature input and by the scaling during analog input Setting data Setting range Units Default value 5 EU min SP ramp time unit SP ramp rise value 0 to 99999 0 OFF 0 MEH SP ramp fall value 0 to 99999 0 OFF 0 OFF 1 Depends on the SP ramp time unit setting The initial setting is EU min Related setting data Input type Input initial setting level P 8 36 Scaling input value 1 Scaling display value 1 Scaling input value 2 Scaling display value 2 Decimal point position Input initial setting level P 8 37 EP hm mn On a standard type Manipulated variable at stop is set to the MV when operation is stopped On a position proportional controll type MV at stop is set to the position when operation is stopped Completely open Hold Completely closed e On a standard type MV at PV error is set to the MV when an error occurs On a position proportional control type MV at stop is set to the position when an error occurs Completely open Hold Completely closed e Standard type Control method Setting range Units Default value Standard 5 0 to 105 0 00 Heating Cooling 105 0 to 105 0 00 A negative value is set for the cooling MV for
88. Variable Variable MRC SRC type Address Bit position type Address Bit position Variable type Address Bit position Variable A Address eg Setting data type Explanation 00007 b 0100 00 C4 0100 f 2 Monitor values 02097 137 0800 0000 to 007F acai ta 0100 to 017F C5 to CB Setting data of setting area 0 O 0200 to O27E etting data of setting 0300 to 037F 0000 to 0039 0100 to 0139 2 CC to D3 2 Setting data of setting area 1 0200 to 0239 0300 to 0339 Multiple monitor values or setting data can be read by sending a single command Up to 20 items can be read even if the addresses are not contiguous To specify the variable type or address see Appendix Setting list P A 6 The upper limit of an address will vary depending on the variable type This command can be used in both setting area 0 and setting area 1 lf an area type error or a setting data error occurs in any of the data being read no data will be read SRC Response code Variable type Data KE 0000 Monitor value Setting data Variable type Data Monitor value Setting data Response codes The above indicates a normal end For the response codes see 6 5 Reading the variable area P 6 9 6 9 Commands and responses Communication CompoWay F M Protect level setting data write Response Variable Number of MRC SRC type Address Bit position elements Data Settin
89. display unit error EEP error does not occur when number of ele ments is 0 s Normal end No error Reading non display data Setting data can be read even if it is set to non display or is not displayed due to the model Command response example Reading the PV of channel 1 Client address H 01 PV of channel 1 set as read only data Address H 0404 Data read H 000003E8 100 0 C Command 0404 100 02 CRC 16 Response 00 00 03 8 CRC 16 Section 7 Communication Modbus 7 6 Writing to the variable area Write to the variable area by setting the required data in the following command frame Command frame Slave Function Write start Number of Byte Write data address mode address elements count Data 1 Data 1 2 2 1 1 1 Number of elements x 2 bytes Datan Data n CRC 16 Most significant Least significant 5 2 Client address Specify the Unit No of the E5AR ER Set in hexadeci mal from H 01 to H 63 1 to 99 The function code for variable area write is H 10 Specify the address of the setting data to which you wish First address of to vvrite vvrite For more information on addresses see Appendix Set ting list P A 6 Specify the number of setting data items that you vvish to write x 2 for the number of elements The setting range is H 0002 to H 0068 2 to 104 Example VVhen the number of setting data items is 2 specify H 0004 Specify the number of bytes o
90. e This setting only appears when Proportional band z 0 00 and Integral time 0 Setting range Units Default value Setting Related setting data 2 PID Proportional band PID Integral time PID setting level P 8 31 8 15 I Section 8 Setting data CH Hysteresis heating ya hm ON OFF Control P 0 0 me kL hm rn yar pa ng yar L Hysteresis cooling This sets the Hysteresis to enable stable operation when control is switched ON OFF e For standard control Hysteresis heating is used Hysteresis cooling cannot be used For heating cooling control the Hysteresis be set separately for heating and cooling Use Hysteresis heating for heating and Hysteresis cooling for cooling e This setting appears when Proportional band 0 00 Setting range Units Default value Setting 6 Related setting data m PID Proportional band PID setting level P 8 31 CH pP ae Control period heating ae J yi yi Control period cooling bility and product life if the connected manipulation device is a A This sets the output period When setting this value take controlla relay into consideration Control period heating is used for standard control For heating cooling control control periods can be set separately for heating and cooling Setting data Setting range Units
91. must be enabled using the Write via communication operation command MRC SRC Response code Response codes The above indicates a normal end For the response codes see 6 7 Operation commands Communication CompoVVay F P 6 11 Instruction Related MRC SRC code information Ce Te Tele Use this command to move to protect level Protect level is explained in 5 5 Protecting settings P 5 24 This command is used in setting area 0 If used in setting area 1 an operation error will result To use this command Write via communication must be enabled using the Write via communication operation command MRC SRC Response code Response codes The above indicates a normal end For the response codes see 6 7 Operation commands Communication CompoWay F P 6 11 MH Auto Manual Response Initialize settings Response 6 9 Commands and responses Communication CompoWay F Instruction Related MRC SRC code information Related Description information Operation mode Auto Manual Auto Manual 2 Auto 4 Manual Auto Manua Auto All LLA Manual Use this command to select auto or manual operation This command is used in setting area 0 To use this command Write via communication must be enabled using the Write via communication operation command MRC SRC Response code Response codes The above indicates a normal end For the response codes see 6 7 Operation comma
92. n A ase SAN eA JOWUOW S n BPA 195 Ul PS edIPUI H uonouni ui gt w aal U A 26 Setting list T TL O O LL 55 o i El L L L isi L O 0801 01 0 S VLP00000 H 01 39444444H Puepuels 0071 0 0070 79000000 H 01 00000000 0 ple VO00 1 NO 1 0000000 uolyesuadwoo 0 440 00000000 uonounf pjoo indul oret 8000 L LINI indino enyea nead L0000000 H 0 plou AN 00000000 H 10000000 uj s s Hulyesuedwoo 00000000 uonounf pjoo z indul d 9000 1 NO 10000000 H uolesu duloo 0 440 00000000 uonounf pjoo ndul WOE 9000 1 NO p lqeu3 10000000 uoloun qu unsnipe 0 4 0 p lqesidq 00000000 00 190 2861 6100 1 NO p lqeu3 10000000 H 10119 yndu 0 440 D lqEsiQ 00000000 1 ye uorea do 0661 8100 1 NO p lqeud 10000000 H 0 4 0 p lqesid 00000000 H 18 ss dung 9261 2100 07001 01 070 83600000 01 00000000 uogenap 1 ul bpnl uoeyoxa Ty esi 2100 0105 01 015 74100000 H 01 22000000 AN puq 2261 1100 6 6 01 170 90000001H O 10000000 H IV 0261 0100 070101 170 F9000000 H 01 10000000 H uleb IV 4161 4000 21 PON L0000000 H 0 0 polN 00000000 H
93. nS pru o GOD 2 LL I Section 5 Functions and Operations 5 1 Input adjustment functions E Input shift e Input shift is accomplished by 2 point correction n the event that there is a large difference between the temperature at the sensor position and the temperature at a location where a temperature reading is required vvith the result being that satis factory control is not possible the temperature difference can be set as an input shift value Input shift value 2 s Input shift value 1 After adiustment Before adjustment Input shift value 2 Input shift input value 2 Input shift value 1 Input Input shift Input shift input value 1 input value 2 Default Setting data Setting range Units value Input value for input shift 1 19999 to 99999 200 0 Input value for input shift 2 19999 to 99999 1300 0 Input shift 1 199 99 to 999 99 Input shift 2 199 99 to 999 99 e Straight line correction is accomplished by setting the value required to correct Input value for input shift 1 in Input shift 1 and the value required to correct Input value for input shift 2 in Input shift 2 Different correction values may be required for Input shift 1 and Input shift 2 and thus the slope of the line between the two points may differ before and after correction Input shift is set for each channel The input shift settings for inpu
94. nput initial setting level gt w af 422 X Yd c ca 2 Make sure that k Input 1 input type is 15 4 to 20 mA Lim a 7 3 Press the Ce key repeatedly to select A 1 Scaling input value 1 Set to 5 with the AIM keys 4 Press the el key to select a5 i Scaling display value 1 Set to O with the AIM keys Em a m 4 5 Press the key to select F z Scaling input value 2 Set to 20 with the AI 6 Press the Ce key to select 4522 Scaling display value 2 Set to 1000 with the AI keys 4 9 I Section 4 Settings Required for Basic Control 7 Press the cel key to select 42 Decimal point position Set to 1 with the AIS keys 8 Hold down the _ key for at least 1 second to return to RUN level The scaling setting is configured for each channel Scaling for inputs 1
95. only for the purposes described in this manual This manual describes the functions performance and application methods needed for optimum use of the E5AR E5ER Digital Controllers Please observe the following items when using the E5AR E5ER Digital Controllers e This product is designed for use by qualified personnel with a knowledge of electrical systems Read this manual carefully and make sure you understand it well to ensure that you are using the E5AR E5ER Digital Controllers correctly Keep this manual in a safe location so that it is available for reference when required Precaution in using the product Before using the Controller under the following conditions make sure that the ratings and performance characteristics of the Controller are sufficient for the systems machines and equipment and be sure to provide the systems machines and equipment with double safety mechanisms and also consult your OMRON representative e Using the Controller under conditions which are not described in the manual e Applying the Controller to nuclear control systems railroad systems aviation systems vehicles combustion systems medical equipment amusement machines safety equipment and other systems machines and equipment Applying the Controller to systems machines and equipment that may have a serious influence on lives and property if used improperly and especially require safety Notice 1 All rights reserved
96. to 4 of a multi point input type corresponds to channels 1 to 4 Select the channel vvith the CH key and then configure the setting Display Setting range Default value Units CH See table below Scaling display value 1 19999 to scaling display value 2 1 m Scaling input value 2 See table below 5 Scaling display value 1 1 to 99999 Decimal point position Setting range The operation of E5AR ER control functions and alarms is based on the input values If a value greater than 2 2 Scaling input value 2 is set for A 1 Scaling input value 1 operation will be as follows for the display value e Direct Reverse Operation When direct operation is set the manipulated variable will increase when the display value decreases When reverse operation is set the manipulated variable will increase when the display value increases Display value Display value Greater Greater L Lesser esser Input value nput value Lesser Greater Lesser Greater Input value u 100 100 Manipulated variable Manipulated variable Direct operation Reverse operation 4 10 4 4 Setting the input type For information on direct and reverse operation refer to 4 7 Setting output param eters P 4 14 Alarm The upper limit alarm and lovver limit alarm vvill be inverted Therefore set an alarm type and alarm values that invert the upper limit or lovver limit of the display value For example if an absolute v
97. uoyeoolle 9 Indu jueAy 2140 4000 uoreoolie indul 14 130 3000 uoleoo e y ndui u9A3 UOlE201I ndu 109AZ uo esojje z Indu u9A3 UonPoolIE ind l Ju9A3 uoleoo e y ndino s sucil onuo 2130 uoleoo e g ndino s sucil 1402 an uoneoolle z indino s suci onuo 4040 uoneoolle ndino 011409 0040 O ss ss adh aiqeue sngpow a Aemodwo I A Z Hues jeu onuoo A 19 Appendix p lqeu y uoneledo 15 1 4 p lqeu uonels do 15 1 4 p lqeu z uonel do 1S1 3 p lqeu uol e1 do He s pio 1511 H U H MO p 1ndino JaySueI 14 p indino H U H MO indino JaySueIL Huul g ddn indino 10000000 440 00000000 10000000 34 00000000 10000000 44 00000000 10000000 440 00000000 lp s 9189 M l ye SE OWES 19 PS owes H l Je SE Lx yae se ewes yo ye Se owes yoye se aues H ye se l yajyese ewes H ye se uueS yeye se owes 19 ye SE yajyeseawes H ye se uueS yeye se owes 119 18 se owes yajyese ewes H ye se ewes yeye se owes H l 1E se owes 9 pesas s owes mea o 2630 4100 yego GLOO 8630 FA 9630 4100 100 2630 6100 0640 8100 z 1ndino
98. 0 4 20 mA 1 CO4 T Linear current output 4 type 0 20 mA 0 4 20 mA 1 MAV 4 Movement Auxiliary output 4 average 4 enabled allocation 0 36 SL H SP upper limit 1 SQR 1 Extraction of a square root 1 enabled OFF ON SQR 4 Extraction of square root 4 enabled Transfer output 1 lovver limit SL L SP lower limit 2 MODE Control mode 3 TRH 2 approximation 1 enabled Transfer output 2 upper limit OFF ON SCL 2 Straight line OREV Forward reverse operation approximation 2 Reverse OR R Forvvard OR D TRL 2 enabled Transfer output 2 lower limit OFF ON CLFL Closed Floating 1 Broken line TRH 3 mat 1 enabled Floati 9 FLOAT Closed CLOSE T feroulpli3 il EE atlon 1 enable 1 Temperature SP lower limit 1 to upper limit of TRL 3 CALB Motor calibration sensor setting range 2 Temperature Lower limit q setting range Transfer output 3 lower limit to SP upperlimit 1 3 1 4 input Standard 0 heating or cooling 1 MOT Travel time Standard 0 heating or cooling 1 1 999 Standard vvith remote SP 2 Heating or cooling 3 with remote SP Proportional 4 Cascade standard 5 Cascade heating or cooling 6 OFF ON A
99. 0 To sec cool MV change rate limit 0 Increase Decrease mode 1 Increase only Section 5 Functions and Operations M MV at Stop MV at stop M MV at PV error MV at error This specifies the MV when control is stopped In heating cooling control a negative value is used for the cooling MV thus when MV at Stop is positive the MV will be sent to the heating output and when negative the MV will be sent to the cooling output The initial setting is 0 0 which means there is no output at stop for either standard or heating cooling control Default 5 0 to 105 0 Standard control MV at Stop 105 0 to 105 0 Heating cooling control Note The order of priority of the MV settings is Manual MV default gt at Stop gt MV at PV error This setting is used to output a fixed MV when an input error PV error or remote SP input error occurs When position proportional control is selected MV at PV error also functions when a potentiometer input error occurs when Operation at potentiometer input error Stop or Closed When control is stopped at Stop takes precedence In manual mode the manual MV default takes precedence 5 0 to 105 0 MV at PV error Standard control Standard type 105 0 to 105 0 Heating cooling control Closed output ON Valve completely o
100. 0001 0002 0003 0004 0005 0006 0100 0101 0102 0103 0104 1 Local SP of Bank No that is selected and running MV monitor heat 0304 V mon a a Bank 0 Alarm value 1 upper limit 0205 Bank 0 Alarm value 1 lower limit 0206 B 0207 Bank 0 Alarm value 2 upper limit 0208 Bank 0 Alarm value 2 lower limit 0209 Status Status 1 2 nternal SP 0203 Bank No 0204 PID Set No monitor 0205 3 monitor 4 monitor ing 0203 Bank 0 Alarm value 0204 Bank 0 Alarm value 1 3 nk 0 Alarm value 3 nk No monitor 4 k No monitor 6 14 Response 6 9 Commands and responses Communication CompoWay F This command is used to read the PV status and other monitor values The number of elements can be set from 0002 to 0019 to allow reading of monitor values in contiguous addresses VVhen used in setting area 1 the response for the PV and internal SP is 0 and the response for the status is as indicated in the notes in Appendix Setting list Status P A 8 MRC SRC Response code Data Response codes The above indicates a normal end For the response codes see 6 5 Reading the variable area P 6 9 M Setting data read Communication CompoWay F Response Variable MRC SRC type Address Bit position Number of elements Variable Aqa Setting data type Explanation C4 0000 to O07F 1 Setting data of setting area 0 C5 Pr
101. 1 1 Same setting data as channel 1 addresses This command is used to read setting data The number of elements can be set from H 0004 to 006A 4 to 106 to allow successive reading of 2 to 53 items of setting data in contiguous addresses To specify the variable type or address see Appendix Setting list P A 6 The upper limit of an address will vary depending on the variable type This command can be used in both setting area O and setting area 1 VVhen used in setting area 1 the response for the remote SP monitor ramp SP monitor and valve opening monitor is 0 and the response for the status is as indicated in the notes in Appendix Setting list Status P A 8 Slave Function Byte Read data Address mode count Data Data 1 1 1 Most significant Least significant 1 1 1 Number of elements x 2 bytes Data n Data n CRC 16 Most significant Least significant W m 2 The above indicates a normal end For information on error responses see 7 5 Reading the variable area P 7 10 7 9 Commands and responses Communication Modbus M Write setting data to protect level Response Slave Function Write start Number of Byte Address mode address elements count Write data CRC 16 Cr me feaj 1 1 2 2 1 2 4 bytes Setting data H 0500 Operation adjustment protect H 0502 Initial setting level protect H 0504 Setting change protect H 0506 PF key protect This command writes setting
102. 1 to Broken line approximation 1 Output 20 1 999 to 9 999 5 1 Input adjustment functions I M Extraction of square root operations Square root extraction e A extraction of square root operations is available for each input to allow operation 1 enabled direct input of the signal from a pressure differential flow meter To use square root extraction set Square root extraction enable to ON the initial setting is OFF e The square root extraction function includes the BLovv cut point setting such that vvhen the result of the operation is belovv the lovv 7 cut point the result is set to 0 The lovv cut point is set for each input using normalized data such that the lovver limit of the input setting range is 0 000 and the upper limit is 1 000 Operation result Lovv cut point Input data 2 Default Setting range 22 OFF Disabled 0 000 to 9 999 0 000 E Other input adjustment functions The following input adjustment functions are also available These functions are explained in Section 8 Setting data P 8 1 e Line noise reduction Input initial setting level e Display digits after PV decimal point Input initial setting level 5 I Section 5 Functions and Operations 5 2 Control functions M SP ramp SP ramp time unit
103. 1 starts to blink after the key is held down for 1 second and after the key is held down for another 2 seconds the display stops blinking and display scan begins If the key is held down for more than 1 second during display scan display scan will stop During display scan only the key is enabled To use any other keys display scan must first be stopped with the key e Channel display in manual mode shows the manual operation screen I Section 5 Functions and Operations Example of display scan operation Power on Initial state ND m aw m aw ro x x T m m m x m n xu m M zr P aw 5 M zr Present value PV SP Display 1 2 n j lt a I 1 L I Normal operation Start using key Blinks after 1 second Present value PV SP Display 1 2 F cH al LU Z r l r ri LI LI LI m CMW MANU LI cH 2 seconds or more Present value PV SP Display 2 Present value PV SP Display 2
104. 16 to the data end For the calculation method see 7 2 Frames Command frame Example of CRC 16 cal culation P 7 4 Response codes Function Error Cause code code w address Variable address error The variable address is not H 0000 Error in written data Variable data error ncorrect command code or related informa tion The operation state does not permit writing e Write via communication is OFF disabled Note that the command is received regardless of write via communication ON OFF Cannot process See explanation of commands in 7 9 Com mands and responses Communication Mod bus P 7 17 Unit error unit change display unit error non volatile memory error Operation error Normal end end No error Command response example Operation command to channel 2 client address H 01 Channel 2 operation command Address H 0000 Written data H 0111 Stop command to channel 2 Command CRC 16 Response 0000 101111 CRC 16 7 15 Section 7 Communication Modbus 7 8 Setting areas 7 16 The E5AR ER has two setting areas for communication functions Setting area 0 and setting area 1 In setting area 0 control continues As such setting area 0 makes it possible to perform operations that require control to be in progress such as reading the PV writing an SP and run stop as well as operations that do not interfere with control On the other hand operations that may change
105. 2 Alarm setting Display adjustment and Communication setting level Move to Control initial setting Setting Move to Input initial Control initial setting 2 Alarm values setting level setting Display adjustment and Communication setting level Yes shows Advanced function setting level Yes Does not show Advanced function setting level e When Initial setting level protect is set to 2 nothing happens when the level key is held down for 1 second to move to Input initial setting level from Operation Adjustment Adjustment 2 Bank setting PID setting Approximation setting or Monitor item level The blinking display to indicate the move does not appear e Setting change protect Prevents use of the AIM keys Setting Change settings by key Remarks exceptions value operation OFF Yes e All setting data on Protect level e Move to special function level e Move to calibration level e Display bank selection e Display PID selection e Setting change protect is initially set to OFF e PF key protect Prevents use of the PF1 PF2 keys Setting Change settings by key operation OFF PF1 PF2 keys are enabled PF1 PF2 keys are disabled operation as a function key and ON 2 channel key is disabled e PF key protect is initially set to OFF 8 3 Operation level 8 3 Operation level Display this level to operate the control system The SP can be
106. 2 C whichever is greater 1 digit max Analog input 1 FS 1 digit max 0 01 to 99 99 FS units of 0 01 FS 4 Alarm setting range 0 19 23293 l Decimal point position depends on input type and decimal point position setting Manual reset value 0 0 to 100 0 units of 0 1 FS l l a ing Insulation resistance 20 MO or higher using 500 V DC insulation resistance tester Voltage resistance 2000 V AC 50 60 Hz 1 min different pole charging terminals Vibration frequency 10 to 55 Hz Acceleration 20 m s 2 I 2 150 m s relay contacts 100 m s times each in 3 axes and 6 directions 100 to 240 V AC type 50 A max 24 V AC DC type 30 A max Approx 450 g unit only Fittings Approx 60 g E5AR Terminal cover Approx 30 g Weight Approx 330 g unit only Fittings Approx 60 g E5ER Terminal cover Approx 16 g Protective structure Front IP66 rear case IP20 terminal plate IPOO mory protection Non volatile memory Write count 100 000 times Me dil 2 4 K T N at 100 C max 2 C 1 digit max U and L 2 C 1 digit max B at 400 C max is not specified R and S at 200 C max 3 C 1 max W Larger of 0 3 PV and 3 C 1 digit max U and L 1 C 1 digit R and S at 200 C max 1 5 C 1 digit Ambient temperature 10 C to 23 C to 55 C Voltage range 15 to 10 of rated voltage EU stands for Engineering
107. 485 5 OUT2 Voltage output He 12V 40mA z OUT Voltage output 5 12V 40 mA or Current output 4 20 mA DC 500 Q max 2 L I 0 20 mA DC 500 Q max Switch using output type setting GIH l J K E5AR A4B 500 E53 ARCC3 B EBAR AdB 500 Event inputs q vent inputs EV r lt e Q 485 PO EVT m o 1 our H ez l Current output 420 mA DC 500 Q max COM 3 P 0 20 mA DC 500 Q mA ey E Switch using output 1 4 Q type setting lt 5 Q po z on _ g 5 Ti urrent output T lt 4 0 4 20 mA DC 500 Q max El o q V PT T 0 20 mA DC 500 0 max I V PT TC Current Voltage Thermocouple Switch using output Current Voltage Thermocouple Resistance thermometer type setting Resistance thermometer 2 4 2 2 How to Use the Terminals E5AR Q43DB FLK E5AR C43DB FLK 7 E5AR A4B 500 71 uts 100 240 VAC 4 E5AR A4B 500 Auxiliary outputs E5AR A4B 500 100 240 VAC A B C DIE Relay outputs Relay outputs 67 Py 67 LE ikilik 21 2 SUBI oo 3 3 SUB2 5 7 E53 ARQC3 6 T o 6 SUB4 RSs
108. 485 ua 6 B 2 173 Fi Voltage output HE 1 12V 40 mA _ OUT1 4 3 Voltage output 12V 40 mA or HO 41 Current output io 4 20 mA DC 500 Q max 5 i bi bi 0 20 mA DC 500 0 max 6 iN LN Switch using output type setting 1 CD E TE ESER AB 500 E53 ARCC3 gt f ESER AB 500 Event inputs Event inputs EV Ae Rs 485 Sl EV r s O Ev2 La 2 OUT2 2 EV2 Pa x 2 Current output COM 3 4 20 mA DC 500 0 max TO COM 3 0 20 mA 500 Q max 2 db Switch using output Q 4 a 7 type setting ex 5 OUTI un iLL 6 Current output w x 6 Yee s 4 20 mA 500 Q max C V PT TC curen wots e 0 20 mA 500 Q max Current Voltage Th Thermocouple Thermocouple Resistance thermometer Switch using output type setting Resistance thermocouple KK 2 8 2 2 How to Use the Terminals E5ER QT3DB FLK E5ER CT3DB FLK N E5ER AB 500 E53 ARB4 E5ER AB 500 E53 ARB4 100 240 VAC 100 240 VAC A d Event inputs EV3 EV4 EV5 EV6 COM E53 ARCC3 N Rs 4g5 B ours O Current output 4 20 mA DC 500 Q max 0 20 mA DC 5000 4 Switch using output type setting lt 6 OUT1 Current output 4 20 mA DC 500 Q max C 0 20 mA DC 500 Q max Switch using output type setting
109. 5 m Upper and lower limit gt Lt He range deviation 7 Upper and lower limit alarm with standby sequence deviation with stanbdy sequence deviation Lower limit alarm with stanbdy sequence deviation Absolute value upper limit ON Absolute value lower limit OFF Absolute value upper limit with standby sequence 7 Absolute value lovver limit vvith standby sequence orris s1 Set values in general 1 4 and 5 allow upper and lower limits of alarm value to be separately set and are indicated by L and H 2 Set value in general 1 Upper and lower limit alarm ES Upper limit alarm Case 1 Case 2 Case 3 always ON a L H SP SPL H H SP L H lt 0 L gt 0 H gt 0 L lt 0 5 H e L IHI gt ILI mn ESP H gt 0 L lt 0 SPH L IHISILI 3 Set value in general 4 Upper and lower limit range Case 3 always OFF Case 1 ase Case 2 Hev L 206 H SP L L H SP SP L H m L lt 0 L gt 0 H lt 0 L gt 0 H gt 0 L lt 0O H LSP IHIZILI lt SPH L IHISILI 4 Set value in general 5 Alarm with upper and lower limit standby sequence With the above upper and lower limit alarms eln cases 1 and 2 eln case 3 always OFF If hysteresis overlaps at upper and lower limit always OFF 5 Set value in general 5 Alarm with upper and lower limit standby sequence If hysteresis overlaps at upper and lower limit always OFF 6 For information on standby sequences see 5 6 Al
110. 56 N m Perform correct setting of the product according to the application Failure to do so may occasionally cause unexpected operation resulting in minor or moderate injury or damage to the equipment Ensure safety in the event of product failure by taking safety mea sures such as installing a separate overheating prevention alarm system Product failure may occasionally prevent control or oper ation of alarm outputs resulting in damage to the connected facil ities and equipment Do not use the equipment for measurements within Measurement Categories Il III or IV according to IEC61010 1 Doing so may occasionally cause unexpected operation resulting in minor or moderate injury or damage to the equipment Use the equipment for measurements only within the Measurement Category for which the product is designed The service life of the output relays depends on the switching Capacity and switching conditions Consider the actual application conditions and use the product within the rated load and electrical service life Using the product beyond its service life may occa sionally result in contact welding or burning Precautions for Safe Use 1 Use and store the product vvithin the specified ambient temperature and humidity ranges f several products are mounted side by side or arranged in a vertical line the heat dissipation vvill cause the internal temperature of the products to rise shortening the service life f
111. 6 Selecting the control mode P 4 13 6 Related setting data Manual reset value Adiustment level P 8 15 Hysteresis heat Hysteresis cool Adiustment level P 8 16 Control Transfer output assignment Control initial setting 2 level P 8 46 ku Re a e When direct action is selected the MV is increased when the PV Increases When reverse action is selected the MV is increased when the PV decreases Setting range Units Default value ar r Reverse operation Reverse action ar d Direct operation 6 Related information 4 7 Setting output parameters W Direct operation cool Reverse operation heat P 4 14 rt ya Position proportional type rm Use this setting to select the control method for a position propor tional type 6 Related information 3 3 Position proportional control of a ceramic kiln P 3 9 8 11 Control initial setting 2 level i lt 8 11 Control initial setting 2 level H This level contains initial settings for computational functions including Control Transfer output assignment event input assignment auxiliary output assignment and first order lag operation enable disable Povver on Operation level Adjustment Adjustment 2 Bank setting gt PID setting 7 77 level p p key Less key Less key Less EVel sa key Less level PZA key Less level EET
112. 7 14 Slave Function Write start Instruction Related address mode address code information CRC 16 1 2 1 2 2 bytes Related 7 ale 126 H 30 AT stop H F0 AT stop 7 23 Section 7 Communication Modbus Response M Write mode 7 24 This command stops AT This command is used in setting area O If used in setting area 1 an operation error will result An operation error will also result in the following situations Run Stop of the specified channel is set to Stop e Auto Manual of the specified channel is set to Manual To use the command Write via communication must be enabled using the Write via communication operation command Slave Function Write start Instruction Related address mode address code information CRC 16 1 1 2 2 2 bytes The above indicates a normal end For information on error responses see 7 7 Operation commands Communication Modbus P 7 14 Slave Function Write start Instruction Related address mode address code information CRC 16 1 1 2 2 2 bytes Related information Description Backup mode RAM write mode This command is used to select backup mode or RAM write mode The initial setting is backup mode This command can be used in both setting area O and setting area 1 To use this command Write via communication must be enabled using the Write via communication operation command Explanation When communication is used to
113. 8 0 did 2w AN 2 2 a as x 8 o did yw r ddn AN U0l 929 s Aejdsip AN wo Agidsip ude 6 seg 009 189 psepue s l nej p a qeweA payeindiuew jenuey 1002 Jey igpugls anjen ineienineiep ajqeuea payeindivew jenueyy C 7 5 571 5275 0111900 julod 601000 Z 91 S DIPA juaWIsnipe 1101 pueq peep Ad Z 0 S DIPA juaWIsnipe Jndu anjea Ile dwel dS anjea asi duel dS 01 0 syueg 1 1lull I9M0 uup V 0 0 syueg t lluul 19ddn unejy 0 0 syueg t 0 Sanjen wel 2 0 0 syueq 49 r 0 INd NO J JSu81 JO 1 r o indino J jsu 1 JO 41 S UUPU Jo Jaquinu p lqeuq 9 0 uono s indino iindino J JSU81 101002 r 0 slu uuuBisse Indino eilixny y 0 sjuawubisse indino Jaysues 101002 9 0 sjuawubisse ndu 109441 anjen eydsip Buyjeos O abue Burmas Indu Jo 1 1 O 2 feidsip Huyeos o aues m s Indu zo puj edin O ywl dS z anjen ejdsip 205 O Bumas ndu zo ywaddn O anrea eydsip Bueos 40 Bum s indu Jo O yw j Jaddn qS ajowey g g O g 8 0 Id AG Ad r l 4addn ue 0129 95 oewoyny anjen eydsip uleos O abue Burmas Indu Jo yus 48M07 O g anrea eydsip 95 1o aues Buas Indu o puiuaddn O ywlj
114. Ad _ 9501 950 d jqene anjea jas shun uollisod uolluouu um s 9911 eyep um s ulod pewag ynejeq sngpoy 4 henmmodwoy 1olluouu uoneolunululo Ag 195 s njea ase SAN eA JOWUOW S n BA 195 Ul PS eDIPUI H A uones do o o o 7o zl zl 11 Appendix pa qesip s n n 070 0 00L 01 070 83600000 01 00000000 p lqesip s ll lr 070 07001 01 070 83600000 01 00000000 u do dwo9 L L0000000 H plou 0 00000000 u do Ajayejdwod 1 1 3 1 1002 JW ayer BHueYD AN L O Qe y ywi ayes BBUeYO AN I O uonisod Ad e AW T O IL O L I O L O L O r mal PIAI 23 Us L LL gt gt Lk 1 1 m 1 1 O pat Ki K K 1 K 1 1 1 Ki Ki Ki Ki K K r K 23 mo r bat r 3 fq q tq o S4 HO l oueo m xz LV 240 0 ON ueg uonsod nIBA 6 6 ss pp n eA 19S sun yulod jeuiseq yneeq JayoeeYD anjen uoluouu Hues 1981240 s lnqiny erep bum s q Kemoduiog 4OWUOW uoneolunululo Aq 195 s njea ase SAN eA JOWUOW S n BA 18S Ul PS edIPUI H ju unsn pv m
115. Analog input Scain Current input 4 to 20 mA 0 to 20 mA Voltage input 1 to 5V Oto 5V Oto 10y Decimal point position Input type SW bottom 6 Event input An operation command can be assigned to each event input If event assignment input is to be used use an E5AR ER LILIB D In the case of a multi point input type assignment data can be set for channels 2 and higher as needed for the number of channels The operation instruction VVrite via communication OFF ON is common to all channels 7 apui A nen o la Channel 1 Bank bit mu Channel 1 A Channel 1 Auto Manual Channel 1 SP mode remote local mm Channel 2SP mode remote local 1 8 1 3 Input output Configuration and Main Functions I Control mode The type of control performed by each controller is selected by setting the control mode Setting the control mode sets default values for the output assignments required for the control After setting the control mode specify direct reverse operation for each channel Standard type Control modes that can be selected vary depending on the number of input points cos s pu 2 input type 4 input Control Transfer output type type assignment OUT1 Channel 1 control output heating side IN2 OUT2 Channel 2 control output heating side OUT3 Channel 3 control output heating side OUT4 Channel 4 control output heating sid OUT1 Channel 1 control output
116. B Disturbance rectification band 0 000 9 999 DOJW Disturbance judgement width 99 99 99 99 1 Position proportional type Closed Hold Open 1 0 1 arr x 2 Level LAGP 1 First order lag operation 1 Time constant 0 0 999 9 LAGP 3 First order lag operation 3 Time constant LAGP 4 First order lag operation 4 Time constant MAVP 1 Move average 1 Move average count 1 2 4 8 16 32 MAVP 2 Move average 2 Move average count 1 2 4 8 16 32 MAVP3 Move average 3 Move average count 1 2 4 8 16 32 MAVP 4 Move average 4 Move average count 1 2 4 8 16 32 Extraction of square root 1 Lovv cut point 0 000 9 999 Extraction of square root 2 Lovv cut point 0 000 9 999 Lovv cut point 0 000 9 999 Extraction of square root 4 Lovv cut point 0 000 9 999 1key 3 seconds or more Control stops For the input initial setting level see page A 32 Adiustment 2 level Control initial setting 2 level Special function setting level 1 less than 1 second gt Bank Setting Level Display bank selection Bank 0 7 LSP Bank 7 LSP SP lower limit SP upper limit 7 PID Bank 7 PID set nunmer 0 8 1 7 AL 1 Bank 7 _ 1A
117. C set the value to 1 Input types range uni Input type muna lt ee ee ae cee ee 1 Pot 150 00 to 16000 199 99 to 30000 _ gt 200 to 13000 300 to 2300 0 s k 0010 5000 00 to 9000 _ a st 3000 io 8500 100 0_to 15000 7 g s to 4000 6 T 200 0 to 4000 3000 to 7000 7 E 0 o 6 0 to 11000 L io 8500 m00 to 15000 u 200 o 400 s00 to 7000 wo N 2000 10 13000 3000 to 23000 n CR oowoo oo to 30000 _ S 00 1017000 00 to 30000 _ s 1000 10 18000 3000 to 32000 4 OI OO I N I lt lt A S 52 Cl r rm Z 4 8 4 4 Setting the input type I Setting range boss Input type dii 4 to 20 mA One of the following ranges is displayed depending ANALOG 010 20mA on the scaling 1to5V 7 o gt O 0105 199 99 to 999 99 Oto 10V 19 999 to 99 999 1 9999 to 9 9999 Set the input type switch according to the Input type setting The initial settings are 2 and TC PT VVhen analog input voltage input current input is used scaling according to the type of control is possible Scaling Setting the display to show 0 0 for an input value of 5 mA and 100 0 for 20 mA vvhen the input 1 type is set to 4 to 20 mA 1 Hold the _ key down for at least 3 seconds to move from RUN level to
118. Cascade open closed Section 6 Communication CompoWay F FINS mini response text Response code MRC SRC MRES SRES 0 05 2 ESETE 2 MRC SRC FINS mini command text appears here 4 Result of execution of the command Response codes code 1001 Command length The command is too long too long n I Command length The command is too short 1002 too short 4400 Parameter error Operation code or related information is not correct Unable to execute because write via communication is disabled Unable to execute operation command For more information see correspond 2203 Operation error ing operation command explanation in 6 9 Commands and responses Com munication CompoWay F Unit error unit change display unit error internal non volatile memory error 6 12 6 8 Setting areas I 6 8 Setting areas The E5AR ER has two setting areas for communication Setting area 0 and setting area 1 In setting area 0 control continues As such setting area 0 makes it possible to perform operations that require control to be in progress such as reading the PV writing an SP and run stop as well as operations that do not interfere with control On the other hand operations that may change control such as writing initial setting data cannot be performed Note that setting data that cannot be written can still be read In setting area 1 control is stopped This makes it po
119. Ch 1 scaling display value 1 0 Ch 1 scaling input value 2 20 Ch 1 scaling display value 2 250 Ch 1 decimal point position Input 2 input type 15 4 to 20mA Output type of output 1 1 Current output initial setting Output type of linear current output 1 1 4 to 20 mA initial setting Control mode 4 Ratio control Straight line approximation 1 an Enable Straight line approximation 2 an Enable Straight line approximation 1 Straight line approximation 2 See the setting examples on the next page Analog parameter 1 0 05 SP mode r Remote SP Section 3 Typical Control Examples IN2 Straight line approximation 1 Straight line approximation 1 Straight line approximation 2 RUN level 4 f Present value PV SP MV ae NES gt ai 14 w 23 I r l as RSP 3 20 The following explains how to configure the control mode straight line approximation 1 and 2 settings and the ratio setting t is assumed that the input 1 and input 2 type settings and the scaling setting have already been configured Ratio control is achieved by multiplying input 2 which serves as a reference by the proportion and using the result as remote SP Set the SP mode to remote SP Straight line approximation 1 First to make the units of input 2 m
120. ER i 6 Ample control modes and control functions MN Outputs Multi output High resolution 6 Control period Selection of a PID is possible not only by direct specification of the PID Set No in a bank but also by PID set automatic selection according to the present value and deviation Supports typical control modes standard control heating cooling control proportional control cascade control Note that proportional control and cascade control are only possible on 2 input types Floating control or closed control can be selected for position proportional types Floating control allovvs position proportional control vvithout a potentiometer Remote SP Tvvo input types can use an external input for the set point SP ramp function This limits the amount of change of the set point based on the rate of change SP ramp value This function is useful for control applica tions such as firing ceramics where sudden changes in temperature are not desirable The E5AR ER allows an SP ramp rise value and fall value to be set separately Multi output supporting current output and voltage output pulse is available Resolution of current output O to 20 mA Approx 54 000 resolution 4 to 20 mA Approx 43 000 resolution The control period can be set as short as 0 2 seconds allowing precise time sharing proportional control 1 3 I Section 1 Overview 1 2 Part Names and Functions MH Front Operation indicat
121. Event inputs Voltage output lt 8 2 il 0 12V 40mA bb our xu iFS rl Voltage output 5 41 if EV4 a om 12V 40 mA or 5 babi Current output i 6 bb EV5 Ha o 4 4 20 mA 500 2 max 6l EA 0 20 mA DC 500 Q max E G H T EVE Switch using output type setting COM E53 ARCC E5AR A4B 500 Event inputs OUT4 EV1 Current output 4 20 mA DC 500 max a a 0 20 mA DC 500 max COM Svvitch using output type setting db OUT3 5 Current output 4 20 mA DC 500 O max 5 j 0 20 mA DC 500 Q max Switch usi fotit V PT Suvitc using outpu Current Voltage Thermocouple type setting Resistance thermometer 2 5 Section 2 Preparations E5AR Q43DW FLK 2 loop Control E5AR C43DW FLK 2 loop Control feel 7 E5AR A4W 500 E5AR A4W 500 E5AR A4W 500 E5AR A4W 500 100 240 VAC Auxiliary outputs 100 240 VAC Auxiliary outputs Relay outputs Relay outputs J J A BIC D a J Je amp E53 ARQC3 b B E53 ARCC3 5 RS 485 B 6 4 A RS 485 qe Voltage output Event inputs Q 7 7525 1 Event inputs 12V 40 mA l 0 20 mA 500 Q max
122. H 0 2 00000000 H d 1ndul se ewes 1ndu 1 4 10000000 H 0 2 00000000 d 1 ndul se ewes 1101 L 4 10000000 H 0 00 00000000 H sun z 1ndu d yndul se ewes yndu edi 2 1ndu 1 4 10000000 H 0 Do 00000000 sun 1ndu 61 A OL 0 0 61000000 H 81 A S 0 0 21000000 H ZL AG Ol 1 11000000 H vw 02 0 0 01000000 H WW OZ 0 7 40000000 H 7 M 40000000 H 21 8 40000000 21 3 00000000 LL 80000000 01 N V0000000 H 6 60000000 8 1 80000000 Z 3 0000000 9 1 90000000 S 590000000 7 2 00000 6 M 0000000 H z 20000000 1 00114 0000000 I 0 00134 00000000 2 uowwog d 1ndul 99 uollsod nIBA ss ippy ss uippv 90 ajqeue AOHUOW UonPOlunululo Aq 18s SEN eA ase Jopuow S n PA 18S Ul D TBOLUL Hi lenlul 1104 K x f HO HO HO f 010 F0000000 H 01 00000000 HO uollisod 11100 jewl99q 8100 2000 HO HO HO HO 49 ye se OWES 66666 10 20000 01 enjen Ae dsip Sulleos g anjen Aejdsip bulleos yo ye se Wuul 4addn indul o 110 11 ind l z nipA 1ndul Sulleos niPA Aejdsip 5ulleos niPA indul 1 90 lt ku sun ainyesodwe indull 4020 2000 d y induj 2020 9000 sun ainyesodwea
123. Hi Bun s uoewixorddy 1 quunu S Ald PAPAS s indul Josuas Jo y pim p l ds ndul in ej duu l 7 66666 01 6666 1 SI uinuulxeuu yndul yuu Jaddn payloads Z INH Ul peAeldsip JON L Ad hu 4addn ebues HO 5 oneulolne 8 did A8VO Zv00 HO Ad uu saddn uei uonosjes onewoyne g qid 0890 9 00 H x v 66666 01 66661 46981000 o 1414 141 1 1 H SI wnwixew UOhel do 32 HEB JOU M y 1nq p Bueu2 ues siu eui lui 10 Sd 0666666 18 pX SI 8 ON 19S did JO uo 5 j s y JO pwj Joddn l p bu Hues Jo YOL L 0 960 1 1ndul Goleuy ndul 66666 01 6666 L SI WNWIXEW oy 00991 Josuas Jo Bue1 p l ds jndul sunyesoduay Bue1 Sulleos Jo 0L L 0 04 L Indu B leuy na adc o 6upioooy 1917 Z Ad DIPA jueseid Jo BUL Aejdsip se ewes EHEN pueq jeuoioaoa 8 did AZVO 4600 pueq leuorluodold did O9VO 9800 Appendix uonsod nIEA ss Jppv ssoippy d qeueA HUYU Isa uneyod W xo EE PAR erep 5 SnqpoN 4 Kemodwoa A 16 youms d indul v Jo au Jo ss rpieb l izi S d indul y 40 NJLA ul peBueyo s d indul y u ym 1nd l Jo 511011 puE l ddn o 5921 6111 e
124. M key 6 Level after changing channels 6 Displayed setting data after changing channels time the key is pressed and the displayed channel changes accordingly Only channels that are enabled with the Number of enabled channels setting can be displayed If the Number of enabled channels setting is set to 2 on a 4 point input type the display will switch through the channels as follows each time the key is pressed Channel 1 Channel 2 Channel 1 Channel 1 After changing channels the level will be that of the currently displayed channel VVhen a manual mode channel is selected the display vvill shovv the manual operation screen of RUN level Displayed data after changing channels is as follovvs If the setting data of a displayed channel continues to be effective after changing to a different channel the setting data will be displayed the setting data of a displayed channel will not be effective after changing to a different channel due to a different control method or other reason the next effective setting data is displayed The following is an example of changing channels in RUN level Present value PV SP Display 2 EN j I E h P ee 41 Ee m a lt 6 al 2 mr WET Present value PV SP Display 2 ere al YE 2 ICH key N
125. Operation commands Communication Modbus P 7 14 7 29 l Section 7 Communication Modbus t gt 2 amp 5 SO o o o 7 30 Section 6 Setting data 8 1 How to use this chapter 8 2 8 2 Protect level 55 8 3 8 3 Operation level Cuna 8 5 8 4 Adjustment level CAO m adan 8 12 8 5 Adjustment 2 level 8 22 8 6 Bank setting level 1500003 8 26 8 7 PID setting level 8 30 8 8 Approximation setting level e umanuan sns 8 33 8 9 Input initial setting level 8 35 8 10 Control initial setting level 1016 mh D rene 8 41 8 11 Control initial setting 2 level e Beene eee ni 8 45 8 12 Alarm setting level 131060 8 53 8 13 Display adiustment level 105 506 8 59 8 14 Communication setting level L 5 8 63 8 15 Advanced function setting level L AAF 8 67 8 16 Expansion control setting level EZ 8 72 5 5 L 2 I Section 8 Setting data 8 1 How to use this section Marks used in this section r n Setting Monitor Operation Explains the meaning and function of a setting data item Shows the setting range and initial setting of a setting data item Used for monitor values Explains a procedure for operating the EBAR ER Indicates where a setting data item is explained and notes related set
126. P 8 11 PF1 setting PF2 setting Advanced function setting level P 8 68 Manual output method Manual MV default value Expansion control setting level P 8 77 e Display 1 shows the PV and Display 2 shows the SP The SP can be set e Either the local SP or the remote SP is shown depending on the selected SP mode In the case of remote SP the value can only be monitored Local SP mode Remote SP mode SUB1 SUB2 SUB3 SUB4 Present value SUB1 SUB2 SUB3 SUB4 Present value PV nm ev SP a al Monitor only K I cer r MV monitor l LI MV monitor mi FI 74 M 4 12 Um TE z E RSP RSP goes off OUT1 OUT2 OUT3 OUT4 STOP RSP RSP lights up PFI PF2 CH CO CO s A PF eze CO A A M A M ESAR ESAR e When using a bank in local SP mode a link is created to the local SP of the selected bank For example if Bank 3 is selected the local SP of Bank 3 appears in Display 2 and when the value is changed the value of Bank 3 local SP Bank setting level also changes 8 7 I Section 8 Setting data CH Remote SP monitor Setting m Monitor The decimal point position is determined by the selected sensor in the case of temperature input and by scaling in the case of analog input If Displa
127. SP as follovvs VVhen PV SP When PV gt SP SP a Sr ramp nising SP PV Time Power on Power on 5 2 Control functions I 6 Limitations during AT starts at the SP during ramp SP ramp e The ramp SP at AT startup is held during AT e SP ramp is disabled when operation is stopped e The SP ramp control begins with SP start after recovery from a sensor error Control begins about 1 second after recovery from a sensor error e When a sensor error occurs the goal SP takes effect and the alarm function operates with respect to the goal SP Setting data Monitor and setting Units range SP ramp SP value EU monitor SP ramp rise value O to 99999 2 SP ramp fall value 0 to 99999 2 S EU sec SP ramp time unit M EU min EU min H EU hour 1 EU sec EU min or EU hour depending on the SP ramp time unit setting 2 The decimal point position depends on the input type M Banks e Up to eight banks can be created Each bank is used to store an SP local SP alarm value and a PID Set No lr loas o Local SP e The Local SP is the SP that is used during operation The SP Local SP value that appears and can be set in the PV SP setting screen in RUN level is the local SP value of the currently executing bank number mt ma bom w bank number a
128. a number that is assigned to each set of data in the variable area Addresses are assigned in order beginning from the first set For more information on addresses see Appendix Setting list 6 Note that the addresses indicated in the setting list are addresses of channel 1 For example to specify an address of channel 2 add 0100 to the address in the setting list For channel 3 add 0200 and for channel 4 add 0300 The number of elements is expressed as a 2 byte hexadecimal number The specification range for the number of elements varies depending on the command See 6 9 Commands and responses Communication CompoWay F P 6 14 for more information For example if the number of elements is 0010 the first 16 elements of data H 10 from the address are specified Values read and written to the variable area are expressed in hexadecimal and disregard the decimal point position negative values are expressed as a two s complement Example D 105 0 H 0000041A The variable is an 8 digit number in hexadecimal Negative values are expressed as a two s complement The decimal is disregarded For example if the PV of the E5AR ER is 105 0 it will be read as H 0000041A 105 0 1050 0000041 6 5 Reading the variable area I 6 5 Reading the variable area The data area is read by setting the required data in the following FINS mini command text format FINS mini command text Variable MRC SRC type Read sta
129. a response from the E5AR ER response after sending a command The interval between receiving a response and Allow an interval of at least 5 ms after receiving a sending the next command from the host system is 1 response before sending a command too short Mistake in host system program e Correct the program Check the command in the line monitor e Try running a sample program The unit number setting is different from the unit Make sure the unit numbers match number specified in the command Settings 10 8 Appendix PECiicallonsuuceuu an ad A 2 Sensor input setting ranges Indicator control ranges A 4 ASGIF G0065 u as A 5 SENO S b soba dal buana ID A 6 A 30 Ke c o o lt Appendix Specifications M Unit ratings Power supply voltage 100 to 240 V AC 50 60 Hz 24 V DC 50 60 Hz 24 V DC Allowed voltage variance 85 to 110 of rating voltage range E5AR 22 VA max 15 VA 10 VV max p ESER 17 VA max ESER 11 VA 7 W max Thermocouples K J T E L U N R S B W Platinum resistance temperature input sensors Pt100 Sensor input Current input 4 to 20 mA DC 0 to 20 mA DC including remote SP input Voltage input 1 to 5 V DC O to 5 V DC O to 10 V DC including remote SP input Input impedance 150 Q using current input approx 1 MQ using voltage input Voltage pulse output Control Gukantsiiu t O t
130. alarm upper limit 4 O to 7 x 96 Rw w 8 6 Bank setting level L he L I Bank alarm lower limit 1 A iL Lei Bank alarm lower limit AL EL Alarm type is rt FE re 1 1 4 k M xn Bank alarm lovver limit 3 VLL upper and Bank alarm lower limit4 ARYL lovver limit alarm If an alarm mode with upper and lower limit settings is selected for Alarm 1 type through Alarm 4 type the upper limit and lovver limit are set separately m n Setting e Set the upper and lower limits of alarms 1 to 4 in banks 0 to 7 For temperature input the decimal point position will depend on the selected sensor For analog input the position is set using the Decimal point position setting Units Default value 19999 to 99999 This setting can be used when the alarm type is Upper and lower limit alarm Upper and lower limit range alarm or Upper and lovver limit alarm with standby sequence Related setting data Alarm type Alarm setting level P 8 54 Alarm latch Alarm setting level 8 55 Alarm hysteresis Alarm setting level P 8 56 Standby sequence restart Alarm setting level P 8 57 Auxiliary output non exciting Alarm setting level 8 58 8 29 I Section 8 Setting data 8 7 PID setting level L a This level contains the PID value MV limit and alarm settings for each PID set To move to a PID set use the Displ
131. ara byte long For more information see 7 3 List of functions P 7 7 Text of command based on the function code Specifies Data variable addresses and the values of setting data specify in hexadecimal Cyclical Redundancy Check This is a check code calcu CRC 16 lated from the client address to the end of the data Two bytes in hexadecimal Silent interval at least 3 5 characters long The following explains how a message is processed 1 byte at a time in the processing register this is a 16 bit register called the CRC register 1 Set an initial value of H FFFF in the CRC register 2 Perform XOR on the CRC register and the 1st byte of the message and return the result to the CRC register 3 Shift the contents of the CRC register 1 bit to the right filling the MSB with 4 If the bit shifted from the LSB is repeat step 3 If the bit shifted from the LSB is 1 perform XOR on the CRC register and H A001 and return the result to the CBC register 5 Repeat steps 3 and 4 until the contents of the register have been shifted 8 bits to the right 7 2 Frames I 6 If the end of the message has not been reached perform XOR on the next byte of the CRC register and the message return the result to the CRC register and repeat the procedure from step 3 7 Append the result the value in the CBC register to the lovver byte of the message Example of appending the result If the calcu
132. communication with a host computer a unit number must be set in each controller to allovv the host computer to recognize it Any number from 0 to 99 can be set The unit number is initially set to 1 When using multiple controllers make sure that no units have the same unit number or communication vvill not take place correctly After setting a unit number turn off the power and then turn it on again to make the nevv unit number take effect Communications speed 675 Set the communications speed for communication with a host computer The following speeds are available 9 6 9 600 bit s 19 2 19 200 bit s 38 4 38 400 bit s After setting the speed turn off the power and then turn it on again to make the new speed setting take effect Communication data length L 7 The communication data length can set to 7 bits or 8 bits Communication stop bit 55 The communication stop bit can be set to 1 or 2 19 14 Communication parity 25 The communication parity can be set to None nan Even Ewin or Odd Transmission wait time 5526 After changing the transmission wait time perform a software reset or turn the power off and then on to make the new setting take effect 5 34 5 9 Using communication functions I For information on communication procedures see Sec tion 6 Communication CompoWay F or Section 7 Communication Modbus P 7 1 depending on the communication protocol you are using
133. connect inputs 2 to 4 IN2 to IN4 in the same way according to the number of input points E5AR O hermocouple Temperature Voltage Current resistance input sensor j Thermocouple Temperature Voltage Current resistance input sensor To prevent the appearance of error displays due to unused inputs set the Number of enabled channels On the E5AH control output 1 OUT1 outputs to terminals F5 to F6 and control output 2 OUT2 outputs to terminals F3 to F4 On the E5ER control output 1 OUT1 outputs to terminals C5 to and control output 2 OUT2 outputs to terminals C3 to C4 On a multi point input type output takes place from control output 3 OUTS and control output 4 OUT4 E5AR Pulse voltage output Linear current output R OUT1 OUT2 OUT3 OUT4 OUT1 OUT2 75 E5ER Pulse ni output Linear current output b ar 9 or OUT1 OUT2 OUT3 OUT4 zala O O Or 0 el fel sole ayn D D e f terminals and are used for pulse voltage output approxi mately 2 V are output when the power is turned on Load resis tance 10 kQ max for 10 msec e n the case of linear current output approximately 2 mA are output for 1 second when the power is turned on 2 2 How to Use the Terminals I Control outputs that are not used for control can be used for transfer output with the control output transfer output assignment setting Specifications for each ou
134. data to Protect level Protect level is explained in 4 1 Setting levels and key operation P 4 2 This command is used in setting area 0 If used in setting area 1 an error will result To use this command use the Write via communication operation command to enable Write via communication and then use the Move to protect level operation command to move to Protect level Slave Function Write start Number of address mode address elements CRC 16 1 1 2 2 2 The above indicates a normal end For information on error responses see 7 6 Writing to the variable area P 7 12 M Write setting data Communication Modbus Slave Function Write start Number of Byte Write data address mode address elements count Data 1 Data 1 1 2 2 1 1 Number of elements x 2 bytes Data n Data n CRC 16 wasinman 2 7 9 Section 7 Communication Modbus 7 20 Response Explanation e H 0600 to 060E H 0700 to 0744 H 0800 to 0818 H 0900 to 09DE H 0A00 to H OBOO to OB6E H 0C00 to 0C20 H ODOO to 0026 00 to 0E60 to OF20 H 1000 to 100E Setting data of setting area 0 RUN level Adiustment level Adiustment level 2 Bank setting level PID setting level Approximation setting level Setting data of setting area 1 Input initial setting level Control initial setting level Control initial setting 2 level Alarm setting level Display adjustment le
135. for the lead The mounting location of the temperature sensor is too far Mount the sensor so that the tip of the protective tubing from the point of control and the thermal response is slow approaches the point of control The ambient operating temperature of the EBAR ER Keep the ambient operating temperature within the rated exceeds the rated temperature range 10 to 55 C Wireless devices are used near the EBAR ER Shield the EBAR ER The temperature of the terminal plate is not uniform due to heat dissipation from peripheral devices to heat dissipation The terminal plate of the ESAR ER is exposed to strong air flow The input type switch setting is not correct Connections 5 001 The input type setting is not correct 2 The temperature units setting is not correct The measured temperature appears to deviate after Set the input shift value to 0 0 Correct the host system program a j 5 A temperature sensor was replaced or a switch setting Turn the power off and then on was changed while the power was on Simple method for checking input Platinum resistance temperature input sensor 1 Connect a 100 resistor between input terminals A B and short circuit B B 2 If the measured temperature is approximately 0 0 C or 32 0 F the is operating normally Thermocouple 1 Short circuit the input terminal of the temperature sensor 2 I
136. heating cooling control e Position proportional control type Control method Setting range Default value Position 1 Completely closed 0 0 Hold proportional Hold 1 Completely open CH MV change rate limit heating MV change rate limit cooling ay r m Setting a 8 4 Adjustment level L Ads 6 Related information 4 12 Starting and stopping control P 4 27 ark Advanced PID control Proportional band z 0 00 a x yi The MV change rate limit sets the maximum allovved change in the MV or the opening on a position proportional control type per second f a change occurs in the MV that exceeds this limit the MV will be changed at the set rate limit until the required change is attained When set to 0 0 the function is disabled For standard control use MV change rate limit heating MV change rate limit cooling cannot be used For heating cooling control the MV change rate limit can be set separately for heating and cooling Use MV change rate limit heat for heating and MV change rate limit cooling for cooling The MV change rate limit cannot be used in the follovving situations e Manual mode e AT is running e During ON OFF control P 0 00 e During stop during Manipulated variable at stop output e During MV at PV error output Setting data Setting range Units Default value MV change rate limit heat 0 0 to 100 0 isec
137. input 1 9999 to 9 9999 The initial setting is 2 TC PT L 100 0 to 850 0 100 0 to 1500 0 e z E 00106000 0011000 mua Related setting data Input temperature units Input initial setting level P 8 37 SP upper limit SP lower limit Control initial setting level P 8 43 Input 1 temperature units Input 2 temperature units Input 3 temperature units Input 4 temperature units CH Scaling input value 1 a A Setting Scaling display value 1 Scaling input value 2 Scaling display value 2 Decimal point position e Setting 8 9 Input initial setting level L tee om ar L v a L je a w ml l mo Me Me Me kup Ku J m 0 lt ya e Select Celsius C or Fahrenheit F for the temperature units Setting range Default value C Units _ Bn 6 Related setting data Input Type Input initial setting level P 8 36 m 4 ae w ea a S z w i ea a tee J 14 al 1 L er Lim w i w lt Input type is analog inp w 1 These settings are used vvhen the input type is analog input IILI Input type is temperature input ut e Scaling is carried out for analog input The display value for Scaling
138. kiln W Settings for position proportional control P 3 12 6 Related parameters Motor calibration Control initial setting 2 level P 8 52 8 12 Alarm setting level L 3 8 12 Alarm setting level L 3 This level contains settings for the type and output operation of alarms including alarm type close in alarm open in alarm and latch settings Povver on Operation level gt Adiustment gt Adjustment 2 gt Bank setting PID setting 1 7 key Less key Less key Less key Less key Less level l than 1 second than 1 second than 1 second than 1 second than 1 second i key less than 1 second i key key 1 second 3 seconds or more or more Input initial setting gt Control initial setting Control initial setting gt Alarm setting Display adjustment 17 i key less key less key less level 193 key Less keyless level 5 i than 1 second than 1 second than 1 second than 1 second than 1 second i I key less than 1 second C Control in progress C Control stop Alarm setting level Alarm 1 hysteresis 0 01 99 99 Alarm 4 hysteresis 0 01 99 99 REST Standby sequence restart Condition A condition B
139. less L be Llkey less key less O L EET than 1 second than 1 second than 1 second than 1 second than 1 second L key less than 1 second lt m m m m m m m m m m m key 1 key 3 second or seconds more or more Input initial intial seting gt Controlintial seting Alarm setting Display adjustment 57 key less key less key less keyless level 2 5 setting level key less than 1 second than 1 second than 1 second than 1 second than 1 second key less than 1 second C Control in progress C Control stop Input initial setting level 7 INP 1 Scaling input value 1 DSP Scaling display value 1 19999 Scaling display value 2 1 INP 2 Scaling input value 2 12 T Input 2 type 0 19 Scaling display value 2 Scaling display value 1 1 99999 557 DP Decimal point position I3DU Input 3 temperature units r RSPH Remote SP upper 300 0 imi an OFF 0 ON 1 Temperature Lovver limit of sensor setting range to Sensor induction noise upper limit of sensor setting range reduction 50Hz 60Hz
140. of the message and how to solve the problem Output state at error Control output Alarm output Unit error The unit requires service Please OFF OFF contact your dealer Unit change Hold down the i key for at least 5 seconds to store the current unit configuration OFF OFF If this does not clear the error display please contact your dealer desP Err Display unit error Service is required Please OFF OFF 595 Eee niteror consult your dealer Non volatile Hold down the _ key for at least memory error 5 seconds in the error display to OFF OFF initialize Input error Check for an incorrect input MV output according Upper limit display connection broken vvire or short to MV at PV error exceeded circuit Check the input type and setting operation input type svvitch settings Normal Exceeds display 1 Not an error hovvever appears display range lower line when PV exceeds the display Exceeds display 1 range 19999 to 99999 Normal operation range upper line RSP RSP input error s the wire connected to the RSP operation input broken or short circuited indicator blinks Normal operation MV at PV error Potentiometer Check the potentiometer vviring 1 VVhen Closed Floating input error is closed and operation at potentiometer input error is OFF an error MV is output at all other times normal operation takes place Normal operation Motor calibration 1 Check the vviri
141. progress Unit error unit change display unit error non volatile memory error 6 Writing non display data It is possible to write to setting data even if it is set to non display or is not displayed due to the model however exercise caution when writing continuously Commandr response example Writing to SP setting upper limit and SP setting lower limit of control initial setting level of channel 1 Client address H 01 SP setting upper limit of channel 1 Address HOD1E Data written H 00002710 1000 0 C SP setting lower limit of channel 1 Address H 0D20 Data written HFFFFFC18 100 0 C Command CRC 16 Response CRC 16 7 13 Section 7 Communication Modbus 7 7 Operation commands Communication Modbus Operation commands are sent using the follovving command frame Command frame Slave Function Write start address mode address Write data CRC 16 1 1 2 2 2 bytes Data name Explanation Specify the Unit No of the ESAR ER Set in hexa decimal from H 01 to H 63 1 to 99 Client address Function mode The function code for an operation command is H 06 Beginning Specify H 0000 for the operation command address address of vvrite Enter the command code of the operation command and related information see table belovv This is a check code calculated from the client address to the data end For the calculation method see 7 2 Frames Command frame 6 Example of CRC 16 calculat
142. secondary PV Set the SP mode of channel 2 to local SP mode cascade open and vvith the secondary loop in the independent control state run AT When AT finishes obtain the secondary PID values Set the control mode to cascade control and run AT on the primary loop to obtain the primary PID values Set the primary SP to local SP Set the SP mode of channel 2 to remote SP mode cascade control switch to cascade control and run AT When finished check the primary and secondary control states PVs and manually adjust the PID values Use the same adjustment method as regular PID control Mk After the power is turned on PV SP MV of the primary loop appears ch 1 Here we assume that cascade control is in progress using near SP of 180 0 C Press the key to select the secondary ch 2 PV SP MV The RSP operation indicator lights on to indicate that the system is in the cascade control cascade closed state Here we assume that the secondary PV is 230 0 C The secondary local SP will be set to 230 0 C in step 5 3 15 I Section 3 Typical Control Examples Adiustment level ch 2 Present value PV SP MV SP mode y Se Lim Dw Present value PV SP MV
143. set and the PV monitored in this level Povver on mom m m m m l m m im m im im m om m om m om m om m om m m im m eee es uy Operation level 7 7 reysi key less 9 1 222 than 1 second than 1 second key less key less than 1 sec than 1 second 77 PID setting Bank setting level level EZ JI key less level k P uall key less k bar qa m m m m m m m am mom mom m mom m mom mo mom m ete eee than 1 second than 1 second C Control in progress Operation Level 1 PV manual MV n Position proportional control type u PV valve opening O MV monitor heating C O MV it li PV SP display 1 monitor cooling PV SP bank No V M Valve opening monitor ok PV SP display 2 Present SP nn MV R S RUN STOP PV SP display 3 Present SP bank No A M AUTO MANU RSP Remote SP monitor 1 In manual mode 2 One of the following is displayed depending on the Display screen selection setting ER SP M Ramp SP monitor e Display 1 Display 2 e Display 2 Display 3 e Display 1 only e Display 2 only CH Manual MV
144. set automatic selection Manual MV initial value data PV DV 5 0 105 0 standard control 1 PIDH PID set automatic selection hysteresis 0 10 99 99 ORLM MV change rate limit mode Mode 0 0 Mode 1 1 P DB PV dead band 0 99999 AT G AT calculated gain 0 1 100 CJC 1 Input 1 Cold junction compensation AT H AT hysteresis OFF ON c CJC 4 Input 4 Cold junction LCMA compensation Limit cycle MV amplitude OFF ON 15 0 50 0 TATE Tentative A T execute judgment deviation 0 0 100 0 ALFA o RBMP Bumpless at Run 0 00 1 00 Disable OFF Enable ON PVTR PV tracking PMEC OFF ON Operation at potentiometer input error Stop OFF Continue ON 1 Heating cooling control 8 72 CH Operation at povver ON CH SP tracking KU A Setting Setting 8 16 Expansion control setting level L Eu e Select Continue Stop or Manual mode for operation after the povver is turned on e Operation after a software reset or when moving from Initial setting level to Operation level is also determined by this setting Default value az Continue Related information 4 12 Starting and stopping control P 4 27 hm Standard control vvit
145. setting level INIT Parameter initialization m z PF1 PF1 setting 4 OFF RUN STOP R S ALLR A ALLS AT BANK A M PFDP PF2 PF2 setting OFF RUN STOP R S ALLR ALLS AT BANK A M PFDP PF1 1 PF1 monitor Setting item 1 0 19 PF1 2 PF1 monitor Setting item 2 PF1 5 PF1 monitor Setting item 5 0 19 PF2 1 PF2 monitor Setting item 1 PF2 2 PF2 monitor Setting item 2 PF2 5 PF2 monitor Setting item 5 CH N Number of enabled channels CMOV Move to calibration level 1999 9999 8 67 l Section 8 Setting data Setting initialization w ON Initialize all settings OFF aFF Setting initialization reverts to OFF after the settings are initialized e Use this setting to return all settings to their default values Operation PF1 setting PF PF2 setting PFE e This setting is used to assign functions to the PF1 and PF2 keys to enable them to be used as function keys e When performing multi channel control the PF2 key functions as a CH key and thus cannot be used as a function key PF2 setting does not appear Disabled Does not function as a function key din Run currently displayed channel 3 Stop Stop currently displayed channel Star Run Stop Switch between run and stop for cur rently displayed channel Run all Run all channels Stop all Stop all channels
146. side of the position proportional valve to OUT1 and connect the closed side to OUT2 When using the ESAR PR4DF wire as shown below Position proportional valve Burner VVhen using floating control there is no need to connect a potenti ometer C VV O unless the amount of valve opening is being monitored Select the value control type and perform floating control using Position proportional value with travel time of 45 seconds Set SP ramp to change SP within a width of 10 0 C minute Time from completely open to completely close The related setting data and settings are as follows Action ar r Reverse action initial setting Closed Floating FL a e Floating initial setting Travel time 45 sec SP ramp time unit x min initial setting SP ramp rise value 10 0 C The travel time and SP ramp rise value are set in the following and the initial settings are used for all other parameters 1 Turn on the power and then hold down the _ key for at least 3 seconds to move from RUN level to Input initial setting level 3 3 Position proportional control of a ceramic kiln i Control initial setting 2 level 2 Press the 1 twice to move from Input initial setting level to Control initial setting 2 level 3 Press the el key repeatedly to select nat Travel time Press the A key to set the value to 45
147. stop if in auto mode before povver off Manual mode Run Stop Hold Auto Manual Manual MV Manual MV default at time of povver off if in manual mode before power off MV at stop if in auto mode before power off Note 1 e The initial setting is Continue Set Operation at power off separately for each channel e When the control mode is set to cascade control set Operation at power ON for CH2 Note 1 If the manual output mode is default value output the default value of manual MV default is output 4 27 I Section 4 Settings Required for Basic Control M Settings The procedure for stopping control is as follows 1 Press the cel key repeatedly to select 5 Run Stop 2 Press the A key to switch to 5262 Stop The STOP indicator blinks and control stops To resume control follow the same steps to switch to La Run The STOP indicator goes off and control resumes Switching between run and stop is also possible by event input or communication For event input switching see 5 7 Using event input P 5 29 For communication switching see 5 9 Using com munication functions P 5 34 4 28 4 13 Performing manual control I 4 13 Performing manual control E Manual mode In standard control the MV is manipulated and in positio
148. the most suitable PID constants for the current SP are automatically set This is accomplished by varying the MV to obtain the characteristics of the object of control limit cycle method AT cannot be run during STOP or in manual mode e When running AT select O to run AT for the PID set currently being used for control or select 1 to 8 as appropriate to run AT for a specific PID set The results of AT will be reflected in PID setting level in the Proportional band P Integral time 1 and Derivative time D of the PID Set No specified at the time AT was run Explanation of AT operation AT begins when AT Execute Cancel is changed from OFF to 0 While AT is running AT Execute Cancel blinks in Display 1 Display 2 shows the PID Set No currently being used for control When AT ends AT Execute Cancel goes off and the display stops blinking AT runs and the displays show the following Display 1 Blinking display indi cating AT is running Display 2 Shows selected PID To stop AT select 627 AT stop 4 20 na ar ninin AT run in progress Present value PV SP Display 2
149. type Explanation x 0000 01 00 o 200 13 ogo T4 0000 to 007F 0100 to 017F 00 to O17F 52 C5 to CB 0200 to 027E Setting data of setting area 0 0300 to 037F 0000 to 0039 0100 to 0139 00 to 0139 21 C5 to 0200 to 0239 Setting data of setting area 1 0300 to 0339 This command is used to store the addresses of multiple monitor values or setting data that you wish to read The stored monitor values or setting data can be read by sending a single Monitor value setting data compound store read command Up to 20 items can be stored even if the addresses are not contiguous To specify the variable type or address see Appendix Setting list P A 6 The upper limit of an address will vary depending on the variable type This command can be used in both setting area 0 and setting area 1 MRC SRC Response code Response codes The above indicates a normal end For the response codes see 6 5 Reading the variable area P 6 9 6 19 Section 6 Communication CompoWay F E Monitor value setting data compound read store check read Response This is used to check the contents that vvere stored using Monitor value setting data compound read store SRC m code Variable type Read address Variable type Read address Bit position mu Type Response codes The above indicates a normal end For the response codes see 6 5 Reading the variable a
150. with A keys 50 21 150 02 Less than 1 second Adiustment level Bank LHD ti Bank No 0 AT Execute Cancel ur H AT run Run AT with RUN level m 4 Auto tuning A T Start operation indicates that the key is pressed several times to switch to desired setting data Refer to page 4 19 After AT ends I Section 4 Settings Required for Basic Control 4 4 Setting the input type Set the input type switch and configure the input type setting according to the sensor used Check the table below and set the correct value for the sensor temperature range to be used When using a multi point input type set input type switches 2 to 4 and configure input type settings 2 to 4 as appropriate for the number of input points E Input type Setting input 1 to Platinum resistance temperature input sensor Pt100 150 0 to 150 0 C Input type SW 1 Make sure that the input 1 type switch is set to TC PT and then turn on the power 2 Hold down the _ for at least 3 seconds to move from RUN level to Input initial setting level The display will show amp Input 1 type 3 Press the key to enter the desired sensor value When using a platinum resistance temperature input sensor Pt100 150 00 to 150 00
151. with your OMRON representative at any time to confirm actual specifications of purchased products DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTS Dimensions and weights are nominal and are not to be used for manufacturing purposes even when tolerances are shown PERFORMANCE DATA Performance data given in this manual is provided as a guide for the user in determining suitability and does not constitute a warranty It may represent the result of OMRON s test conditions and the users must correlate it to actual application requirements Actual performance is subject to the OMRON Warranty and Limitations of Liability ERRORS AND OMISSIONS The information in this document has been carefully checked and is believed to be accurate however no responsibility is assumed for clerical typographical or proofreading errors or omissions Precautions Definition of Safety Notices and Information The following notation is used in this manual to provide precautions required to ensure safe usage of the product The safety precautions that are provided are extremely important to safety Alvvays read and heed the information provided in all safety precautions The following notation is used Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which if not A Caution avoided may result in minor or moderate injury or in property damage Symbols General Caution Indicates non specific general cautions warnings and dangers Caution Electrical Shock Cauti
152. write setting data of Backup mode Operation Adjustment Adjustment 2 Bank setting PID setting or Approximation setting level the data is also written to internal non volatile memory When communication is used to write setting data of Operation Adjustment Adjustment 2 Bank setting PID setting or Approximation setting level the data is not written to internal non volatile memory RAM write mode 1 When SP tracking or PV tracking is ON and the mode is changed to remote SP mode or manual mode the SP is not written to internal non volatile memory Note that when a change is made by key operation the data is written to non volatile memory When the write mode is changed from RAM write mode to Backup mode the setting data of Operation Adjustment Adjustment 2 Bank setting PID setting and Approximation setting levels is written to internal non volatile memory Each level is explained in 4 1 Setting levels and key operation P 4 2 The time required for RAM backup varies depending on the number of settings that were changed in RAM backup mode The more settings that were changed the longer the time required For example if all settings in Operation Adjust ment Adjustment 2 Bank setting PID setting and Approxi mation levels were changed the most time would be required which is about 2 seconds Response M RAM data store Response M Software reset Response 7 9 Commands and responses Communication M
153. 000HH 01 30000000 H L 0 8 ZHO G0000000 H 01 80000000 H ALE IWIS Z BPOW dS LHD 20000000 H 9 fenuew oyny 90000000 H s dols untH HO S0000000 H r z iq yueg LHO 0000000 H 6 1 iq yueg LHD 20000000 z 114 yueg LHO 20000000 1 44 YOHEOIUNWWOD BIA 10000000 H 0 p lqesiq 00000000 AOQE SE AOQE SE 56 ALES gM SE OES AOQE SE AOQE SE AOQE SE AOQE SE nIEA 19S uonisod 1104 6010 onjen GOMHuoul 21 Aq 1 5 SEN eA ase S D PA JOWUOW S D PA 199 Ul papu Hu LE 0192 PHO 0Z000000 H 01 6 1000000 H 01 21 EHO 8100000 01 L L000000 H SL 016 ZHO 01000000 01 60000000 Helluits g Butu do LHD 80000000 H ndino s ysueu 104 pis p solo 40 pis Bullooo indino fonuo 1H 2 20000000 H 9 nd no s lsueu 104 15 u do 10 apis Bune u indino 0 1400 HD 90000000 H 9 JUeSAdq VHO G0000000 H iz dS dwes HO 70000000 H g dS LHO 20000000 2 1ndino 1402 104 Apis p solo 10 apis Bune u yndyno tonuoo LHO Z0000000 H L 1Indino ionuoo 104 pis u do 10 apis Sunp u Indino tonuoo LHO 0000000 H 0 p lqesiq 00000000 H njea uolluouu um s
154. 04 njea indul 2 0 9100 SS sso d jgene snqpoyy 4 Aemodwoo A 13 Appendix uonno x JO p l l s yueg y Mul Wee yueg 491 dS 600 Z yueg 3060 4900 Z900 491 dS 1220 9 yueg t360 9V60 t900 491 dS 1220 S yueg 3860 9700 491 dS 600 yueg 0260 1 8 00 491 49 600 yueg 491 49 1220 z yueg FS60 Vc00 0 yueg se owes y SI UL 491 49 1220 yueg 8660 2100 ed ndui o Bulpsoooy x x en x 2 M q tq 2 66666 Ol 6666 l 4698 V000H 01 L3 18 1 1 66666 Ol 6666 4698 1000H 01 1 1 4 4 4 4 H b WWI 12M0 wee 0 yueg y 11 1 q ddn wieje 0 yueg 160 4000 160 4000 8160 000 addy indul 0 upio22y Ox q 2 66666 Ol 6666 4698 L000 H 01 L3 18 1 1 1 mal y njea uueje 0 yueg 9160 8000 d Idul o upio2oy ed Idul o Buipsoooy gey ra A I nail 2 q m Ki 66666 Ol 6666 4698 V000H 9 L3 t 4444 H 66666 01 6666 4698 L000 H 01 1 1 44 4 H p rs mal 1111 42m0 welje 0 yueg uly q ddn wueye 0 yueg vl60 VOOO 160 6000 addy dul 0 2 d Idul o ulpio2oy an KT E Em Kt q 2 66666 Ol 6666 4698 V000H 01 1
155. 19M0 dS z anjen ejdsip 205 O Buas ndu zo ywuaddn O anrea eydsip 205 10 ubi Humes indu Jo 1 O 1 qS 1 Jo 1 i li vv I OL O Z 011 s nlen Indu Buyjeog S 011002 jevowodod uoisoq 1 ndu Indu Doleuv UuolliDuo2 uni JOU p yul Jonuos peuo Sod L lJu uuuBISSE oN l yur1 ju uljuBisse ON L uonezileniu eyep uas pay Jo 1p qo edi y ULE V d ULE V edi z ULE V ed ULE V yndul ye uolle 8do buneol pasoo dS yuul seddn qS Z POW fonuoo z nipA indul Sullos anjen indul Sulleos z elds p Suleos Aeldsip Suleos y Hun L yun aInyesodwe L g yun ainyesodwa wun sunyesodwa L y ad 1ndu g d 1ndu z ed adAy indul 4 9 5 o eyep 195 J d eyep Buas eee 17 juawubisse indino asuen 101002 juawubisse indino asuen 101002 juawubisse z jndyno asuen 101002 juawubisse indino asuen 101002 A 28 Setting list 1 2 Es 4 15 6 ap 8 9 10 11 12 la 14 VVhen the set value of Control
156. 2 N k N N 4 N N MRC SRC MRES SRES Data 2 2 2 2 bytes If the specified FINS mini command was not successfully executed the response will only contain the MRC SRC MRES and SRES List of FINS mini service commands communication CompoWay F Monitor value setting data read Reads monitor values setting data Monitor value setting data vvrite VVrites monitor values setting data 01 04 1 Monitor value setting data compound read ting data Monitor value setting data compound write fede l Sequentially reads contents of addresses spec Monitor value setting data compound 01 10 ified in monitor value setting data compound stored read i read store Monitor value setting data compound read Specifies addresses to be read using monitor 01 11 store vvrite value setting data compound stored read 01 Monitor value setting data compound read Reads the contents stored using variable area store check read compound read store Machine attribute read Reads the model and other attributes 06 OT Controller status read Reads the operation status 08 OT Echo back test Performs an echo back test nal l l Commands such as Run Stop AT Execute 30 05 Operation command I Cancel and Move to setting area 1 6 6 6 4 Variable areas I 6 4 Variable areas The area used for data exchange when commun
157. 3 Typical Control Examples o o O s O Xx pan gt E 3 22 section 4 Settings Required for Basic Control 4 1 4 2 4 3 4 4 4 5 4 6 4 7 4 8 4 9 4 10 4 11 4 12 4 13 4 14 4 15 Setting levels and key operation 4 2 SOU VaAlg6S 2 uma umasapa yayay anasu alana sa 4 4 Initial setting examples 4 5 Setting the input type 4 8 Selecting the temperature units 4 12 Selecting the Control mode 4 13 Setting output parameters 4 14 Setting and changing the SP 4 17 Performing ON OFF control 4 18 Determining the PID constants AT manual settings 4 20 Using auxiliary 4 23 Starting and stopping control 4 27 Performing Manual controll 4 29 Changing Channels i u uu interna a 4 31 Operational considerations 4 32 4 1 x o n o o 72 fo 221 for Basic Control I Section 4 Settings Required for Basic Control 4 1 Setting levels and key operation
158. 310 4000 1 40 3000 1 4000 9140 3000 9140 8000 14 VO00 0140 6000 0140 8000 3040 1 2000 00340 V040 8040 9040 0 2000 000 1000 00 10 0000 39 sSs IppV ss rppv adh ajqeue 4 Aemodwoyg I A Um s Wel A 23 Appendix p lqes p 4625 elds q SPU0d9S 0 66 01 0 69000000 01 00000000 H poH d ueos 4510 4001 1 NO 1 0000000 0 440 00000000 uo ye 4805 eldsip WeIS 2001 8 9X37 z Bures 0 1409 uolsuedx3 80000000 H 2 4av 1 4 q l Buas uonounj paoueapy 20000000 H 9 577 Hues uongoluntutuoOS 90000000 H 9 71 19A l 1u unsn pe e dsiq S0000000 H r 677 1 A l Buas wely 0000000 H g 2 7 z um s relu 010402 20000000 z 17 1849 Dum s jenu 010400 20000000 1 0714 4 l jeu ndul 10000000 H 0 440 p lqesidq 00000000 WA JOWUOW 00 lt lt rl y lt lt t 99S 0000000 H 98S 2 20000000 Z 98s 20000000 98S S O 0000000 SpUo29S l l 0 440 00000000 l ys 14 1 4910 8001 p lqes p s s oyne 4910 57 0 66 0 0 9000000 H 01 00000000 aul winjes oyne Aeldsiq 9001 9 O 2 Sulloo2 AW 90000000 H q ulu do Sunp H AW 20000000 r Mu ul5 s n4001 Y0000000 H g Mu ul5S s n40c 0000000 H z ua
159. 318 1 1 rs mal p ULEVE 0 yueg Z wuj JAMO wee 0 yueg 0160 8000 4060 2000 ed Idul o Bulpsoooy addy dul 0 2 Ox q 2 EK Ox fq z 2 66666 Ol 6666 4698 L000 H 01 1 1 4 4 4 4 H 66666 Ol 6666 4698 L000 H 01 L3 t 4444 H mal 2 ywi Joddn wueye 0 yueg z njea wieje 0 yueg 3060 9000 VOSGO 5000 d Idul o 22 i 1 m 66666 Ol 6666 4698 L000 H 91 1 1 44 4 4 H P an l ywi amoj wee 0 yueg 8060 7000 ed Indu o Bulpsoooy addy dul 0 uipio22y VU 1 2 On On z x mil Emi Eni Emil Emi Emil Emil Emil Eni Eri Eri A y w rm tq Tq na lt gt gt gt an an Dat 66666 0 66661 46981 000 01 13 1 8 14 66666 Ol 6666 4698 L000 H 01 1 1 44 4 4 H 66666 01 66661 46981 000 01 t3 g4444 H rs al yw q ddn wieye 0 yueg n 8A 0 yueg 9060 000 ed indul o 77 gt ya ye SE owes uono l s olnv 0 8 0 0 80000000H 01 00000000 q ddn Hues dS o w Hues qS 18S did yueg 491 49 1220 0 yueg Yo60 2000 0060 1000 E d Idul o Buipsoooy uonsod N PA IWS SHUN Jud i O 4 K s ynejoq
160. 4 8 8 36 Input type switch error 10 3 Input output Configuration 1 7 Inputs terminals 2 12 Inspecting indicator accuracy 9 13 Installation procedure 2 3 Insulation blocks 2 18 integral time a 8 31 Key operation event input 5 29 Level Ke a s 1 6 LIMIECYCIE sa da 4 21 Limit cycle MV amplitude 8 78 Limitations during SP ramp 5 9 Linear current output output type 8 42 List of service communication CompoWay F 6 6 5 9 8 27 Location of input type switch 1 8 MANU operation indicator 1 5 hlahtal c t a s 4 29 Manual mode 4 29 Manual MV za sl 8 5 Manual MV initial value 8 77 Manual output method 8 77 Manual reset value 8 15 Manual settings 4 22 Modbus communication protocol 7 2 Mod 1 6 Monitor item level setting 8 62 Monitor value setting data compound read Communication CompoWay F 6 16 Monitor value s
161. 6 46981000 H 01 1318 s LL r K 4 adj indul o 2 66666 O 66661 16981000 H 01 1311844 44 H 66666 01 6666 4698 1000 H 9 318 oc 23 adj indul o 2 66666 01 6666 I 46981000 H 01 1318 14 a a F l K gt K adj indul o 2 yw q ddn Hues dS 0 yw Hues qS lx dS 0 g01 01 070 VL 700000 H 01 00000000 0 X01 01 070 V LF00000 H 01 00000000HH 000 0 901 0 0 S VL700000 H 01 39444444 H piepuels 1002 AN Hues dS 0 yw Hues qS adj indul 0 77 EEJ d indul o ulpioooy uonsod En julod jewioeq UOHO S HUIMO O 0 Bue1 ndul paijioeds o Buipio55v 5 DIBA iolluouu JOUUOW uoneoiunuuuioo Aq 199 ase S n EA JOWUOW SON eA 195 Ul H ewe HO g n n s nor ney oxusa 200 6000 ew s di ume vo 8000 _ z D PA wely 0 yueg L H G MOT WWE 0 yueg yw q ddn wuely 0 yueg D PA ULE V 0 yueg HO yea soluoul AN 8000 000 HO dS 2000 HO smes 2000 1000 H9 Ad nieA jueseld 0000 0000 SS SS adh lqeLEA s lnqiny eyep Buas ee q eytoduso LO 0102 Bunjes uoneolunulul
162. 8 12 8 5 Adjustment 2 level aa 8 22 8 6 Bank setting level 8 26 8 7 PID setting level SFr aceite 0 8 30 8 8 Approximation setting level CEEE 8 33 8 9 Input initial setting level Aa E E nawsa 8 35 8 10 Control initial setting level 1201558050 0 Se el neces 8 41 8 11 Control initial setting 2 level 8 45 8 12 Alarm setting level 0 0 o l o ns 8 53 8 13 Display adiustment level GEYTS 8 59 8 14 Communication setting level L 8 a aa aa 8 63 8 15 Advanced function setting level L AAF 8 67 8 16 Expansion control setting level 8 72 9 1 Setting data for user calibration 9 2 0 2 Userealibralioniiu uu uuu m aa o Dama ap a an 9 4 9 3 Thermocouple input Calibration 9 5 GA Analog inp tcalbral onasua ua a dalana 9 8 9 5 Resistance temperature input Sensor Calibration 9 10 8 6 Outb tcalibralion u a aaa Pa E 9 12 9 7 Inspecting indicator accuracy a 9 13 TOT Troubleshooting 10 2 TOA Enor messages sa a yib 10 3 10 3 Inferring causes from conditions abnormal measured
163. 8 36 CH Disturbance gain Disturbance time constant Disturbance rectification band Disturbance judgment width m 8 4 Adjustment level i Fic k kup D kup w a ju w ay x w a P y L r yun Z 5 r yu lt mn K 4 iq These settings are used to adjust overshoot to disturbances e Disturbance gain is used to adjust the amount of overshoot caused by disturbances Setting data Setting range Units Default value m Disturbance gain 1 00 to 1 00 06 Setting Disturbance time constant 0 01 to 99 99 10 Disturbance rectification band 0 000 to 9 999 0 000 Disturbance judgment width 99 99 to 99 99 FS 0 00 Related setting data Reference Disturbance overshoot adjustment function Expansion control setting level P 8 80 8 21 I Section 8 Setting data 8 5 Adjustment 2 level Adjustment level 2 contains supplemental settings for adjustment of control such as the time constant of first order lag operation move average count low cut point of extraction of square root operations and settings for proportional control These functions only appear in the display if they are enabled in Control initial setting 2 level Povver on Operation level Adjustment Adjustment 2 level level key less key less Wq than 1 second
164. 999 9 999 4 Straight line approximation Input 1 z Straight line approximation Input 2 522 Straight line approximation Output 1 56 4 Straight line approximation Output2 Sac 1 or 2 Straight line approximation is enabled Use these settings to configure straight line approximation 1 and 2 e Set values for straight line approximation Specify two points straight line approximations 1 and 2 Use normalized data for the values e If Input 1 Input 2 the setting will not be effective and will be regarded as straight line approximation with input data output data Output value 2 Output value 1 Input value 1 Input value 2 8 33 I Section 8 Setting data Setting data Setting range Units Default value e Straight line approximation Input1 1 999 to 9 999 po 0 000 Setting Straight line approximation Input 2 1 999 to 9 999 1 000 Straight line approximation Output 1 1 999 to 9 999 po 0 000 Straight line approximation Output 2 1 999 to 9 999 po 1 000 6 Related setting data Straight line approximation 1 enable Straight line approximation 2 enable Control initial setting 2 level P 8 51 Broken line approximation 1 Input 1 to Fouad to Feet 1 Broken line approximation 1 Input 20 F 2 4 4 F 4 Broken line approximation 1 Output 1 to au id Broken line approximation Broken line approximation 1 Output 20 is en
165. A 16 ASCIFGo046 ua s A 5 AT Auto tuning 4 20 8 13 AT calculated gain 8 78 AT cancel 6 23 7 23 AT execute onin un uu Qua 6 23 7 23 AT Execute Cancel 8 13 AT AY SICICSIS saza mol Dalda 8 78 Auto Manual 4 30 5 30 6 27 7 27 8 11 Automatic selection range upper limi 5 12 Auxiliary output assignment 1 11 4 23 8 48 Auxiliary output non exciting 5 27 8 58 Auxiliary outputs terminals 2 13 Bank Change dl 6 22 7 22 BANK NO ce bal 8 13 Bank No Bits 0 to 2 5 30 Bank setting level 8 26 A 14 BANKS esta a b b b 1 2 5 9 Bar graph display items 8 61 Broken line approximation 5 6 8 34 Broken line approximation enable 8 51 Bumpless run 8 79 Cancel talei 20a tea keene 6 28 7 28 Cascade control 3 13 Cascade heating cooling control 1 9 4 13 Cascade open close 8 14 Cascade standard control 1 9 4 13 CH2 operation indicator 1 5 Changing channels 4 31 Channel indication 1 5 Close in alarm Open in alarm
166. AT Execute Can Switch between AT execute and AT cel cancel AT run is executed for the currently selected PID set BANK Bank selection 1 Switch through the bank numbers adds 1 to the current bank number A M R Switch between auto and manual PFDP FF a Monitor Setting 1 Display monitor setting item item Select Monitor Setting item 1 to Monitor Setting item 5 Special function level Hold down the PF1 or PF2 for at least 1 second to execute the function selected in PF1 setting or PF2 setting If Monitor Setting item is selected the display will scroll through monitor setting items 1 to 5 each time you press the key 8 68 CH m Setting PF1 monitor setting item 1 to PF1 monitor setting item 5 PF2 monitor setting item 1 to PF2 monitor setting item 5 Setting 8 15 Advanced function setting level L AldF Setting data Setting range Units Default value Disable gt K o Bee PF1 setting A key Run Stop toggle Run all Stop all AT Execute Cancel toggle e 5 Run Bank scroll Stop toggle key Monitor setting item Ww 7 lt y aw y an PF2 setting KE 4 l n tq to 25 PF key set to monitor setting item e When one or both PF keys are set to monitor setting item Monitor setting item 1 through Monitor setting item 5 of each key m
167. Analog Larger of 19999 and display value equivalent to input lower limit to mn AMOV smaller of 99999 and display value Move to advanced function setting equivalent to input upper limit level 1999 9999 Temperature Lower limit of sensor setting range to upper limit of sensor setting range Analog Smaller of 99999 and display value equivalent to input upper limit to remote SP upper limit 1 8 35 I Section 8 Setting data Input 1 input type Input 2 input type Input 3 input type Input 4 input type 8 36 a Setting Y ena t y I m Fa m4 La 4 bos P I l r e These settings are used to set the sensor type e f these settings are changed the SP limit settings are returned to the initial settings In this case reset the SP upper limit and SP lower limit settings as necessary e Refer to the following table to configure the settings Initial settings are shaded Setting Input Input type switch 262 R o Pioo t 200 0 to 850 0 3000 to 1500 0 u 2000104000 300 0 to 700 0 T R 00toT7000 0 010 3000 0 43 B 100010 1800 0 300 0 to 3200 0 35 4 to 20 mA to 20 mA Depends on scalin of the 9 ranges appears 17 1to 5v depending on the scaling 1999 9 to 9999 9 199 99 to 999 99 19 999 to 99 999 Set the input type switch of each input to match the Input type setting of the corresponding
168. Auxiliary output 2 allocation Shae Auxiliary output 4 allocation e Use these settings to assign output content to auxiliary outputs Setting range Units Default value e Disable 0 CH1 Alarm 1 1 Setting CH1 Alarm 2 2 CH1 Alarm 3 3 4 CH1 Alarm 4 CH1 Input error 5 CH1RSP Input error 6 Disabled 7 U ALM 8 Alarm 1 OR output of all channels 9 Alarm 2 OR output of all channels 10 11 Alarm 3 OR output of all channels 11 Alarm 4 OR output of all channels 12 nput error OR output of all channels 13 RSP Input error OR output of all channels 14 Disable 15 CH2 Alarm 1 16 CH2 Alarm 2 17 CH2 Alarm 3 18 CH2 Alarm 4 19 CH2 Input error 20 CH2RSP Input error 21 Disable 22 Similarly CH3 23 to 29 CH4 30 to 36 On a multi point input type assignment data can be set for channels 2 and higher as appropriate for the number of channels U ALM output will be OR output of alarm functions 1 to 4 of all channels Related information 4 11 Using auxiliary output P 4 23 8 48 8 11 Control initial setting 2 level t 2 Transfer output upper limit Eri Transfer output lower limit Erl 1 to 4 Transfer output using output assignment Control e These settings can only be used for outputs selected for transfer output using output assignment Default value m Transfer output upper limit Decimal Setting range lovver limit of poi
169. BR ano 8080 89 Jue SUOd awi Z uogesado Hej 151 2080 1 9400 uogeado Hej 15 1 0080 Fuss Z 1 A l 1u gulsn pv WUI JOMO niPA eldsip Suleos ndu Bojeuy Indu JOSUAS JO syw pue J ddn 1 S Indu SAO O Se p zi eniu ase s um s pebueyo si Aejds p Sulleos Jo un d 4 indul v Z u do apeosey poul dS 2207 apeosey poui qS 0 01 UO09 DPE SE2 Ul 66 66 0 66166 40 20000 091 148G4444 H HO 6666 01 00070 4O0ZZ0000 H 01 0000000 HO 66 66 01 1070 402Z0000 H 01 10000000 H 239F HO 0071 0 00 1 79000000 H 0 06444334 P HO 66 666 O 66 661 46981000H 1 114 1 1 1 H 66666 01 66661 16981000 H 91 3 1G4444 H u01 991109 indul JO Z anjea indul 42 0 1100 Z I 66 666 01 66661 4698 L000 H 91 1414 I I IH uono uoo jnduj 2 0 9100 n d ndul o 66666 Ol 66661 1698 1000H 01 t3 94444 H H uolluouu Bues semnqiy uolsod anjea ERR julod jeweq ynejaq qu ul bpnl eouequnisiq 0 2200 pueq uoneoyioes eouequnisiq a 1200 lue suo2 aw 9uequnisiq 0200 ule eoueqinisiq 4620 4100 Z uono uuo2 indul 0620 8100 20 u01 991109 1101 1
170. Cat No 2182 1 03 OMRON OMRON Corporation Industrial Automation Company Control Devices Division H Q Analog Controller Division Shiokoji Horikawa Shimogyo ku Kyoto 600 8530 Japan Tel 81 75 344 7080 Fax 81 75 344 7189 Regional Headquarters OMRON EUROPE B V Wegalaan 67 69 NL 2132 JD Hoofddorp The Netherlands Tel 31 2356 81 300 Fax 31 2356 81 388 OMRON ELECTRONICS LLC 1 East Commerce Drive Schaumburg IL 60173 U S A Tel 1 847 843 7900 Fax 1 847 843 8568 OMRON ASIA PACIFIC PTE LTD 83 Clemenceau Avenue 111 01 UE Square 239920 Singapore Tel 65 6835 301 1 Fax 65 6835 2711 OMRON CHINA CO LTD Room 2211 Bank of China Tower 200 Yin Cheng Road M Shanghai 200120 China Tel 86 21 5037 2222 Fax 86 21 5037 2200 Authorized Distributor Note Specifications subject to change without notice Printed in Japan 0505 0 5M 0305 B uodulo 4 llonuo 6 614 4393 95 20 13 2812 ON 169 IEnuenN 5 5 Digital Controller ESAR ESER Cat No Z182 E1 03 Preparations Examples Operations for Basic Control CompoWay F Setting data Communication Communication Functions and Settings Required Typical Control Modbus Troubleshooting User calibration k c o o o lt Introduction OMRON products are manufactured for use according to proper procedures by a qualified operator and
171. Control mode 5 OREV Forvvard reverse operation Reverse OR R Forward OR D CLFL Closed Floating Floating FLOAT Closed CLOSE Temperature SP lower limit 1 to upper limit Analog of sensor setting range SP lower limit 1 to lesser of 99999 or display value equivalent of input upper limit Temperature Lower limit of sensor setting range Analog 1 4 input to SP upper limit 1 Larger of 19999 and display value equivalent of input lower value to SP upper limit 1 Standard 0 heating or cooling 1 Standard 0 heating or cooling 1 Standard with remote SP 2 Heating or cooling 3 with remote SP Proportion 4 Cascade standard 5 Cascade heating or cooling 6 8 41 I Section 8 Setting data Multi output model m a I yr V w Output 1 type ee Da a bos Output 3 type Use these settings to select the output type for multi output e Select pulse voltage output or linear current output e When pulse voltage output is selected the output is 12 V DC 40 mA e When linear current output is selected use the Linear current output type setting to select an output of O to 20 mA or 4 to 20 mA A Setting data Setting range Units Default value 1 0 Pulse voltage output ol a 1 Linear current output Setting Related setting data Linear current output type Control initial setting level P 8 42
172. E This level contains straight line and broken line approximation settings These settings only appear if enabled in Control initial setting 2 level Power on p 5 Operation level gt Adjustment Adjustment 2 key less key less JEVE L 222 Approximation setting level SI1 1 Siraighi line approximation 1 FIO1 1 Broken line approximation 1 i 1 i Input 1 Input 1 i L Ady 1 999 9 999 1 999 9 999 key than 1 second than 1 second kawi 205 a 11 Fl20 1 Broken line ey less ey less SI2 1 Straighi line approximation 1 approximation 1 1 than 1 sec than 1 second Input 2 nput 20 Approximation i l setting 177717 5775 75UVv77 rr op FO01 1 Broken line approximation 1 8 alt m evel LEEDS rey ess EVE E Prd keyless LEME El 203110 Output 1 than 1 second than 1 second i 1 999 9 999 S02 1 Straight line approximation 1 FO20 1 Broken line CO Control in Output 2 Ponies ination 1 progress 1 999 9 999 SI1 2 Siraighi line approximation 2 nput 1 1 999 9 999 SI2 2 Siraighi line approximation 2 nput 2 1 999 9 999 01 2 Straight line approximation 2 Output 1 1 999 9 999 02 2 Straight line approximation 2 Output 2 1
173. FINS mini STX Node No Sub address SID command text ETX BCC 02 30 30H 30H 30H 30H 30H 35H 30H 30H BCC 30H o 30H e 30H 30H 30H 30H 35H 30H 30H 03H 36H qe XOR exclusive OR operation 6 2 Frames Communication CompovVVay F M Response frame A response is not sent to com End FINS mini mand frames that do not end STX Node No Sub address Code response text ETX BCC with ETX BCC characters e o o a m 1 2 2 2 1 1byte Code that indicates the beginning of the communi STX cation frame 02H Be sure to set this code in the leading byte The number that was specified in the command Node No frame is repeated here This is the Unit No of the responding E5AR ER Sub address Not used on the E5AR ER Set to 00 Returns the result of the command executed as End code i instructed by the command frame FINS mini Text of the response Response text Code that indicates the end of the text 03H Block Check Character BCC This stores the result of the BCC calculation from Node No to EXT End codes Communication CompoWay F Error End Descriotion detection code p order of priority FINS command error Could not execute the specified FINS command n Sum ol bits that are 1 in received data does not agree 10 Parity error i vvith the set communication parity value Framing error Stop bit of command frame characters is O l Attempted to transfer nevv data because received data 12
174. Limit cycle 4 10 Determining the PID constants AT manual settings If you attempt to move to RUN level and show PV SP while AT is running Display 2 will blink and indicate that AT is running e Only Write via communication Run Stop AT Execute Cancel and Auto Manual can be changed while AT is running No other settings can be changed If Run Stop is set to Stop while AT is running AT will stop and operation will stop If Run is then selected AT will not resume f an input error occurs while AT is running AT will stop AT will run again after recovery from the error f AT is started during SP ramp AT will run for the ramp SP The timing for generating a limit cycle varies depending on whether or not the deviation DV when AT is begun is less than the temporary AT execution judgement deviation initial setting 10 0 FS PV during AT is as follows Present value PV Deviation gt 10 FS 7 Limit cycle MV amplitude 40 Value Deviation lt 10 FS Limit cycle MV amplitude 40 SP e 4 d Deviation Deviation 1096 FS 1096 FS b l as w AT start AT end AT start AT end The amplitude of change of the limit cycle MV can be changed in Limit cycle MV amplitude For heating cooling and position proportional floating type control the limit cycle is as follows regardless of the deviation Limit cyc
175. Manual in Operation level If either PF1 setting or PF2 setting is set to A M awl key Auto Manual will not appear in operation mode and only the key is used for switching e Switching between Auto and Manual with the w key To switch modes hold down the w key for at least one second in Operation Adjustment Adjustment 2 Bank setting PID setting Approximation setting Monitor item or Protect level e Switching between Auto and Manual with Auto Manual To switch modes change the setting of Auto Manual in Operation level During cascade control if the primary loop is switched to manual control when the secondary loop is in any of the following conditions the manual MV is disabled eThe SP mode of the secondary loop is local cascade open eThe secondary loop is in manual mode e Operation at error is taking place in the secondary loop 1 Setting CH PV SP Display 1 PV SP Display 2 PV SP Display 3 8 3 Operation level e Standard type Control method Setting range Units Default value Standard Heating cooling 105 0 to 105 0 1 Manual output method Expansion control setting level selects the MV that is used when manual mode is entered The MV prior to entering manual mode can be held or the manual MV default value can be used Position proportional type Posten 10 0 to 110 0 proportional 6 Related setting data Auto Manual Operation level
176. No monitor H 840A PID Set No monitor H 840C V atus H 040C H 4404 H 4406 H 4408 H 440A H 440C hoa 0400 This command is used to read the PV status and other monitor values The number of elements can be set from H 0004 to 006A 4 to 106 to allow reading of monitor values in contiguous addresses Internal SP Bank No monitor e H 4400 Version H C400 H 4402 Modification type H C402 Modification type P I 2 4 When used in setting area 1 the response for the PV and internal SP is O and the response for the status is as indicated in the notes in Appendix Setting list Status P A 8 Slave Function Byte Read data Response address mode count Data 1 Data 1 Hos Most significant Least significant 1 1 1 Number of elements x 2 bytes Data n Data n CRC 16 Most significant Least significant ss 2 The above indicates a normal end For information on error responses see 7 5 Reading the variable area P 7 10 Section 7 Communication Modbus M Read setting data Communication Modbus 7 18 Response Slave Function Read start Number of address mode address elements CRC 16 ol 1 1 2 2 2 Explanation Explanation 8 w 7 Setting data of setting area 0 H 0600 to O60E RUN level 2 H 1100 to 110C 2 2 Same setting data as channel 1 addresses H 8000 added to above addresses H C000 added to above setting data as channel
177. No part of this manual may be reprinted or copied without the prior written permission of OMRON 2 The specifications and other information in this manual are subject to change without notice for purposes of improvement 3 Considerable care has been taken in the preparation of this manual however OMRON assumes no responsibility or liability for any errors or inaccuracies that may appear In the event that a problem is discovered please contact one of the Omron offices or agents listed at the end of the manual and provide the catalogue number shown on the cover of the manual Read and Understand this Manual Please read and understand this manual before using the product Please consult your OMRON representative if you have any questions or comments VVarranty and Limitations of Liability WARRANTY OMRON s exclusive warranty is that the products are free from defects in materials and workmanship for a period of one year or other period if specified from date of sale by OMRON OMRON MAKES NO WARRANTY OR REPRESENTATION EXPRESS OR IMPLIED REGARDING NON INFRINGEMENT MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR PARTICULAR PURPOSE OF THE PRODUCTS ANY BUYER OR USER ACKNOWLEDGES THAT THE BUYER OR USER ALONE HAS DETERMINED THAT THE PRODUCTS WILL SUITABLY MEET THE REQUIREMENTS OF THEIR INTENDED USE OMRON DISCLAIMS ALL OTHER WARRANTIES EXPRESS OR IMPLIED LIMITATIONS OF LIABILITY OMRON SHALL NOT BE RESPONSIBLE FOR SPECIAL INDIRECT OR CONSE
178. O Transfer type scaling range Before change Y YAY y sp After upper limit Display characters Change the upper limit value from A to B SP change B V Upper and lower limit value v Upper and lower limit value of transfer type scaling Setting data name Level Display 3 Control Transfer output 1 to 4 assignment Transfer output 1 to 4 upper limit Transfer output 1 to 4 lower limit Specify Control Transfer output Control initial setting 2 L 2 Transfer output scaling Control initial setting 2 L 5 33 l Section 5 Functions and Operations 5 9 Using communication functions M Setting communication parameters Communication parameters are set in the Communications setting level The parameters and settings are shown in the following table Initial settings are highlighted Setting data name Setting values Description characters SE Protocol selection CompoWay F Modbus Usa Communication Unit No 0 to 99 Communications speed BR 19 2 384 0 9 6 19 2 38 4 k bit s seze Communication top bit Transmission waittme Protocol selections 755 The communication protocol can be set to CompoWay F Omron s unified protocol for general purpose serial communication or Modbus based on RTU Mode of Modbus Protocol Specifications PI MBUS 300 Rev l of Modicon Inc Communication Unit No When performing
179. ORL MV change rate limit cooling 0 0 100 0 ISI 1 Input value 1 for input correction 19999 99999 ISS 1 Input correction 1 199 99 999 99 ISI 2 Input value 2 for input correction 19999 99999 ISS 2 Input correction 2 199 99 999 99 DOGN Disturbance gain 1 00 1 00 DOTC Disturbance time constant 0 01 99 99 DO B Disturbance rectification band 0 000 9 999 DOV Disturbance judgement width 99 99 99 99 1 Position proportional type Completely open Hold Completely closed 1 0 1 CH Bank No Operation CH AT Execute Cancel 8 4 Adjustment level L Ads uv This setting is used to specify a bank one of Bank Nos O through 7 Each bank contains an SP local SP alarm value and PID set number and these settings are stored using the bank function in Bank setting level A bank can be specified by event input key operation or communication This setting is used to specify a bank by key operation Use the AIM keys to specify a bank No The initial setting is Currently used bank No Related setting data Bank Local SP Bank setting level P 8 27 Event input Assignment Control initial setting 2 level P 8 47 4 In auto mode running This is used to run AT Auto tuning Operation MV is increased and decreased around the SP to obtain the characteristics of the object of control
180. Overrun error i buffer is already full BCC error Calculated BCC different from received BCC command text Characters other than 0 to 9 or A to F in FINS mini command text In the case of an echo back test when 44 data other than the test data is sent No SID and FINS mini command text or no FINS mini MRC SRC not correct in FINS mini command text mini command text a The received frame exceeds the required number of 18 Frame length error bytes Normal end Command was executed normally without error No sub address SID or FINS mini command text or 16 Sub address error sub address less than 2 characters and no SID and FINS 6 5 Section 6 Communication CompoWay F 6 3 FINS mini text The FINS mini command text and FINS mini response text form the body of command response commu nication FINS mini command text and FINS mini response text are configured as follows Command text FINS mini command text consists of an MRC main request code and an SRC sub request code followed by the required data FINS mini STX Node No Sub address SID command text ETX BCC MR SnC Data 2 2 bytes Response text FINS mini response text consists of the MRC and SRC followed by an MRES main response code and SRES sub response code and then the required data FINS mini STX Node No Sub address End code Response text ETX BCC N 02H 00 d OSH N N _ S N
181. PF2 monitor setting item 8 69 KEZ SCUING yaaa adabi 8 68 PID set auto select data 8 74 PID set auto select hysteresis 8 74 PID set automatic selection 5 13 PID set automatic selection data 8 74 PID set automatic selection hysteresis 8 74 PID 5 10 8 27 PID Set No Automatic selection range 8 32 PIDSC u a i 1 2 5 12 PID setting level 8 30 A 15 Position proportional control 3 9 Position proportional dead band 3 12 8 17 Potentiometer input error 10 3 Potentiometer inputs terminals 2 14 Power supply terminals 2 11 Precautions when wiring 2 11 Proportional band 8 31 5 24 Protect key deea a 1 6 PTOLEC EVEL 8 3 A 10 Pulling the unit out 2 3 PV dead band 3 12 8 74 PV decimal point display 8 39 P V H 6GKRI 0 22 unanqa 8 76 PVOP techies ese 8 7 PV SP display screen selection 8 60 RAM data store 6 25 7 25 RAM write mode 8 70 Ramp SP monitor
182. QUENTIAL DAMAGES LOSS OF PROFITS OR COMMERCIAL LOSS IN ANY WAY CONNECTED WITH THE PRODUCTS WHETHER SUCH CLAIM IS BASED ON CONTRACT WARRANTY NEGLIGENCE OR STRICT LIABILITY In no event shall the responsibility of OMRON for any act exceed the individual price of the product on which liability is asserted IN NO EVENT SHALL OMRON BE RESPONSIBLE FOR WARRANTY REPAIR OR OTHER CLAIMS REGARDING THE PRODUCTS UNLESS OMRON S ANALYSIS CONFIRMS THAT THE PRODUCTS WERE PROPERLY HANDLED STORED INSTALLED AND MAINTAINED AND NOT SUBJECT TO CONTAMINATION ABUSE MISUSE OR INAPPROPRIATE MODIFICATION OR REPAIR Application Considerations SUITABILITY FOR USE OMRON shall not be responsible for conformity with any standards codes or regulations that apply to the combination of products in the customer s application or use of the products At the customer s request OMRON will provide applicable third party certification documents identifying ratings and limitations of use that apply to the products This information by itself is not sufficient for a complete determination of the suitability of the products in combination with the end product machine system or other application or use The following are some examples of applications for which particular attention must be given This is not Intended to be an exhaustive list of all possible uses of the products nor is it intended to imply that the uses listed may be suitable for the products e Outdo
183. Setting data 8 16 Expansion control setting level L EuL This level includes advanced control settings such as operation after povver ON PID set auto selection and position proportional settings Povver on Approximation setting level Adjustment Adjustment 2 gt Bank setting level key Less L 44 key Less key Less key Less key Less than 1 second than 1 second than 1 second than 1 second than 1 second PID setting keyLess than 1 second key key 1 second or 3 seconds more or more Control stops Input initial setting Control initial setting gt Control initial setting gt Alarm setting iDisplay adjustment gt 37 i key Less key less key less key less key Less level L than 1 second than 1 second than 1 second than 1 second than 1 second i key Less than 1 second i ke i secq q Password input __ Control in progress or more set value in general 65 169 T Control stop Special function gt key Less than 1 second Expansion Control Setting Level P ON Operation at power ON CONT STOP MANU SPTR SP tracking MANT Manual output mothod OFF ON HOLD INIT PIDI MANI PID
184. Setting range Units Default value Temperature Lower limit of sensor set ting range to upper limit of sensor setting range Remote SP Analog Larger of 19999 and dis play value equivalent to input lower limit to smaller of 99999 and display value equivalent to upper input limit lower limit Related setting data Reference Input type Input initial setting level P 8 36 Input temperature units Input initial setting level P 8 37 Control mode Control initial setting level P 8 43 SP upper limit SP lower limit Control initial setting level P 8 43 Note When the input type of remote SP input is set to temperature input be sure to set the input type of the main input to the same setting as the input type of remote SP input If the input type of remote SP input is set to temperature input and the upper and lower limits of remote SP are not the same as the upper and lower limits of the sensor setting range of the input type of remote SP input it will not be possible to obtain a correct remote SP value CH PV decimal point display Pode Temperature input This setting can be used to not show the digits of the PV after the decimal point e When PV decimal point display is turned OFF the digits of the PV after the decimal point are not shown When turned ON the digits after the decimal point are shown according to the input type setting Al range Units D
185. This tentatively saves the calibration data at this point 10 Press the key to obtain the display at left Note that this display will not appear if not all of the required data has been tentatively saved Press the A key Display 2 will show H 5 Two seconds after the key is released or when the kel is pressed the tentatively saved calibration data is stored in non volatile memory If you do not wish to save the data in non volatile memory press the key instead of the A key For a multi point input type connect as explained in step 2 and repeat steps 5 to 10 e f linear current output is selected continue with the procedure explained in 9 6 Output calibration P 9 12 11 Turn off the power to quit calibration mode 9 7 I Section 9 User calibration 9 4 Analog input calibration 9 8 bog a r Analog input is calibrated in the following groups according to the analog input type current input group 15 16 voltage input group 1 17 18 and voltage input group 2 19 E5AR E5ER Input power supply STV Connect the power supply Connect the STV and DMM to the input terminals of the analog input as shown above
186. To use broken line approximation set Broken line approximation enable to ON the initial setting is OFF Broken line approximation includes the settings Broken line approxi mation 1 Inputs 1 to 20 and Broken line approximation 1 Outputs 1 to 20 Normalized data is used to set the values such that the lovver limit Of the input setting range for input 1 is 0 000 and the upper limit is 1 000 e Normalized data is used to set the values for broken line approxi mation such that the lovver limit of the input setting range for input 1 is 0 0000 and the upper limit is 1 000 For example if the input type of input 1 is J 2 20 0 to 400 0 C and the broken line approximation is to be applied to one point 190 0 C the values are set as follows Operation result Display value 400 0 C lt 1 000 295 0 C lt 0 750 20 0 C lt 0 000 0 000 0 500 1 000 20 0 C 190 0 C 400 0 C Broken line approximation 1 Input 1 0 000 Broken line approximation 1 Output 1 0 000 Broken line approximation 1 Input 2 0 500 Broken line approximation 1 Output 2 0 750 Broken line approximation 1 Input 3 1 000 Broken line approximation 1 Output 3 1 000 1 Default Setting data Setting range Unis valie Broken line OFF Disabled OFF approximation 1 enable ON Enabled Broken line approximation 1 Input 1 to Broken line approximation 1 Input 20 Input 1 999 to 9 999 Broken line approximation1 Output
187. Units and is regarded as the units after scaling In the case of a temperature sensor this is C or F A 3 Appendix Sensor input setting ranges ndicator control ranges Specifica Setting Input setting range Display control range Input type Platinum 200 0 to 850 0 300 0 to 1500 0 305 0 to 955 0 480 0 0 to 1680 0 resistance temperature 150 00 to 150 00 199 99 to 300 00 180 00 to 180 00 249 99 to 350 00 sensor 200 0 to 1300 0 560 0 to 2560 0 20 0 to 500 0 90 0 to 990 0 100 0 to 850 0 260 0 to 1660 0 20 0 to 400 0 75 0 to 825 0 200 0 to 400 0 400 0 to 800 0 0 0 to 600 0 110 0 to 1210 0 100 0 to 850 0 260 0 to 1660 0 200 0 to 400 0 400 0 to 800 0 200 0 to 1300 0 560 0 to 2560 0 0 0 to 1700 0 300 0 to 3300 0 0 0 to 1700 0 300 0 to 3300 0 100 0 to 1800 0 10 0 to 3490 0 0 0 to 2300 0 410 0 to 4510 0 4 to 20 mA One of following ranges depending on 10 to 110 of setting range O to 20 mA scaling Maximum range 19999 to 99999 1to5V 19999 to 99999 0t05V 1999 9 to 9999 9 Oto 10 V 199 99 to 999 99 19 999 to 99 999 1 9999 to 9 9999 Applicable input type standards are as follows K J T E N R S B JIS C1602 1995 L Fe CuNi DIN43710 1985 U Cu CuNi DIN43710 1985 W W5Re W26Re ASTM E988 1990 Pt100 JIS 1604 1997 ICE751 A 4 ASCII Codes ASCII Codes lil l lei sl s w s e s P misirli aje s s mie
188. V When PV lt 200 0 C PID Set 1 is used When 200 0 lt PV lt 400 0 C PID Set 2 is used 200 0 PID automatic selection range upper limit is set so that the value increases as the PID Set No increases However note that the value for PID Set 8 is internally fixed at Internal fixed Automatic selection range upper limit 999 9 FS value 999 9 FS a 100 To prevent chattering when changing PID sets hysteresis can be set in PID set selection hysteresis PV or DV deviation can be selected for the PID set selection data I Default Setting data Setting range Units 2 0 Auto selection Banks 0 to 7 PID Set No 1 to 8 PID Sets 1 to 8 AW E PID Sets 1 to 8 Automatic selection range upper limit 19999 10 99999 PID set selection data 0 PV 1 DV OPV a D set selection hystere 0 10 to 99 99 5 13 I Section 5 Functions and Operations M Disturbance overshoot adjustment Disku patak overshoot The disturbance overshoot adjustment function adjusts the control adjustment functionenabled waveform when a disturbance occurs e To use this function set Disturbance overshoot adjustment function to ON the initial setting is OFF e The disturbance response waveform can be adjusted using the Disturbance gain and Constant at disturbance settings 6 Disturbance gain e The Disturbance gain setting
189. Weel P ue 57 Setup for operation mounting wiring initial Section 3 Typical Control Examples settings Section 4 Settings Required for Basic Explains the basic functions of the Control E5AR ER Section 8 Setting Data Basic operation of the EBAR ER Explains hovv to use the customized functions scaling SP ramp etc to get the most out of the EBAR ER Advanced functions 1 Section 5 Functions and Operations of the EBAR ER Section 8 Setting Data Section 6 Communication CompoWay Explains how to use communication F based functions Section 7 Communication Modbus Communication functions User calibration Section 9 User Calibration pan 0 ES ingl can be performed by the user Troubleshooting Section 10 Troubleshooting A encounter a problem Product specifications List of set tings 2 Can be used to make a copy of your settings For details on using DeviceNet communications functions refer to the E5AR E5ER Digital Controller DeviceNet Communications Users Manual H124 VIII Special markings 1 Important This appears in cases where incorrect settings or operation will prevent a function from achieving the expected result Set the input type before setting the scaling value If the input type is changed after setting the scaling value the scal ing value will be automatically initialized 2 Hint This gives useful hints advice and other supplemental information The rise and fal
190. XIII 3 4 Cascade control of reflow ovens 3 13 SEP C ORHuu LLL 3 13 WINING Gouania nai o b s kasha aen saa 3 14 s b Don ooo bob a k uama 3 14 a ara gsq 3 15 3 5 Ratio control of dyeing machines 3 18 AED C LORL a 3 18 Yuli t 3 19 OLDU LD 3 19 ACILSIMEnN o 3 21 Section 4 Settings Required for Basic Control 4 1 Setting levels and key operation 4 2 4 2 Sel VAISS yen 4 4 4 3 Initial setting examples 4 5 44 Setting the input type 4 8 Ipu lyp e 2 a o Su eee 0007 4 8 SCAN La a Da ee oe 4 9 4 5 Selecting the temperature units 4 12 4 6 Selecting the control mode 4 13 4 7 Setting output parameters 4 14 G R T D RO Lada m ola 4 14 Direct operation cool Reverse operation heat 4 14 OUTDUTAY DCX earna taqiupas 4 15 Oulb bassinmneniu
191. abled Use these settings to set values for broken line approximation 1 e Set values for broken line approximation Up to 20 points can be specified for one broken line approximation Use normalized data for the values e If Input n gt Input n 1 the setting of point n 1 will not be effective Operation result P5 disabled because P5 Input 5 lt Input 4 Output 3 5 unu 6 point broken line approximation characteristics Output 1 1 1 P7 to 20 nput 1 Input2 Input3 Argument 1 Input data Disabled R Setting data Setting range Units Default value 1 Broken li imation Input 11 ee 1 0000 0 000 0 000 Broken line approximation Input 20 Setting Broken li imation Output 1 t ozanla approximanon AU 110 1 999 to 9 999 0 000 Broken line approximation Output 20 Related information 5 1 Input adjustment functions W Broken line approximation 5 6 6 Related setting data Broken line approximation 1 enable Control initial setting 2 level P 8 51 8 34 yub way 8 9 Input initial setting level L 8 9 Input initial setting level L L This level contains initial settings for input including input type temperature units and scaling settings Povver on Approximation Adjustment 1 gt Adjustment 2 gt Bank setting PID setting key less key less key
192. adjust the PID constants run AT For more information see 4 10 Determining the PID constants AT manual settings P 4 20 3 7 Section 3 Typical Control Examples M Settings for heating cooling control 3 8 Dead band Cooling coefficient When heating cooling control is selected the Dead band and Cooling coefficient settings can be used The dead band is set centered on the SP The dead band vvidth is set in Dead band in the Adjustment level Setting a negative value changes the dead band to an overlap band Dead band Overlap band Output Dead band width Positive Output Dead band width Negative lt 00 100 side side Heal side 0 PV 0 lt gt lt gt Heat side P A Cool side P Heat side P A Cool side P SP SP e The initial setting is 0 00 When the heating characteristics of the object are different from the cooling characteristics and satisfactory control is not possible using the same PID parameters use the cooling coefficient to adjust the proportional band of cooling control output and thereby balance heating and cooling control The heating control output P and the cooling control output P are as follows Heating P P Cooling P Heating P x Cooling coefficient The cooling P is obtained by multiplying the heating P by the cooling coefficient and cooling output control is performed with different characteristics than heat
193. al end For the response codes see 6 7 Operation commands Communication CompoWay F P 6 11 6 31 Section 6 Communication CompoWay F 6 10 Program example M N88Basic 6 32 This program displays the response from the E5AR ER on the screen when command data is entered from the keyboard Command data from the unit number to the number of elements must be entered The program was created in N88BASIC PROGRAM E5AR ER Communication Sample Program CompoWay F VERSION 1 00 c Copyright OMRON Corporation 2003 AlI Rights Reserved OPEN COM E73 AS 1 SENDDATA Communication data input INPUT SEND DATA SEND If no input jump to end routine IF SEND THEN EXITSEND BCC 0 SEND SEND CHR 3 FOR 1 1 TO LEN SEND BCC BCC XOR ASC MID SENDS 1 NEXT BCC CHR BCC SDATA CHR 2 SEND BCC PRINT 1 SDATA Receive routine RDATA TIMEOUT 0 RCVLOOP No response detection TIMEOUT TIMEOUT 1 IF TIMEOUT gt 2000 THEN RESP No Response GOTO RCVEND IF LOC 1 0 THEN RCVLOOP Check for end character if no end character continue reading RDATA RDATA INPUT LOC 1 1 IF LEN RDATA lt 2 THEN RCVLOOP IF MID RDATA LEN RDATA 1 1 lt gt CHR 3 THEN RCVLOOP RESP MID RDATA 2 LEN RDATA 2 RCVEND Display received data PRINT
194. al settings This command is used in setting area 1 If used in setting area O an operation error will result To use this command Write via communication must be enabled using the Write via communication operation command Slave Function Write start Instruction Related address mode address code information CRC 16 H00 HOB H00 1 1 2 2 2 bytes The above indicates a normal end For information on error responses see 7 7 Operation commands Communication Modbus P 7 14 7 27 Section 7 Communication Modbus M Cancel latch M SP mode 7 28 Response Slave Function Write start Instruction Related address mode address code information CRC 16 1 1 2 2 2 bytes Related information HOO HTO H20 H 30 Cancel alarm latch H F0 Cancel alarm latch This command cancels alarm latch The command is used when the alarm latch function is in use This command can be used in both setting area 0 and setting area 1 If AT is being run in the specified channel an operation error will result To use this command Write via communication must be enabled using the Write via communication operation command Slave Function Write start Instruction Related address mode address code information CRC 16 1 1 2 2 2 bytes The above indicates a normal end For information on error responses see 7 7 Operation commands Communication Modbus P 7 14 Slave Function Write start Instruction Related address
195. alarm 4 OR output All channel input error OR output All channel RSP input error OR output I Section 1 Overview E Explanation of Model Numbers Q 2009066260 a Es R II l lI l ttt HII Size A 96 x 96 mm E 48 x 96 mm Constant Program 3 Control method Standard heat cool Position proportional P 4 Output 1 Relay rela R Pulse output pulse voltage curenti0 Current current 5 Output 2 Relay relay Pulse output pulse voltage current Current current 6 Auxiliary output Option function 1 None Blank RS 485 communication 8 Option function 2 None Blank Events 4 points 9 Input 1 Multi input event input 2 points Multi input FB Potentiometer input Multi input multi input Input 2 Multi input multi input 3 Communications method CompoWay F The above is an explanation based on functionality There may be some differences from the product line depending on the combination of features selected Please check the catalogue when ordering For details on using DeviceNet communications functions refer to the E5AR E5ER Digital Controller DeviceNet Communications Users Manual H124 Section 2 Preparations ho Q o m an 2 1 n uyu unuyay uyu spa bili 2 2 2 2 How to Use the Terminals 2 4 I Section 2 Preparations 2 1 I
196. alue upper limit is set for the alarm type operation will be as shown in the following figure Display value Input value ON Alarm function OFF Alarm value For information on alarms refer to 4 11 Using auxiliary output P 4 23 Input Shift The sign of the input shift value will be inverted Therefore set input shift value 1 and input shift value 2 to values that invert the sign of the display value For information on input shift refer to 5 1 Input adjustment functions P 5 2 e SP Ramp The rise and fall of the ramp will be inverted Therefore set the rising direction of the display value for the SP ramp fall value and the falling direction of the display value for the SP ramp rise value For information on the SP ramp refer to 5 2 Control functions P 5 8 PID Set Automatic Selection If PID set automatic selection data is set to PV set the PID set automatic selection range upper limit so that the set values decrease for the PID set numbers in ascending order as shown in the following figure PID set automatic selection range upper limit PID1 automatic selection range upper limit PID7 automatic selection range upper limit PID set number If PID set automatic selection data is set to DV the DV used when performing auto select will be inverted For information on PID set automatic selection refer to 5 2 Control functions P 5 8 I Section 4 Settings Required for Basic Contro
197. and set the STV output to the voltage that is equivalent to the inspection value startup power If the cold junction compensating system is set to external a cold junction compensator and compensation wire are not needed 6 Resistance Preparations temperature input Connect as follows to the required devices sensor r Input power supply L Operation Set the 6 dial to the resistance that is equivalent to the inspection value 9 13 Section 9 User calibration Analog input e Preparations Connect as follovvs to the required devices E5AR E5ER r Input power supply Operation Set the STV output to the inspection value voltage or current E5AR E5ER qlo Input power supply O Section 10 Troubleshooting 10 1 Troubleshooting checklist 10 2 10 2 Error messages eiaei lad ane 10 3 10 3 Inferring causes from conditions abnormal measured values 10 4 10 4 Inferring causes from conditions abnormal control 10 5 10 5 Inferring causes from conditions abnormal output 10 7 10 6 Inferring causes from conditions communication problems 10 8 c o 522 2 a 10 1 Section 10 Troubleshooting 5 10 1 Troubleshooting checklist If you encounter difficu
198. and the heating MV of heating cooling control contol Monitorrange ns Standard 5 0 to 105 0 Heating 0 0 to 105 0 cooling I Section 8 Setting data CH 7 F O MV monitor cooling 7 M Control mode is heating cooling control V w a rm Monitors the cooling MV during operation e Monitors the cooling MV during heating cooling control ETA 0 0 to 105 0 E Monitor OI Related setting data Control mode Control initial setting level P 8 43 O Valve opening monitor MH Position proportional type Monitors the amount of valve opening during operation e Monitors the amount of valve opening during position proportional control A potentiometer can be connected and Motor calibration can be executed to monitor the amount of valve opening T S nmi Monitrrange ns Position propor 10 0 to 110 0 Monitor tional Related setting data Control mode Control initial setting level P 8 43 Motor calibration Control initial setting 2 level P 8 52 8 10 CH Run Stop CH Auto Manual if Operation g Operation m 8 3 Operation level e Use this to run or stop control e The initial setting is Run Press the keys to select riin Run or Sta Stop When Stop is selected the STOP indicato
199. ange Setting data Setting range Units Default value Proportional band P 0 00 to 999 99 10 00 Integral time I 0 0 to 3999 9 233 0 Derivative time D 0 0 to 3999 9 For ON OFF control set the proportional band to 0 0 0 0 cannot be selected on a position proportional type e For P control or PD control set the integral time to 0 0 0 0 cannot be selected on a position proportional type when performing floating control or when Operation at potentiometer error is set to Continue 6 Related setting data AT Execute Cancel Adjustment level 8 13 yu Advanced PID control Y w a w a Use MV upper limit and MV lower limit to set upper and lower limits for the MV When the unit calculates an MV that is outside of the upper and lower limits the upper or lovver limit is output MV upper limit The setting range differs for standard control and heating cooling control The cooling MV of heating cooling control is expressed as a negative value 8 31 I Section 8 Setting data MV lower limit The setting range differs for standard control and heating cooling control The cooling MV of heating cooling control is expressed as a negative value e The MV limit function does not operate on a position proportional type during floating control and thus the setting is not effective in this case Setting data Setting range Unit
200. ard control 5 0 to MV upper limit 0 1 MV lovver limit Heating cooling control 105 0 to 0 0 M MV change rate limit MV change rate limit heating The MV change rate limit is used to set a maximum allovved change per second in the MV or in the opening of a valve in the case of a position proportional controll type f a change occurs in the MV that exceeds this setting the MV is changed by the set limit each second until the required change is attained When the limit is set to the function is disabled For standard control use MV change rate limit heat MV change rate limit cool cannot be used For heating cooling control separate limits can be set for heating and cooling MV change rate limit heat is used for heating and MV change rate limit cool is used for cooling The MV change rate limit cannot be used in the following conditions e Manual mode e During AT e During ON OFF control P 0 00 e When control is stopped MV output at Stop e During MV output at PV error If you only wish to limit the rate of increase in the MV set the MV change rate limit mode to 1 l Default Setting data Setting range m value MV change rate limit 0 0 to 100 0 sec heat me Sanders 0 0 to 100
201. arm adjustment functions 4 11 Using auxiliary output I When using SP ramp an alarm will activate during RUN with respect to the SP after ramping and during STOP an alarm will activate with respect to the SP Operating point of alarm upper limit alarm SP SP after ramp M Alarm values Alarm values are indicated by X in the alarm type table VVhen separate upper and lovver limit alarm values are set the upper limit value is indicated by H and the lovver limit is indicated by L When upper and lower limit upper and lovver limit range or lower limit alarm vvith standby sequence is selected the Alarm upper limit and Alarm lovver limit settings must be configured Alarm value must be configured vvhen any other alarm type is selected M Settings To output an alarm to the auxiliary output the Auxiliary output assignment Alarm type and Alarm value settings must be configured Outputting a lovver limit alarm to auxiliary output 2 using CH 1 alarm 1 and an alarm value of 10 0 C Auxiliary output 2 The following explains how to set Auxiliary output 2 assignment to assignment CH 1 alarm 1 in Control initial setting level 2 1 Hold down the _ key at least 3 seconds to move from RUN level to Input initial setting level Fu 2 In Input initial setting level Display 3 shows
202. aseald Aejdsiq lonuo euonulodold uonisod Buunp Sulu do A 8A AN dS Ad anleA iu s ld Z Aejdsig ON JULg dS Ad ane 1u s ld Aejdsiq u hp l s l s eldsip dS Ad NJLA juEeseld Buisn si Ae dsip INH 84 pue s eidsip SulMollo ay 58 dS Ad nlEA lu s ud g INH wo qissod Ajuo 51 0nuo2 6 uonisod ul Z s Um s urod feuo p Ad 4ofl q Aeidsiq pue d f indul Ag 1 1 ANYIN 0 OLNV HO jenueyyoiny L dOLS 0 HO dols unu 9 i 07011 01 0701 0 06444444 H H Jo uow S lu do A PA 3090 z l i 0501 01 070 VE7O0000 H 01 00000000 H 1002 JoyJUOW AW 2090 i 0501 01 070 Y LY00000 H 01 00000000 H wam Qe y JOWUOW AN w n edi Indu o Burpiodoy Hw q ddn dS ol 1011 Jamo Hues qS HO JOWUOW ds dwey 9090 n HO i HO n HO 99 ad ndu o Bulpsoooy H l 18 se WU g ddn YS 1 O ywl JS ad ndu o Bulpsoooy 18 SE luu saddn Hues dS 0 WWI Jamo um s qS 00110 0701 27700000H 01 96444444iH l8uo luodoid uollisoq JOWUOW qS 090 dS 2090 0901 01 0 901 VIT00000H 01 93844444H 1009429H 0901 0 09 VIT00000H 01 00000000H Puepuels AN enue 0090 0000 zl z indul Josuas Jo bu p l ds
203. at the key is pressed several times to 3 Control mode setting ads Control mode switch to desired setting Check the control 2 Standard control data mode Ta Press twice less than 1 second x Display 3 will show 3 alarm setting level arm setting leve Alarm 1 type 413 7 the alarm 2 Upper limit alarm ype gt 3 Refer to alarm type list 4 Alarm type setting Change the alarm page 8 54 type with the AIX key Alarm 2 type c B Absolute value upper limit alarm Bice Press for at least 1 second to return to RUN level a 4 6 4 3 Initial setting examples I Change control period 6 Set alarm value 1 7 Set alarm value 2 8 Set SP 10 Start operation lt o lt 5 Control begins RUN level Present value PV SP MV yin Less than 1 second Adjustment level Bank No ti Bank No 0 Control period heat 20 18 5 0 5 seconds V Less than 1 second Change the control period with AIM keys Bank setting level Display bank selection ti Bank Verify that the display bank selection is 0 Bank No 0 alarm value 1 Set alarm value 1with 2 35 5 0 the keys A y Bank No 0 alarm value 2 Set alarm value 2 with ee ulu 20 u 200 0 C the keys A y PID setting level g isplay PID selection PID set No 1 aa RUN level Set SP
204. atch the units of input 1 input 2 is converted from normalized data to an industrial quantity using straight line approximation 1 Convert 0 000 1 000 to O 5 000 Straight line approximation 1 input 1 0 000 Straight line approximation 1 input 2 1 000 Straight line approximation 1 output 1 0 000 Straight line approximation 1 output 2 5 000 This result is multiplied by the proportion Ratio setting AP1 0 05 Straight line approximation 2 is then used to convert this result from an industrial quantity to normalized data Straight line approximation 2 input 1 0 000 Straight line approximation 2 input 1 0 250 Straight line approximation 2 input 1 0 000 Straight line approximation 2 input 1 1 000 VVhen the ratio setting AP1 is 0 05 and the measured value of input 2 is 240 0 kg s control of the dye takes place using an SP of 12 0 kg s 3 5 Ratio control of dyeing machines I M Adjustment To adjust the PID constants run AT For more information see 4 10 Determining the PID constants AT manual settings P 4 20 To change the proportion change Proportion setting AP1 On the E5AR ER use normalized numbers for approxi mation settings such as broken line and straight line approximation For example use 0 200 for 20 Also if input 1 is K 200 0 to 1300 0 C use 0 0 000 for 200 0 C and 100 1 000 for 1300 0 C 8 z O S 3 21 l Section
205. ate VVrite via communication OFF VVrite via communication ON 5 29 Section 5 Functions and Operations 5 30 Bank No Bits 0 to 2 Run Stop Auto Manual e The bank number is specified by the event input ON OFF state The content of the event input is reflected in Bank No Adjustment level e This setting data is an operation command that is particular to a single channel e Operation is as follows based on the event input ON OFF state Eventinput o Eventinput o Bank No Bank No Bank No Description Bit 0 Bit 1 Bit 2 571 a on or or Pur act o ov ov unBark Nos ON ON unano To use eight banks Banks 0 to 7 3 event input points are required When the event input is ON operation is stopped and the STOP Indicator lights up The content of the event input is reflected in Run Stop Run level This setting data is an operation command that is particular to a single channel e Operation is as follows based on the event input ON OFF state e When the event input is ON the mode switches to manual and the MANU operation indicator lights up The content of the event input is reflected in Auto Manual Run level This setting data is an operation command that is particular to a single channel e Operation is as follows based on the event input ON OFF state 5 7 Using event input i SP mode This function is only effective when the con
206. ated Page 1 5 Bar graph added to the top list Page 1 6 Function key 1 added to the Auto Manual key Page 1 7 Note at the bottom of the page corrected Page 1 8 Event input assignment diagram corrected Page 1 10 Control transfer output allocation diagram corrected Page 1 12 Item 11 corrected to Communications method Pages 2 4 to 2 7 Terminal arrangement graphics corrected Page 2 8 Paragraph below the table deleted Page 2 9 Note added below the table Page 2 10 E5ER graphic on the right side deleted and on the left graphic changed to EBER Li4L L1 Page 2 11 Event inputs 3 to 7 corrected to event inputs 3 to 6 in two paragraphs under Event inputs terminals Page 3 11 and throughout the manual Control initial setting level 2 corrected to Control initial setting 2 level Page 3 16 The RSP indicator in the graphic under RUN level Ch 2 corrected to OFF from ON Page 4 7 PID adjustment level corrected to PID setting level Page 4 22 Auxiliary output assignment diagram corrected Page 4 25 Item 8 Press the level key twice corrected to Press the level key three times Page 4 31 Item 1 About two seconds corrected to About four seconds Page 5 9 Monitor and setting range for SP ramp time unit in the top table corrected Page 5 30 Auto Manual Adiustment level corrected to Auto Manual RUN level under
207. ation 1 7 Main TUNC ONS ice a a a 1 8 Explanation of Model Numbers 1 12 2 41 xu uns usu ma a CSS as asta 2 2 DIMENSIONS xu uuu 2 2 Hstalal oan a ma E a 2 2 2 2 How to Use the Terminals 2 4 ZA RZA 707 O s ashawan 2 4 ESER aa a basa lan smsal o dan 2 8 Precautions when WINNG casita one a a 2 11 YUVA o 0 rr O emer ae cee oe aaa sa 2 11 Section 3 Typical Control Examples x olanda CONTON soin aras PULA 3 2 ADDICION ene Up Vs l s n 3 2 en n 3 2 SENGS bes 3 3 3 4 3 2 Heating cooling control of a chemical reaction device 3 5 A DE CANOR b o bo az 3 5 VUR Q ut u a ML D no 3 6 DENNI usun au Bas b 3 6 PROS TIVO TAN yaa au m 3 7 Settings for heating cooling control 3 8 3 3 Position proportional control of a ceramic kiln 3 9 A pplie ATION a b a an 3 9 amp aaa en n DS u ax 3 10 SEL s n m 3 10 Adiusiment 2255 b b bel sel 11 Settings for position proportional control 3 12
208. ation command is not correct The vvritten data exceeds the setting range The setting information in the vvritten data is not permitted in the current operation mode 6 Write via communication is OFF disabled 6 Attempted to write to setting data of setting area 1 from set ting area 0 l 6 Attempted to write to protect setting data from other than Operation error 4 protect level 6 AT is running 6 User calibration in progress 6 Cannot process the operation command Unit error unit change display unit error internal non vola tile memory error No response In the following cases the received command is not processed and a response is not returned For this reason a time out occurs at the host device e The client address in the received command is different from the communication unit number set in the E5AR ER A parity error framing error or overrun error occurred due to a transfer or other error e A CRC 16 code error occurred in the received command frame e An time interval greater that 3 5 characters occurred between data sets vvhile receiving the command frame 7 3 List of functions 7 3 List of functions Function codes supported on the E5AR ER are shown below Function codes Communication Modbus Function Description codes Reads the variable area Multiple variables that are contiguous can be read Read variables multiple Writes to the variable area Write varia
209. ay PID set select setting at the beginning of PID setting level Povver on Por ed PID setting level Display PID selection 1 I i i PID1 Operation level 77 77 2 eve eve xe i I key less Fit key less 1 Par than 1 second than 1 second key less key less han 1 sec than 1 second I I 1 1 777 PID setting Bank setting I I level L EET key ess Ove E Prd beyt EVE E ba than 1 second than 1 second C Control in P PID8 Proportional band nu 10 00 999 99 standard 1 8 1 PID8 Integral time 0 0 3999 99 standard position proportional closed control 2 Zi 8 D PID8 Derivative time 8 OL L PID8 MV lower limit u 5 0 MV upper limit 0 1 8 AUT PID8 Automatic selection range upper limit l 10 to 110 temperature of sensor setting range 3 Position proportional type 0 01 999 99 Position proportional floating control type 0 1 3999 9 Analog type 10 to 110 of scaling display range with a maximum of 19999 to 99999 a I 4 Display PID selection m Use this setting to select the PID set that you wish to display e Set the number
210. bles Can write to multiple variables that multiple are contiguous Broadcasting is possible 06 H 06 Write variable Writes an operation command operation command Broadcasting is possible 08 H 08 Echo back test Performs an echo back test 7 7 Section 7 Communication Modbus 7 4 Variable area The area used for data exchange when communicating with the E5AR ER is called the variable area The PV is read and various setting data are read and written using the variable area of the EBAR ER Operation commands do not use the variable area E5AR ER Operation Microprocessor instruction etc Variable area Read write The variable area is accessed by specifying the position of a variable within the variable area using a channel identifier area number and in area address Address Each variable type has an address Each address is two bytes long Communication and expressed in hexadecimal Assign addresses according to units of Modbus access size An address consists of a channel identifier area number and in area address Address 2 bytes a l l l l l el lelelel al l l l lo JX JAW v k Channel Area number 00 to 3F Address in area 00 to FE indentifiers 0 to 3 Area numbers Area numbers in the variable area are as follows Variable ae Description type Protect level RUN level Adjustment level Setting 7 0 Adiust anal Operation in pro
211. bration Therefore to connect or disconnect the cold junction compensator short circuit enable or open circuit disable the tip of the thermocouple inside the cold junction compensator while keeping the compensation wire connected as shown in the diagram f Connecting the cold A correct input value cannot be obtained if the compensation wire connector is Cold junction compensator Cold junction compensator Short circuit Compensating vvire Compensating vvire 9 5 I Section 9 User calibration Input types 2 4 7 8 10 14 r 9 6 Follow these steps to perform calibration when thermocouple input is selected 1 Connect the power supply 2 Connect the DC reference current voltage generator STV in the following precision digital meter DMM in the following and cold junction compen sator a ZERO CON is used as an example in the following to the input terminals of the thermocouple as shown below Leave open OUTPUT INPUT alana wire of selected thermocouple However for thermocouples E R S W and B compensating wire of thermocouple K is used 3 Turn on the power 4 Move to calibration level A 30 minute aging time begins Perform aging using this time as a guideline When 30 minutes elapse
212. bsolute value lower limit alarm with standby sequence 6 Related setting data Bank alarm value Bank setting level P 8 28 Bank alarm upper limit Bank alarm lower limit Bank setting level P 8 29 Auxiliary output assignment Control initial setting 2 level P 8 48 Alarm latch Alarm setting level 8 55 Alarm hysteresis Alarm setting level P 8 56 Standby sequence restart Alarm setting level P 8 57 CH Alarm 1 latch Alarm 2 latch Alarm 3 latch Alarm 4 latch a Setting i 2 8 12 Alarm setting level L 3 Ya a bee Ml aa Alarm is assigned to auxiliary output and lt mr lt pa p mr a al ya alarm type is set to other than No alarm e When this setting is set to ON a latch function is added to the alarm function Once an alarm goes on the alarm output is held on until the povver is turned off Note that the latch is canceled if you change to setting area 1 e When the alarm output is set to close in alarm closed output is held and when set to open in alarm open output is held e After changing an alarm 1 to 3 latch setting a software reset must be executed or the power turned off and on to make the new setting take effect Alarm 1 latch Alarm 2 latch Alarm 3 latch Alarm 4 latch Related setting
213. can be increased to reduce Disturbance gain overshoot when a disturbance occurs e The Disturbance gain setting can be decreased to increase overshoot when a disturbance occurs e When Disturbance gain is set to O the disturbance overshoot adjustment function does not operate When disturbance gain is 1 Temperature SP 0 Time 6 Constant at The reset time after a disturbance can be lengthened by increasing disturbance the disturbance time contstant The default value 1 is normally used for the disturbance time constant n the event that adiustment of the disturbance gain alone is not sufficient this value can be adiusted for fine tuning Constant at disturbance VVhen constant disturbance is 1 Temperature p When constant disturbance is 2 SP 64 MANU Time e The waveform may vary from that in the diagram depending on differences in the object of control and differences in PID values 5 2 Control functions I Conditions for activation of disturbance overshoot adjustment Disiiibancesasilikalen band e If the deviation is greater than the Disturbance judgement width after the PV is rectified to the Disturbance rectification band the disturbance overshoot adjustment function activates e When the Disturbance judgement width is a positive value distur banc
214. control such as writing initial setting data cannot be performed Note that setting data that cannot be written can still be read In setting area 1 control is stopped This makes it possible to perform operations such as writing initial setting data which are not possible in setting area 0 When the power is turned on setting area 0 is selected To access setting area 1 use the Move to setting area 1 operation command To return to setting area O from setting area 1 turn off the power or use the Software reset operation command Software reset Operation instruction Setting area 0 Move to setting area 1 Setting area 1 Operation instruction Control in progress Control stop H scripion wea Setting area 0 During contro Setting area 1 Control stop Control initial setting level 7 9 Commands and responses Communication Modbus 7 9 Commands and responses Communication Modbus The E5AR ER provides a set of command frames that make use of variable area read write commands operation commands and other services provided by the Modbus communication protocol E5AR ER command frames are explained below E Monitor value read Communication Modbus Slave Function Read start Number of Command address mode address elements CRC 16 1 1 1 2 2 2 bytes m ch H0400 H0402 H0404 H 0408 rsion V H 0406 H 8406 nternal SP Bank No monitor H 8408 Bank No monitor H 040A PID Set
215. d 4 key repeatedly less than 1 second each time to move from RUN level to PID setting level 2 Display PID selection appears in PID setting level If a PID Set No will not be used use the initial setting 1 If a PID Set No will be used select et No for the desired control c l key to display the Proportional band used for control Use keys in this display to set the value to 0 00 4 Press the _ key repeatedly less than 1 second each time to return to RUN level Setting the hysteresis Setting Hysteresis heat to 2 00 in Adjustment level lt a g s gt 3 Press the Press the key less than 1 second to move from RUN level to Adiustment level 2 Bank No appears in Adiustment level key repeatedly to select Hysteresis heat 4 Use the keys to set the value to 2 00 5 Press the key repeatedly less than 1 second each time to return to RUN level 4 19 I Section 4 Settings Required for Basic Control 4 10 Determining the PID constants AT manual settings E AT Auto tuning e When AT is run
216. d key Less than 1 second than 1 second key Less than 1 second C J Control in progress C Control stop Display Adjustment level SPDP PV SP display screen selection 0 3 ODSL MV display selection MV heating O MV cooling C O BART Bar graph display item OFF Deviation 1 EU 10 EU 20 EU 100 EU MV heating Valve opening O MV cooling C O RET Display auto return time 0 99 0 Display auto return disabled D REF Display refresh period OFF 0 5 1 2 4 MONL Monitor item level setting 1 1 Disabled Input initial setting level Control initial setting level Control initial setting 2 level Alarm setting level Display adjustment level Communication setting level Advanced function setting level L ADF Expansion control setting level L EXC SC M Start display scan at power on OFF ON SC T Display scan period 0 99 8 59 Section 8 Setting data PV SP display screen selection SP e This setting is used to select the order of display of the PV SP display screen Operation level Setting range Units Default value m Display in the order PV SP Bank PV SP MV Setting Display in the order PV SP MV PV SP Bank Display only PV SP Bank Display only PV SP MV CH MV display selection nda Heating cooling co
217. d Communication CompoWay F Response 6 Operation state o Related information 6 30 This command reads the operation status of the EBAR ER The command can be used in any state of the EBAR ER Operation MRC SRC Response code state Related information Response codes The above indicates a normal end For the response codes see 6 7 Operation commands Communication CompoVVay F P 6 11 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 O Bit position ch4 ch3 ch2 chi Bit position Operation state Operating MV at PV error output Stopped I The operation state of each channel is indicated using a 2 bit code 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Biposition Bit description Bit position Not occurred Not occurred Not ocurred Not occurred Not oocurred 7 OR of channels set in Number of enabled channels When the channel does not exist is Not occurred 0 If this command is used in setting area 1 the related information is undefined M Echo back test Response 6 9 Commands and responses Communication CompoWay F MRC SRC Test data This command is used to perform an echo back test The command can be used in any state of the EBAR ER Keep the test data within the following ranges depending on the communication data length Communication Description data length p ASCII code H 20 to H 7E ASCII code H 20 to H 7E or H A1 to H FE MRC SRC Response code Testdata Response codes The above indicates a norm
218. data Bank alarm Bank setting level P 8 28 Bank alarm upper limit Bank alarm lower limit Bank setting level P 8 29 Auxiliary output assignment Control initial setting 2 level P 8 48 Alarm type Alarm setting level P 8 54 Alarm hysteresis Alarm setting level P 8 56 Standby sequence restart Alarm setting level P 8 57 8 55 I Section 8 Setting data CH xxxxxxxxxx m m ktmdk m k tMd xn mtkdkm n m nmKktk d tmt d kmn ktm kdk d n q un unm n n m n q urm n q qn q nm qn qn k dl mtkdt k qdktdoknt q kn o nonunununununununuuuuuU U Alarm 1 hysteresis Alarm 2 hysteresis Ya al y 22 na y yu pa nd 2 1r y 2 bos Alarm is assigned to auxiliary output and Alarm 3 hysteresis a a rr alarm type is set to other than No alarm Alarm 4 hysteresis e These settings are used to enable hysteresis for alarms 1 2 3 and m Default a Setting data Setting range Units Peat l Alarm 1 hysteresis Setting Alarm 2 hysteresis 0 01 to 99 99 FS 0 02 Alarm 3 hysteresis Alarm 4 hysteresis 6 Related setting data Heference Bank alarm Bank setting level P 8 28 Bank alarm upper limit Bank alarm lower limit Bank setting level P 8 29
219. djustment 2 Bank setting PID setting and Approximation setting levels to internal non volatile memory For information on these levels see 4 1 Setting levels and key operation P 4 2 This command can be used in both setting area 0 and setting area 1 To use this command Write via communication must be enabled using the Write via communication operation command MRC SRC Response code Response codes The above indicates a normal end For the response codes see 6 7 Operation commands Communication CompoWay F P 6 11 Instruction Related MRC SRC code information e Tele A software reset causes the same operation as turning the power off and on This command can be used in both setting area O and setting area 1 To use this command Write via communication must be enabled using the Write via communication operation command No response A response is not returned to this operation command 6 25 Section 6 Communication CompoWay F E Move to setting area 1 M Move to protect level 6 26 Response Response nstruction Related MRC SRC code information Use this command to move to setting area 1 The command is used in setting area 0 Nothing happens if the command is used in setting area 1 If the command is used when Initial setting protect is set to 2 Disable move to input initial setting level an operation error will result To use this command Write via communication
220. dvanced Function L less than 1 second Expansion Control Setting Level lt Setting Level ir L a L Parameter initialization OFF ON _ less than 1 second P ON Operation at povver On CONT STOP MANU il PF1 PF1 setting OFF RUN STOP R S ALLR ALLS AT BANK A M PFDP SPTR SP tracking OFF ON MANI Manual MV initial value 5 0 105 0 standard type 1 PF2 PF2 setting OFF RUN STOP R S ALLR ALLS AT BANK A M PFDP PIDI PID set automatic selection data PV DV REIMS PF1 monitor Setting item 1 0 19 MV change rate limit mode Mode 0 0 Mode 1 1 PIDH PID set automatic selection hysteresis 0 10 99 99 AT G AT calculated gain 0 1 10 0 PF1 2 PF1 monitor Setting item 2 0 19 PF1 5 PF1 monitor Setting item 5 0 19 P DB PV dead band AT H AT hysteresis 0 99999 0 1 9 9 CJC 1 Input 1 Cold junction compensation S FE ON 5 WA Limit cycle MV amplitude CJC 4 Input 4 Jie Cold junction xn TATE Temporary AT execute compensation judgement deviation OFF ON 0 0 100 0 Bumpless at Run Disabled OFF Enabled ON PF2 1 PF2 monitor Setting item 1 PF2 2 PF2 monitor Setting item 2 PF2 5 PF2 monitor Setting item 5 0 19 CH N Number of enabled channels
221. e eee im eee im im ee m m im im om om om om m im im om om om om om om im im om m om om im im om om im im m m Control initial setting level Control initial Alarm setting Display adjustment setting 2 level level level Se m m m m m m m m Expansion control setting level A 33 Appendix x pu ddy A 34 index Numerics 3 position control 4 18 A AIM KV a m ah enaqa 1 6 Address Communication Modbus 7 8 A 6 Addresses Communication CompovVVay F 6 7 A 6 Adjustment 2 level 8 22 A 13 Adjustment level 8 12 A 12 Advanced function setting level 8 67 A 26 AIIIN I uay aap 8 28 8 28 2017 a asa ns 8 28 Alan zs a abba 8 28 Alarm hysteresis 5 26 8 56 Alarm laten se e na aoa 5 27 8 55 Alarm lower limit 8 29 Alarm setting level 8 53 A 23 Alarm types 4 24 8 54 Alarm upper limit 8 29 Alarm values 4 25 G C 8 76 Analog input calibration 9 8 Analog parameter 8 25 Approximation setting level 8 33
222. e Alarm setting level P 8 54 Alarm latch Alarm setting level 8 55 8 57 I Section 8 Setting data Auxiliary output 1 non exciting Auxiliary output 2 non exciting Auxiliary output 3 non exciting Auxiliary output 4 non exciting 8 58 e Setting yu m 2 di w a EA F Lm a x 4 m a ni hm Fr m yar hm x 2 om e These settings are used to select the output state of alarms 1 2 3 and 4 e When close in alarm is selected the state of the alarm output function is output without change When open in alarm is selected the state of the output function is inverted before output The relation between the alarm output function alarm output and operation indicator is shown below Auxiliary Auxiliary Operation Close in alarm Open in alarm Setting data Setting range Units Default value Auxiliary output 1 non exciting Close in alarm Auxiliary output 2 non exciting m i Open in alarm Close Auxiliary output 3 non exciting in alarm Auxiliary output 4 non exciting 6 Related setting data Bank alarm Bank setting level P 8 28 Bank alarm upper limit Bank alarm lower limit Bank setting level P 8 29 Auxiliary output assignment Control initial setting level 2 P 8 48 Alarm type Alarm setting level P 8 54 Alarm latch Alarm setting
223. e AIX keys 6 Typical example Control object Temperature sensor I E5AR Q4B Input type 0 Pt100 200 0 to 850 0 C Control method PID control Control output Pulse voltage output Alarm 1 type 2 upper limit Alarm value 1 5 0 C a deviation is set Alarm 2 type 8 absolute value upper limit Alarm value 2 200 0 C PID Obtained by AT auto tuning Voltage output 12 V DC SP 150 0 C 4 5 I Section 4 Settings Required for Basic Control 1 Power on Power on RUN level Present value PV kiz SP MV Display 3 will show L input initial setting level Control stops Input initial setting level Input 1 type nputtype S 2 K 1 200 0 to 1300 0 C displayed Input initial setting level Hold down for at least 3 seconds Change the input Input 1 type m 1 Refer to input type list 2 Input specificat put type lis 7 a 1 type with the Aly e 00 1 200 0 to 850 0 C page 8 36 key Press less than 1 second f Display 3 will show control initial setting level Control initial setting level Check Output 1 Output type Output 1 type m 2 Refer to output type list ti Pulse voltage output page 8 42 E r r ssa indicates th
224. e 1 DSP 1 Scaling display value 1 nl 19999 scaling display value 2 1 INP 2 Scaling input value 2 DSP2 Scaling display value 2 Scaling display value 1 1 99999 DP Decimal point position 0 4 RSPH Lower limit of sensor setting range to upper limit of sensor setting range RSPL Lower limit of sensor setting range to upper limit of sensor setting range PVDP PV decimal point display OFF 0 ON 1 SNC Sensor induction noise reduction 50Hz 60Hz AMOV Move to advanced function setting level 1999 9999 1less than 1 second less than 1 second Control Initial less than 1 second Control Initial less than 1 second Setting 2 Level OUT 1 Control Transfer O1 T Output 1 type output 1 allocation Pulse voltage output 0 Linear current output 1 c Control Transfer O3 T Output 3 type output 4 allocation Pulse voltage output 0 0 32 Linear current output 1 CO1 T EV 1 Event input 1 allocation LAG 1 First order lag operation 1 enabled Linear current output 1 type n EF TON 0 20 mA 0 4 20 mA 1 Setting Level EV 6 Event input 6 CO2 T allocation First order lag Linear current output 2 type operation 4 enabled 0 20 mA 0 4 20 mA 1 OFF ON CO3 T 4 1 MAV 1 Movement Linear current output 3 type average 1 enabled 0 20 mA
225. e DMM use the A keys to set the output to 4mA In the example at left 4 mA appears at a value 2 digits smaller than before calibration Press the ke key to obtain the display at left Note that this display will not appear if not all of the required data has been tentatively saved or if the data has not been changed Press the A key Display 2 will show H 5 Two seconds after the key is released or when the is pressed the tentatively saved calibration data is stored in non volatile memory If you do not wish to save the data in non volatile memory press the kel key instead of the A key f there is another output connect the output as explained in step 2 and repeat steps 3 to 7 Turn off the power to quit calibration mode 9 7 Inspecting indicator accuracy 9 7 Inspecting indicator accuracy e After calibrating input be sure to inspect the indicator accuracy to verify that the input was calibrated correctly e Run the E5AR ER in the PV SP state Check the upper limit lower limit and mid range limit of the indicator range 3 values 6 Thermocouple Preparations Connect as follows to the required devices Be sure to connect the E5AR ER to the cold junction compensator using the compensation wire that you intend to use for the thermocouple E5AR E5ER Cold junction compensator Compensating wire Operation Make sure that the cold junction compensator is at 0 C
226. e as follows ON 1 kO max OFF 100 kO or higher No contact 1 ON residual voltage of 1 5 V max OFF leakage current of 0 1 mA max lt Circuit schematic gt 2 2 How to Use the Terminals 6 Communication To communicate with a host system connect between terminals F1 terminals and F2 on the E5AR or C1 and C2 on the ESER E5AR E5ER RS 485 G B At e The connection type is 1 1 or 1 N In a 1 N installation up to 32 units including the host computer can be connected RS 485 The maximum total cable length is 500 m e Use a shielded twisted pair cable AWG28 or higher lt Cable reference diagram gt AWG28 or higher cross sectional area of conductor 0 081 mm2 e Use a resistance of 100 to 125 O 1 2 W in the terminators Install terminators at both ends of the transmission path including the host computer To connect to an RS232C port on a computer use a 232 485 convertor Example convertor RS 232C RS 485 Interface Convertor K3SC 7 Adapter K32 23209 RS 232C RS 485 QF RS 232C 7 Converter K3SC 10 q D sub 9pin SS S Straight x 1 as 1 2 W anal we lt F2 1 2 W E5AR E5AR E5AR No 0 No 1 No 31 I Section 2 Preparations 2 18 Insulation blocks As shown in the following diagram each function block of the E5AR ER is electrically insulated lt Input gt lt event input voltage output current output gt
227. e bank that you wish to display e Up to 8 banks Bank Nos 0 to 7 can be used An SP local SP alarm value and PID Set No are stored in each bank L _ 1 Default value value tion Setting Bank number selected for execution 6 Related setting data Heference Bank No Adiustment level P 8 13 8 26 8 6 Bank setting level L A CH m x hm Bank local SP LSP ma 0 to 7 Use this setting to set the SP local SP in each bank e The SP of banks 0 to 7 can be set e When an SP is changed in PV SP in Operation level the local SP Of the currently used bank is also changed Setting data Setting range Units Default value s lia e a SP upper limit Setting 6 Related information 5 2 Control functions Banks P 5 9 Related setting data PV SP Operation level P 8 7 CH A A A Bank PID Set No 0 to 7 Use this setting to store a PID Set No in each bank e The PID Set No of banks 0 to 7 can be stored e When the PID Set No is set to the PID set auto select function automatically selects a PID set based on the PV or DV deviation If you wish to specify a PID set set the number of the PID set 1 to 8 Setting data Setting range Units Default value Setting Related information m 5 2 Control functions W Banks 5 9 R 5 2 Control funct
228. e it is 0 Therefore in cascade heating cooling control the primary loop is 0 and the secondary loop is 100 The corresponding alarm type numbers in all banks are initialized to 0 When the input type or control mode is changed and there are added channels scaling display values 1 and 2 and Decimal point position are not initialized A 29 Appendix Setting data list Protect Levels OAPT Operation Adiustment Protect 0 4 ICPT nitial setting protect 0 2 VVTPT Setting change protect OFF 0 ON 1 PF key protect OFF 0 ON 1 Povver on ce At least 1 second ce At least 3 seconds v y _ less than 1 second _ less than 1 second Operation Level gt Adjustment Adjustment PV Manual MV Ein m Position proportional m control type PV Valve opening PV SP Display 2 Present SP MV 25 A PV SP Display 3 rr uz 22 R S RUN STOP al A M AUTO MANU 1 In manual mode 2 One of the fol
229. e overshoot adjustment will activate when a disturbance occurs that makes the PV fall When the Disturbance judgement width is a negative value disturbance overshoot adjustment will activate when a disturbance occurs that makes the PV rise e Disturbance overshoot adjustment does not activate in the following situations e When Disturbance rectification band or Disturbance judgement width is set to 0 e When the SP is changed when the SP change width exceeds the Disturbance rectification band e During AT e During ON OFF control P 0 00 e During PD control 1 0 00 Disturbance judgement width e The units for the Disturbance rectification band and Disturbance judgement width settings are FS As such if the input type is K 1 200 0 to 1300 0 C and you wish to set the Disturbance judgement width to 15 0 C 15 0 C 1500 0 C x 100 1 00 FS hence 1 00 should be set Disturbance rectification band Temper ature Disturbance overshoot adjuster does not operate SPP Disturbance a udgement Disturbance overshoot adiuster operates Setting data Setting range m Disturbance overshoot OFF Disabled adiustment enable ON Enabled Disturbance gain 1 00 to 1 00 Disturbance time constant 0 01 to 99 99 Disturbance rectification 0 000 to 9 999 0 000 band
230. e perspective of the host computer For example Read Write refers to the host computer reading or writing to the EBAR ER E Communication specifications cation easy between multiple components and a computer FINS Factory Interface Network Service This is a protocol for message communication between controllers on an OMRON factory automation network Transfer connection Communication method Synchronization method Baud rate Send code Data length Stop bit length Error detection Flow control Interface Retry function Multi point RS 485 2 wire half duplex Start stop 9 6 k 19 2 k 38 4 k bit s ASCII 7 8 bits 1 2 bits Vertical parity None Even Odd BCC Block Check Character Start stop synchronized data configuration None RS 485 None Initial settings are shaded M Transfer protocol Communication CompoWay F The host computer sends a command frame and the EBAR ER sends a response frame based on the content of the command frame One response frame is sent in response to one command frame Host computer E5AR ER The exchange between the command frame and response frame is explained below After a receiving a response from the controller have the host computer wait at least 5 ms before sending the next command 6 1 Communication method I When writing multiple sets of setting data in a row such as when writing to the variable area or performing a compound write cont
231. ease the value within the limit that the small response speed does not become too slow Run AT The derivative time is too short the D value is too e Increase the D value within the limit that stability small during rectification does not deteriorate e Run AT ON OFF control is being performed Use P control or PID control The control period is too long in a fast thermal Shorten the control period response control system Overlap band is mistakenly set as a dead band in Set to overlap band heating cooling control Hunting occurs Settings Check connections and settings as explained above in Overshoot or undershoot occurs Op Possiblecause Soliton The heat capacity of the heater is too large for the Use a heater vvith a heat capacity suitable for the heat capacity of the object of control object of control Periodic disturbances occur that cause the heat Establish an environment will minimal capacity of the object of control to change disturbances AT is running Hunting will stop when AT ends 001 5 o o C o 10 6 10 5 Inferring causes from conditions abnormal output 10 5 Inferring causes from conditions abnormal output 6 No control output No alarm output Possible cause Abnormal temperature measurement See 10 3 Inferring causes from conditions abnormal measured values P 10 4 Incorrect load polarity or incorrect terminal Wire correclly connect
232. ed A temperature sensor is not connected Connect a temperature sensor A compensation wire compatible with the thermocouple is Directly connect a thermocouple with a long lead not being used Use a compatible compensation wire A metal device other than the thermocouple or Connect with a device that is designed for use with compensation wire is connected between the terminals of thermocouples the E5AR ER and thermocouple The terminal connection screws are loose resulting ina Tighten the screws securely bad connection The lead or compensation wire of the thermocouple is too Use a thick compensation wire long and gives rise to resistance effects e Change the wiring and locations to allow shorter lengths The 3 wires between the terminals of the EBAR ER and Use wires of the same resistance for terminals A B and B the platinum resistance temperature input sensor have different resistances The E5AR ER is receiving noise from peripheral devices Separate the E5AR ER from noise emitting devices e Install a surge absorber or noise filter in noise emitting devices The lead and power line of the temperature sensor are too Separate the lead from the power line close and induction noise is received from the power line Run the lead and power line through separate conduits or ducts Do not wire the lead in parallel with the power line e Change the wiring to allow a shorter lead e Use shielded wire
233. efault value m Setting Related data Input type Input initial setting level P 8 36 8 39 I Section 8 Setting data Sensor induction noise reduction Seat This function reduces induction noise from the power source in the input e This reduces induction noise in the input according to the frequency of the power source e Select 50 Hz or 60 Hz as appropriate for the power source used for the controller Seeng range Units Default value e Setting Related data Input type Input initial setting level P 8 36 Move to advanced function setting level Finnu Initial setting protect is set to 0 This function is used to move to Advanced function setting level A e Enter a password to move to Advanced function setting level e The password is set to 169 After entering 169 press the key or wait two seconds and you will move to Advanced function setting level Setting range Units Default value 1999 to 9999 Setting 6 Related setting data m Initial setting protect Protect level P 8 3 8 40 8 10 Control initial setting level z 8 10 Control initial setting level This level contains initial settings for control such as the control method as well as the output type SP limit control mode direct reverse action and closed floating settings Povver on key key 1 second or 3 seconds more Input init
234. er reading A and set Input value for input shift 2 to the controller reading A 4 After configuring the settings check the reading of the controller A and the temperature of the obiect B 5 Correction has now been performed at two points near room temperature and near the SP If you wish to improve the accuracy near the SP establish two more correction points above and below the SP Figure 2 illustrates the correction Temperature indicated on machine A After adjustment Indicated temperature aller ad ustmeni L a uz al ex 550 0 C Indicated temperature 1 before adjustment ex 500 0 C Before adjustment Input shift value 2 EE alalla Indicated temperature before adjustment G ex 40 02 Indicated temperature after adjustment Input shift value 1 2551 Temperature ex 25 0 C Room temperature Proximity of SP indicated on ex 25 C ex 550 C thermometer B II II Input shift Input shift input value 1 input value 2 ku c c Image adjustment by point adjustment of Fig 2 2 5 3 I Section 5 Functions and Operations 5 4 Example of 2 point correction Input shift input value 1
235. esh cycle it does not I affect the update period of the PV during control e To disable the function select OFF Setting range Units Default value Setting 8 61 Section 8 Setting data Monitor item level setting n n One of the following levels can be selected as the monitor item level setting Input initial setting level Control initial setting level Control initial setting 2 level Alarm setting level Display adjustment level Communication setting level Advanced function setting level Expansion control setting level e The monitor item level is added after the Approximation setting level e When OFF is selected the function is disabled Monitor item level is disabled Setting range Default value value Disabled monitor item level Input initial setting level Control initial setting level Control initial setting 2 level Alarm setting level Display adjustment level U 77757 setting level Advanced function setting level 2 Expansion control setting level input type m m Setting a M hes a yur K _ 1 20 x m w RE pa L K K L L K K L hm 2 7 na Start ub anada CE scan after power ON hm P Display scan period e Display scan automatically switches through channels on the display when multiple channels are used on a multi po
236. et to standard control with remote SP e This is used to monitor the remote SP vvhile in local SP mode e In remote SP mode the remote SP can be monitored in Display 2 of the PV SP screen Monitor range Remote SP lovver limit to remote SP upper limit EU Note that the SP limits are in effect CH Ramp SP monitor CH MV monitor heating ay Monitor 8 3 Operation level Related setting data PV SP Operation level P 8 7 SP mode Adiustment level P 8 14 Remote SP ramp rise value Remote SP lower limit Input initial setting level P 8 38 Control mode Control initial setting level P 8 43 al SP ramp rise value or SP ramp fall value 0 e Monitors the SP during ramp e The ramp function limits the rate of change of the SP e The setting is only displayed if a value is entered for SP ramp rise value or SP ramp fall value For other than ramp the SP value is the same as in PV SP 1 Monitorrange Units SP lower limit to SP upper limit Related setting data PV SP Operation level P 8 7 SP ramp time unit SP ramp rise value SP ramp fall value Adjustment level P 8 18 SP upper limit SP lower limit Control initial setting level P 8 43 Standard control heating cooling control w Monitors the heating MV during operation Monitor e Monitors the MV of standard control
237. etting Monitor item Adjustment Adjustment 2 Can display and change display x Cannot display or move to level The default value is This setting restricts access to Input initial setting Control initial setting Control initial setting 2 Alarm setting Display adjustment and Communications setting levels Move to Control initial setting Setting Move to input initial Control initial setting 2 Alarm value setting level setting Display adjustment Communications setting level Allowed Displays Move to special func Allowed tion setting level Allowed Does not dis 1 play Move to special Allowed function setting level Prohibited Prohibited e When Initial setting level protect is set to 2 nothing happens when the level key is held down to move to Input initial setting level from Operation Adjustment Adjustment 2 Bank setting PID setting Approximation setting or Monitor item level the blinking display to indicate movement to another level also does not appear e Initial setting level protect is initially set to 0 5 5 Protecting settings I Setting change This function prevents use of the keys protect value LIL pals m OFF Keys can be used to change settings Keys cannot be used to change settings Hovvever set ON tings can be changed in Protect level The initial setting is OFF
238. etting data PID Set No P Proportional band Integral time D Derivative time MV upper limit MV lower limit Automatic selection range upper limit e Select PID Set No in Display PID selection of PID setting level and set the data for each PID 5 2 Control functions I Set P proportional band of PID set 3 to 50 00 FS Display PID selection 1 Press the _ key repeatedly to move to PID setting level Display 3 shows 2 Use the A keys to set Display PID selection to 3 3 Press the cel key to select P Proportional band To check the bank number vievv the leading digit of the setting data 4 Use the A keys to set the value to 50 00 A PID Set No 1 to 8 is set in PID Set No in Bank setting level For this reason PID control parameters different from the selected bank can be used during operation If PID Set No is set to O the PID set is automatically selected PID auto selection according to previously set conditions 6 PID set automatic When PID Set No is set to 0 in a bank the PID set is automatically selection selected according to previously set conditions set Automatic selection range upper limit In the example at left PID set selection data is set to P
239. etting data compound read store WHITE a mu sus 6 19 Monitor value setting data compound read store check read 6 20 Monitor value setting data compound store fo 6 20 Monitor value read Communication CompoWay F 6 14 Monitor value read Communication Modbus 7 17 Monitor Setting item 5 22 Motor calibration 3 12 8 52 Motor calibration error 10 3 Move average 5 5 8 23 Move to advanced function setting level 8 40 Move to calibration level 8 71 Move to protect level 6 26 7 26 Move to setting area 1 6 26 7 26 Movement average enable 8 50 DAB 5 18 8 18 MV at stop 4 27 5 18 8 18 MV change rate limit 5 17 MV change rate limit Cooling 8 19 MV change rate limit heating 8 19 MV change rate limit mode 8 78 MV display selection 8 60 MMV 5 16 8 31 MV monitor cooling 8 10 MV monitor heating 8 9 Non volatile memory error 10 3 Number of enabled channels
240. etting data list Tless than 1 second Approximation Setting Level 12 SI1 1 Straight line approximation 1 Input 1 1 999 9 999 SI2 1 Straight line approximation 1 Input 2 1 999 9 999 SO1 1 Straight line approximation 1 Output 1 1 999 9 999 SO2 1 Straight line approximation 1 Output 2 1 999 9 999 11 2 Straight line approximation 2 Input 1 1 999 9 999 12 2 Straight line approximation 2 Input 2 1 999 9 999 01 2 Straight line approximation 2 Output 1 1 999 9 999 SO2 2 Straight line approximation 2 Output 2 1 999 9 999 1 1 Broken line approximation 1 Input 1 1 999 9 999 F120 1 Broken line approximation 1 Input 20 1 999 9 999 FO01 1 Broken line approximation 1 Output 1 1 999 9 999 FO20 1 Broken line approximation 1 Output 20 1 999 9 999 1 Input Initial Setting Level A 32 Passvvord 169 Appendix v _ key 3 seconds or more Control stops 11 T Input 1 type 0 19 TDU Input 1 Temperature units C F 12 T Input 2 type 0 19 2DU Input 2 Temperature units C F 13 T Input 3 type 0 19 SDU Input 3 Temperature units C F 14 T Input 4 type 0 19 4DU Input 4 Temperature units C F INP 1 Scaling input valu
241. etting initialization 8 68 Setting levels 4 2 Seng A 6 Software reset 6 25 7 25 SP WMS c 5 12 8 43 SP MOJO 5 31 6 28 7 28 8 14 SP TAM araa aa b N 5 8 SP ramp fall value 8 18 SP ramp rise value 8 18 SP ramp time units 8 18 OP racking ee a n 8 73 SPECIICAUONS ze aa A 2 Square root extraction enable 8 51 Standard control 1 9 3 2 4 13 Standard control with remote SP 1 9 4 13 Standby sequence 5 26 Standby sequence restart 8 57 Start display scan after power ON 8 62 Status read Communication CompoWay F 6 30 Status Communication CompoWay F A 8 SILOD eanan 6 21 7 21 STOP operation indicator 1 5 Straight line approximation 3 20 8 33 Straight line approximation enable 8 51 SUB1 operation indicator 1 5 SUB2 operation indicator 1 5 SUB3 operation indicator 1 5 SUB4 operation indicator 1 5 Temperature units 4 12 8 37 Temporary A T execution judgement deviation
242. f Modicon Inc Specifications PI MBUS 300 Rev u used by creating a program on Detailed specifications for the Modbus protocol are shown below the host computer As such the explanations in this section are from the perspective of the host computer For example Read Write refers to the host computer reading or writing to the EBAR ER E Communication specifications Transfer connection Multi point Communication method RS 485 2 wire half duplex Synchronization method Start stop Communication speed 9 6 k 19 2 k 38 4 k bit s Send code RTU Remote Terminal Unit Data length 8 bits Stop bit length Automatically set by vertical parity setting Error detection Vertical parity None Even Odd CRC 16 Cyclical Redundancy Check Flow control None Interface RS 485 Retry function None Initial settings are shaded E Transfer protocol Communication Modbus The host computer sends a command frame and the ESAR ER sends a response frame based on the content of the command frame One response frame is sent in response to one command frame Host computer E5AR ER The exchange between the command frame and response frame is explained below After a receiving a response from the controller have the host computer wait at least 5 ms before sending the next command 7 2 7 1 Communication method I When writing multiple sets of setting data in a row such as when writing to the variable area or performing a co
243. f data to be vvritten FINS mini response text Slave Function Write start Number of address mode address elements CRC 16 Ee ae eee 1 1 2 2 2 Client address The value from the command frame appears here This is the received function code In an error response frame H 80 is added to the received function code to indicate that it is an error Function mode response Example Received function code H 10 Function code in error response frame H 90 Number of elements Beginning Beginning address of write that was received address of write Number of Received number of elements elements This is a check code calculated from the client address to the data end For the calculation method see 7 2 Frames Command frame 6 Example of CRC 16 cal culation P 7 4 CRC 16 7 6 Writing to the variable area Response codes Function Error Cause code code 6 Number of elements and number of data items do not agree Variable data error Number of elements x 2 does not agree with byte count 6 Write data exceeds the setting range The operation state does not permit writing The settings for the vvrite data are not permit ted in the current operation mode 6 Write via communication is OFF disabled Attempted to write to setting data of setting Operation error area 1 from setting area 0 Attempted to write to protect setting data from other than protect level 6 Al is running 6 User calibration in
244. f the temperature close to the terminal plate can be measured the E5AR ER is operating normally Analog input Use a STV to supply the specified current or voltage and verify 10 4 10 4 Inferring causes from conditions abnormal control 10 4 Inferring causes from conditions abnormal control The PV does not rise Abnormal measured value Solve as explained in section 10 3 A load is not connected to the control output Connect a load terminal Incorrect load polarity or incorrect terminal Wire correctly connections The terminal connection screws are loose resulting Tighten the screws securely in a bad connection The heater power is not turned on Turn on the heater power The heater has a broken wire or has deteriorated Replace the heater The heater has a low heat capacity Change to a heater with a high heat capacity e If using two or more heaters replace any heaters that have broken wires Connections The overheating prevention device has activated Increase the temperature setting of the overheating prevention device to a value higher than the SP of the EBAR ER Direct action and reverse action settings are Set the correct settings incorrect The PID values are not suitable Run AT e Set suitable PID values Control has not been started Start control The output does not increase due to MV limits Change the output limits to suitable values The cooling fan is running Stop the cooling fan
245. figuration The channel switching sequence is as follows CH1 CH2 Highest channel set in Enabled channel setting Functions as a start key for the displayed scan 1 3 Input output Configuration and Main Functions I 1 3 Input output Configuration and Main Functions E input output configuration The input output configuration of the EBAR ER and internal setting item are shown in the following diagram Input type switch Input type Temperature units Scaling square root 1 square root 2 root 3 7 First order First order st order Per lag operation 1 lag operation 2 beration 3 ero j Control mode is controliwith remote SP Broken line approximation 1 Channel 1 4 Remote SP 6 Standard control Local SP Bank No 0 e Heating cooling control Local SP Alarm value PID set BNK2 1 R a m Standard control with remote SP ocal SP Alarm value PID set Local SP BNK1 1 fii BANK NO Heating cooling control with remote SP BNKO 1 Z Local SP Alarm value PID set SP mode MV change rate limiter Remote SP input error Potentiometer input error LLL ALM 1 ALM2 1 MV at PV error ALM1 1 usul 220 27 Run SEAR Stop Oe Auto RSER 1 i eR Auxiliary output assignments Standard type Control mode Standard control MVH 1 Control Transfer output assignments OUT3 OUT4 PV 1 Channel 1 PV LRSP 1 Chan
246. formation Related formation w 1 Sip 6 23 Section 6 Communication CompoWay F Response M Write mode 6 24 This command stops AT This command is used in setting area 0 If used in setting area 1 an operation error will result An operation error will also result in the following situations e Run Stop of the specified channel is set to Stop Auto Manual of the specified channel is set to Manual To use this command VVrite via communication must be enabled using the Write via communication operation command MRC SRC Response code Response codes The above indicates a normal end For the response codes see 6 7 Operation commands Communication CompoWay F P 6 11 Instruction Related MRC SRC code information Related information 07 Backup mode RAM write mode This command is used to select backup mode or RAM write mode The initial setting is backup mode This command can be used in both setting area O and setting area 1 To use this command Write via communication must be enabled using the Write via communication operation command Explanation When communication is used to write setting data of Backup mode Operation Adjustment Adjustment 2 Bank setting PID setting or Approximation setting level the data is also written to internal non volatile memory When communication is used to write setting data of Operation Adjustment Adjustment 2 Bank setti
247. formation was added to the table and accompanying notes 03 May 2005 The following changes were made Page 4 10 Information added on direct reverse operation alarms input shift SP ramp and PID Page 5 6 0 0000 corrected to 0 000 and 210 0 C corrected to 190 0 C in text and graph Pages 5 13 and 8 32 Setting range changed from 1096 to 11096 of setting range to 19999 to 99999 in table and related note removed Page 5 26 Condition B changed to At power on for standby sequence restart Page 8 37 Note added XI XII Contents Section 1 Section 2 Preparations ntroduction Precaution in using the product Precautions IV Precautions for Safe Use VI Precautions for Correct Use VII About this Manual VIII Overvievv 1 1 Main Features of the E5AR ER 1 2 R L bc d ss sial 1 2 Gohltolehbc a LUL UKOULD 1 2 OUND Sec totcccsiectcadsere 9000000000 1 3 t2 Part Names and Functions ce rei u A 1 4 1 4 HOW 10 aa ct 1 5 Explanation Ol ING xos ce aad aa al 1 6 1 3 Input output Configuration and Main Functions 1 7 nput output configur
248. formed and when it is set to any value except 0 00 advanced PID control is performed The initial setting is 10 00 In ON OFF control hysteresis is added when switching between ON and OFF to stabilize operation The width of hysteresis is called the Hysteresis The hysteresis is set for both heating and cooling control output using the Hysteresis heat and Hysteresis cool settings For standard control heating or cooling control only the Hysteresis heat setting is used regardless of whether heating or cooling is being performed x x Hysteresis heat OFF PV SP ON e For heating cooling control an area dead band can be set where the MV is 0 for both heating and cooling This means that 3 position control can be performed Dead band Hysteresis heat Hysteresis cool ON Heat side Cool side OFF PV A SP 4 9 Performing ON OFF control I M Settings To perform ON OFF control the SP Proportional band and Hysteresis heat settings must be configured Setting ON OFF control and an hysteresis heat of 2 00 FS ON OFF control settings Set Proportional band to 0 00 in PID setting level to select ON Proportional band P 0 00 OFF control 1 Press the the PID S 3 Press the the A eae a
249. g area 0 0200 to O27F 0300 to 037F 4 0000 to 0039 u D u i CC to D3 0200 to 0239 Setting data of setting area 1 0300 to 0339 4 Multiple setting data items can be written by sending a single command Up to 12 items can be written even if the addresses are not contiguous To specify the variable type or address see Appendix Setting list P A 6 Setting data of setting area 1 is written in setting area 1 An error will result if written in setting area 0 To use this command Write via communication must be enabled using the Write via communication operation command Response 6 9 Commands and responses Communication CompoWay F To store setting data of Operation Adiustment Adiustment 2 Bank setting P D setting or Approximation setting levels in non volatile memory select Backup with the Write mode command If not set to Backup the setting data will not remain in memory when the power is turned off For more information on the above levels see 4 1 Setting levels and key operation P 4 2 MRC SRC Response code Response codes The above indicates a normal end For the response codes see 6 6 Writing to the variable area P 6 10 E Monitor value setting data compound read store write Response Variable MRC SRC Variable type Read address Bit position type Read address Bit position Variable type Read address Bit position Variable dress Setting data
250. g data 0000 Operation adiustment protect 0001 Initial setting level protect 0002 Setting change protect 0003 PF key protect This command writes protect level setting data See 5 5 Protecting settings P 5 24 for information on protect level This command is used in setting area 0 An error will result if used in setting area 1 To use this command use the VVrite via communication operation command to enable Write via communication and then use the Move to protect level operation command to move to Protect level MRC SRC Response code Response codes The above indicates a normal end For the response codes see 6 6 Writing to the variable area P 6 10 E Setting data write Communication CompoWay F Variable Number of MRC SRC type Address Bit position elements Data T Te er Variable dress Setting data type Explanation 0000 to 007F 7 Setting data of setting area 0 C7 RUN level 0100 to O17F 2 Adiustment level C8 Co Adjustment level 2 IA An 0200 to 027F Bank setting level CA l CB PID setting level 0300 to 037F _ to 037F Approximation setting level CC 0000 to 0039 lesa KE Setting data of setting area 1 CD Input initial setting level CE 0100 to 0139 Control initial setting level CF Control initial setting 2 level Do 0200 to 0239 3 Alarm setting level D4 4 Display adiustment level Communications setting leve
251. ge high current power lines Do not run the wiring parallel to or in the same cable as power lines The influence of noise can also be reduced by using separate wiring ducts or shield lines Install surge absorbers or noise filters in devices near the product that generate noise in particular devices with an inductance component such as motors trans formers solenoids and magnetic coils If a noise filter is used for the power supply check the voltage and current and install the noise filter as close as possible to the product Separate the product as far as possible from devices generating strong high frequency noise e g high frequency vvelders and high frequency sevving machines or surges 6 Measurement Accuracy VVhen extending the thermocouple lead vvire be sure to use a compensating vvire that matches the thermocouple type When extending the lead wire of the platinum resistance thermometer be sure to use wires that have low resistance and make sure that the resistances of the three lead wires are the same If the measurement accuracy is low check whether the input shift is set correctly Waterproofing The degree of protection is as shown below Front panel Pee P20 Terminals IPO VII About this Manual How to use the manual General explana esau Oueniaw Explains the features part names tion of the EBAR ER and main functions of the E5AR ER Section 2 Preparations 27
252. gress 09 Bank setting level ID setting level Control initial setting level Control initial setting 2 level Alarm setting level Setting area 1 isplay adiustment level Operation stopped Input initial setting level 10 D 11 Communications setting level Special function setting level Expansion control setting level 1 Approximation setting level 10 11 12 13 7 8 7 4 Variable area Channel identifier For multi point input types that require settings for channels 2 to 4 specify 1 to 3 to identify the channels On single input types only 0 Channel 1 can be specified Channel identifier O ou Camel Channel 3 Channel 4 In area address This is a number that is assigned to each set of data in the variable area Addresses are assigned in order beginning from the first set For more information on addresses see the Modbus section in Appendix Setting list P A 6 Note that the addresses indicated in the variable area map are addresses of channel 1 For example to specify an address of channel 2 on a multi point input type add H 4000 to the address in the variable area map For channel 3 add H 8000 and for channel 4 add H C000 Number of The number of elements is expressed as a 2 byte hexadecimal value elements The specification range for the number of elements varies depending on the command See 7 9 Commands and responses Communi cation Modbus P 7 17 Fo
253. h remote SP cascade control or proportional control e This setting is used to specify operation when switching from remote SP mode to local SP mode e When remote SP tracking is enabled ON the value of the remote SP is transferred to the local SP e When remote SP tracking is disabled OFF the local SP is not affected by the remote SP Setting range Units Default value iF Disable Enable Related setting data Control mode Control initial setting level P 8 43 SP mode Adjustment level P 8 14 8 3 I Section 8 Setting data CH PID set automatic selection data Pudu PID set automatic selection hysteresis P This setting is used for automatic selection of the PID set CH e The PID set number to be used is automatically selected based on the value set in PID set automatic selection data The svvitching range is specified in the PID set automatic select range PID setting level e PID set automatic selection hysteresis is used to prevent chattering when the PID is changed m PID set automatic selection Pu Present value Pu Present l data du Deviation value pening PID set automatic selection 0 10 to 99 99 FS 0 50 hysteresis Related information 5 2 Control functions W PID sets P 5 12 6 Related setting data Bank PID Set No Bank setting level 8 27 PID Set No Automatic selection range upper limit PID setting level P 8 32
254. h would cause the alarm output to switch on However if With lower limit standby sequence is selected the alarm output will not switch on until the PV rises above the alarm set value and out of the alarm range and then falls below the alarm value a second time e The standby sequence is canceled when alarm output occurs and then restarts based on conditions specified in the Standby sequence reset setting Condition A Operation startup including power on or when the alarm value alarm upper and lower limit or input shift input value for input shift 1 input shift 1 input value for input shift 2 or input shift 2 is changed or when the SP is changed Condition B At power on e The Standby sequence reset setting is common to Alarms 1 to 4 The initial setting is 0 Condition A 5 6 Alarm adjustment functions I E Alarm latch Alarm 1 latch e The Alarm latch function is used to make an alarm output that has switched on remain on until the power is turned off regardless of the temperature The alarm latch state can be canceled by turning the power off or by a communication command e Alarm latch is set separately for each alarm in Alarm 1 4 latch The initial setting is 0 OFF E Close in alarm Open in alarm outnut 1 open in alarm e When close in alarm is selected an alarm output state is outp
255. hamerrsep 224 Chamel ramps Channel 1 present value PV Channel 1 MV heat side Channel 1 MV cool side M Channel 1 valve opening 300 5 annel 2 MV heat side Channel 2 MV cool side anne V V Neat side annel 4 MV heat side Control Transfer output assignment e Scaling of the output value can be performed using Transfer output upper limit and Transfer output lower limit The upper limit can be set to a smaller value than the lower limit to perform reverse scaling The scale can be enlarged using the width between the upper and lower limits specified in the setting data The following diagram shows an example of scaling the heating MV Transfer output Transfer output mA mA Reverse scaling Scaling enlargement 20 MV 0 4 100 Upper limit Lower limit Lower limit Upper limit value 0 value 100 value 10 value 80 5 8 Using transfer output i f the Input type Scaling display value 1 2 SP upper and lower limit or Temperature units setting is changed when SP or Ramp SP is selected the Transfer output upper limit and Transfer output lower limit will be respectively returned to the upper and lower limits of the setting range e f an input error occurs when the transfer output assignment is set to PV the transfer output changes to the upper limit and it changes to the lower limit in the case of reverse scaling SP limit
256. has been tentatively saved Press the A key Display 2 will show HE 5 Two seconds after the key is released or when the kel is pressed the tentatively saved calibration data is stored in non volatile memory If you do not wish to save the data in non volatile memory press the key instead of the A key e For a multi point input type connect as explained in step 2 and repeat steps 5 to 9 e f linear current output is selected continue with the procedure explained in 9 6 Output calibration P 9 12 10 Turn off the power to quit calibration mode 9 9 Section 9 User calibration 9 5 Resistance temperature input sensor calibration The procedure for calibrating a resistance temperature input sensor is explained in the follovving ESAR ESER nput power supply For the connection wiring use wiring of the same thickness 1 Connect the power supply 2 Connect a precision resistance box 6 dial in the following to the input terminal of the resistance temperature input sensor as shown at left 3 Turn on the power 4 Move to calibration level A 30 minute aging time begins Perform aging using this time as a guideline When 30 minutes elapses Display 2 will show O Note that you can proceed to the next stop before the display shows 5 Press the key to display the coun
257. he manipulated variable is greater than 0 M Explanation of the keys Level key Press to change setting levels Mode key Press to change the setting data vvithin a setting level Each time A is pressed the value of display 2 increases Hold down Up key the key to increase the value quickly The key is also used to scroll for vvard through the setting item Each time is pressed the value of display 2 decreases Hold down Dovvn key the key to decrease the value quickly The key is also used to scroll backvvard through the setting item Press to change to a protected level See 4 1 Configuration of Setting Protect key Levels and Key Operation page 4 2 for operation when the _ key and are pressed simultaneously 1 6 Pri Ai When pressed this function key activates the function set in PF1 set ting Example PF1 setting is A M A M is the default setting Functions as an Auto Manual key hereafter shown as the w key that is used to switch between auto mode and manual mode The mode changes when the key is pressed for at least one second the timing of key release does not matter Function key 1 Auto Manual key Functions as a channel key for multi channel control For 1 point input types the key acts as a function key that activates the function set in PF2 setting when pressed Functionkey2 When used as a channel key channel key Switches channels on models with a multi channel con
258. heat and then n press the 2 key to select 0 2 cuw MANU x E Adjustment To adjust the PID constants run AT For more information see 4 10 Determining the PID constants AT manual settings P 4 20 If the overshoot of temperature control disturbance response is too large after placing the vvafer the over shoot can be adjusted using the disturbance overshoot adiustment function For information on the disturbance overshoot adiustment function Refer to 5 2 Control functions P 5 8 3 4 3 2 Heating cooling control of a chemical reaction device I 3 2 Heating cooling control of a chemical reaction device In temperature control of chemical processes where heat is naturally generated by chemical reactions heating output and natural cooling are not a sufficient means of control and thus heating cooling control is used whereby heating output and cooling output are simultaneously manipulated Heating cooling control is also used for high precision control of constant temperature tanks where the temperature is held at a constant level and for extraction molding where the molding material generates heat Heating cooling control can also be applied to pH control using acids and alkali in liquid mixture systems and to pressure control where pressure reduction is carried out E Application When the E5AR is used to control a chemical reaction device the control mode is set to heating cooling control and instr
259. hinners Use commercially available alcohol 0 Bo VI Precautions for Correct Use 6 Service Life Use the product within the following temperature and humidity ranges Temperature 10 to 55 C no icing or condensation Humidity 25 to 8576 VVhen the product is installed inside a control panel make sure that the temperature around the product not the temperature around the control panel does not exceed 55 C The service life of this product and similar electronic devices is determined not only by the number of switching operations of relays but also by the service life of internal electronic components Component service life is affected by the ambient temperature the higher the temperature becomes the shorter the service life becomes and the lower the temperature becomes the longer the service life becomes Therefore the service life can be extended by lowering the temperature of the product Be sure to install the product according to the specified conditions Otherwise the heat generated by the product will cause the internal temperature to rise short ening the service life If necessary cool the product using fans or other means of air ventilation VVhen providing forced cooling hovvever be careful not to cool dovvn the terminals sections alone to avoid measurement errors Noise Countermeasures To prevent inductive noise separate the wiring for the product s terminal block and connector from high volta
260. ial setting level key Less than 1 second key Less than 1 second S level key Less than 1 second Control initial setting level Control stops key Less than 1 second Adiustment 2 L Rad level Control initial setting 2 level PID setting level gt Bank setting m gt level key Less 7 L key Less than 1 second than 1 second w key Less than 1 second key less than 1 second Alarm setting level ws key Less than 1 second key less than 1 second O1 T Output 1 type Pulse voltage output O Linear current output 1 O3 T Output 3 type Puise voltage output O Linear current output 1 CO1 T Linear current output 1 type 0 20mA 0 4 20mA 1 CO2 T Linear current output 2 type 0 20mA 0 4 20mA 1 CO3 T Linear current output 3 type 0 20mA 0 4 20mA 1 CO4 T Linear current output 4 type 0 20mA 0 4 20mA 1 Display adjustment ry p gt key Less than 1 second Approximation setting level Communication setting LL Control in progress C Control stop SL H SP upper limit 526 SL H SP lovver limit 2 MODE
261. icating with the E5AR ER is called the variable area The PV is read and various setting data are read and written using the variable area of the EBAR ER Operation commands and reading of machine attributes do not use the variable area Variable types Addresses Communication CompoWay F E5AR ER Operation Microprocessor instruction etc Variable area Read write A variable area is accessed by specifying the position of a variable within the variable area using the variable type and address Variable types in variable areas are as follows Variable 21 Description ype C4 Communication monitor ce Setting area 0 during operation Setting area 1 06 Display adjustmentievel during stop Da Each variable type has an address Addresses are 2 bytes long and written in hexadecimal Addresses are assigned according to units of access size Each address consists of a channel identifier and an in area address Address 2 bytes of oto ojo os a me As Ae As Ae As ao v x I Channel Address in area 00 to 7F identifier 0 3 128 variables 6 7 Section 6 Communication CompoWay F Number of elements 6 Set values Channel identifier For multi point input types that require settings for channels 2 to 4 specify 1 to 3 to identify the channels On single input types only 0 Channel 1 can be specified In area address This is
262. information 5 1 Input adjustment functions W Move average P 5 5 Reference 6 Related setting data Move average Enable Control initial setting 2 level P 8 50 Extraction of square root 1 Low cut point Extraction of square root 2 Low cut point Extraction of square root 3 Low cut point Extraction of square root 4 Low cut point Extraction of square root function is enabled e These settings are used to set the low cut point of each input Data following extraction of square root operations are shown below e This function is used for extraction of square root operations for fluid sensors Operation result Argument 1 input data Setting range Units Default value m 0 000 to 9 999 0000 Setting 6 Related information 5 1 Input adjustment functions W Extraction of square root opera tions P 5 7 6 Related setting data Extraction of square root Enable Control initial setting 2 level P 8 51 8 24 8 5 Adjustment 2 level t Adec w Pa a w u X na Analog parameter 1 Proportional control This sets the proportion used for proportional control Setting range Units Default value 1 1 999 to 9 999 1 000 Setting Related information Reference 3 5 Ratio control of dyeing machines P 3 18 6 Related setting data Control mode Control initial setting level P 8 43 8 25 I Section 8 Setting data 6 6 Bank setting level L a
263. ing control output Output Output 100 100 0 PV lt lt gt Heat side P A Heat side P x 0 8 Heat side P Heat side P x 1 5 SP SP 3 3 Position proportional control of a ceramic kiln 3 3 Position proportional control of a ceramic kiln The control method vvhereby a potentiometer is used to read the amount of opening of a valve and then open or close the valve by means of an attached control motor is called position proportional control or on Off servo control E Application To control a gas kiln using a position proportional control valve select the control valve control type and configure the instrumentation as shown in the following example Potentiometer SP ramp setting value SP ramp in units of time 4 20 mA transfer output Temperature sensor 7 E55A Recorder Burner When there is a concern that sudden temperature changes will damage or change the composition of an object such as a ceramic work the SP ramp function can be used to limit the rate of change of the SP using the SP ramp value and thereby cause the temperature to change at a constant rate 3 9 I Section 3 Typical Control Examples E Wiring M Settings Input initial setting level 3 10 Connect the input to terminal IN1 according to the input type connect the open
264. ing data frequently select RAM write mode Special function setting level 5 35 l Section 5 Functions and Operations ce e S oS lt b ey O LL 5 36 Section 6 Communication CompoWay F 6 1 Communication methodq 6 2 6 2 Frames Communication CompovVVay F 6 4 F N mini TE ao s n a 6 6 6 4 Variable areas 6 7 6 5 Reading the variable area 6 9 6 6 Writing to the variable area 6 10 6 7 Operation commands Communication CompoWay F 6 11 68 DO U A 6 13 6 9 Commands and responses Communication CompovVVay F 6 14 6 10 Programexample un uu a sib 6 32 ok Bs S o 28 EE 68 o Section 6 Communication CompoWay F 6 1 Communication method E CompoWay F communication protocol CompoWay F is OMRON s unified protocol for general purpose serial communication Featuring a unified frame format and commands that are compliant with FINS which has a record of successful use with OMRON programmable controllers CompoWay F makes communi The communication function is used by creating a program on the host computer As such the explanations in this section are from th
265. ing output type setting E53 ARQC E5AR A4WW 500 1 1 OUT4 Input2 K iL i Voltage output Input 4 J 12V 21mA l iTV PT OUT3 Voltage output 12 V 757 21 mA or Input 1 K l Current output Input 3 J i i i PT E5AR PRQ43DF FLK E5AR PA4F 500 24 VAC DC 100 240 VAC CEEE F Input power supply depends on the model 100 to 240 VAC or 24 VAC DC no polarity E53 ARQC ours Voltage output 3 12V 40 mA 7 OUT3 4 Voltage output 12V 40 mAor TO Current output 6 4 20 mA DC 500 Q max G 0 20 mA DC 500 Q max Switch using output type setting E53 ARRR3 V Current Voltage Resistance thermometer Thermocouple J K E5AR PA4F 500 Auxiliary outputs B Relay outputs COM O su 3 suB2 4 COM any SUB3 511 os SUB4 EV3 El B EV5 EV6 COM E5AR PA4F 500 Potentiometer V Current Voltage o NIO EIG 2 un nu T O0 TC Thermocouple Resistance thermometer 2 7 Section 2 Preparations E ESER E5ER Q4B E5ER C4B E53 ARR4 Auxiliary outputs E5ER AB 500 24 VAC DC 100 240 VAC E5ER AB 500 E53 ARR4 24 VAC DC 100 240 VAC Auxiliary outputs te Relay outputs Pon ms mu Relay ou
266. input value 1 is set in Scaling display value 1 and the dis value for Scaling input value 2 is set in Scaling display value 2 e Decimal point position is used to specify the decimal point pos of setting data SP etc for which the units are EU play ition Scaling settings for inputs 2 to 4 of multi point input types are set in channels 2 to 4 Press the key to change to the desired analog input channel and then set the scaling Setting data Setting range Units Scaling input value 1 77 mt i input upper limit l 19999 to Scaling display value 1 Scaling upper limit 1 Scaling input value 2 input wel 7 input upper limit Scaling lower limit 1 to 99999 The units depend on the input type settings 4 20 100 Scaling display value 2 Related setting data Input type Input initial setting level P 8 36 Default value 8 37 I Section 8 Setting data The operation of EBAR ER control functions and alarms is based on the input values If a value greater than zz Scaling input value 2 is set for LAP Scaling input value 1 operation vvill vvork in the opposite direction of the display values The user must confirm compatibility with devices For details refer to 4 4 Setting the input type P 4 8 Remote SP upper limit Remote SP lower limit A Setting 8 38 4 ya 1 hm i 5 Control vvith remote SP
267. int input type e Display scan only applies to channels that are enabled using Number of enabled channels e Display scan can be started automatically after the power is turned on or by pressing the key To have display scan start automatically after the power is turned on set Start display scan after power on to ON e The display scan period is set with Display scan period When the period is set to 0 display scan is disabled R Setting data Setting data Setting period F Default value e Display scan period 7 Pay p 0 Disable display scan Setting Start display scan Disable after power on n ENB 8 62 Z 8 14 Communication setting level 1 5 8 14 Communication setting level 2 5 This level contains initial settings for communication such as protocol selection communication unit No and communication speed Power on Operation level Adiustment Adjustment 2 gt Bank setting gt PID setting gt 77 key Less level key Less level L haz key Less level key Less level key Less level LEED than 1 second than 1 second than 1 second than 1 second than 1 second key Less than 1 second mmm m m m m im m m m om im m m m om im m m om im m m om om m im m om im im m im om im im m m m im eee im im im m om im im im m im im om
268. ion P 7 4 Data written Operation commands for the E5AR ER are shown in the following Operation Related information Description code Upper Byte Lovver Byte i l H O OFF Disabled Run Stop HO to 3 F 2 H O Run H 1 Stop Bank change H O to 3 F 2 H O to 7 Bank 0 to 7 H 0 Currently selected 1 Set Ae H 0 Backup mode H 1 Manual mode initialize settings 1 Operates for all channels 2 Specify for each channel 0 CH1 1 CH2 2 CH3 3 CH4 F All channels There is no response to a software reset When all channels are specified only enabled channels will respond and processing will begin from Channel 1 If an error is detected on any one channel an Operation error will result If all channels end normally Normal end results 7 7 Operation commands Communication Modbus Response frame Slave Function Write start address mode address Write data CRC 16 T lsuml 1 1 1 2 bytes Client address The value from the command frame appears here This is the received function code In an error response frame H 80 is added to the received function code to indicate that it is an error Function code response Example Received function code H 06 Function code in error response frame H 86 Beginning Beginning address of vvrite that vvas received address of vvrite VVritten data Received operation command data This is a check code calculated from the client address CRC
269. ion Modbus Slave Function Write start Instruction Related address mode address code information CRC 16 1 1 2 2 2 bytes Related OTO en 00 Currently selected PID Set No k Sa EH 01 to 08 Specifies PID Set No 1 to 8 10 Currently selected PID Set No 2 11 to 18 Specifies PID Set No 1 to 8 i 20 Currently selected PID Set No 1007 3 21 to 28 Specities PID Set No 1 to 8 30 Currently selected PID Set No 31 to 38 Specifies PID Set No 1 to 8 H 30 to 38 1 2 3 4 F0 Currently selected PID Set No F1 to F8 Specifies PID Set No 1 to 8 This command runs AT On the E5AR ER the PID Set No must be specified when running AT To specify the currently selected PID Set No the PID set currently used for operation set the lower byte of the related information to O This command is used in setting area O f used in setting area 1 an operation error will result An operation error will also result in the following situations e Run Stop of the specified channel is set to Stop e Auto Manual of the specified channel is set to Manual To use this command Write via communication must be enabled using the Write via communication operation command Slave Function Write start Instruction Related address mode address code information CRC 16 1 2 1 2 2 bytes The above indicates a normal end For information on error responses see 7 7 Operation commands Communication Modbus P
270. ions The connected load exceeds the output rating Do not exceed the rating e Repair in the event of a failure A load power supply is not connected to a transistor Use a power supply suitable for the output rating output and load The polarity of the load power supply connected to Wire correctly the transistor output is incorrect Operation is stopped after the power is turned on Send the control start run command after turning on the power Set operation to continue at power on When bank No specification is by event input input 1 Hold the contact ON or OFF during specification ON or OFF is not held When bank No specification is by event input The latest specification takes priority regardless of specification by communication was attempted the bank No specification method The alarm mode is set to 0 No alarm Set the correct alarm mode Alarm vvith vvait sequence is specified Specify an alarm vvithout a vvait sequence Deviation alarm is mistakenly set for absolute value 1 Set the correct alarm mode alarm or vice versa o c o O o o 2 10 7 l Section 10 Troubleshooting 10 6 Inferring causes from conditions communication problems Cannot communicate No response The communications speed differs from the host Make sure that the communications speeds are system the same The communication conditions are different from Make sure that the communica
271. ions W PID sets 5 12 Related setting data PID proportional band PID Integral time PID derivative time PID setting level P 8 31 PID Automatic selection range upper limit PID setting level P 8 32 PID set automatic selection data Expansion control setting level P 8 74 8 27 I Section 8 Setting data CH Bank alarm 1 Bank alarm 2 Bank alarm 3 Bank alarm 4 0 to 7 x 9 Ya 4 ye Fer r ea Ki y aS ya t Alarm function is enabled Use this setting to store alarm values for alarms 1 to 4 in each bank 8 28 7 n Setting e Set the values of alarms 1 to 4 in each of banks 0 to 7 Setting range Units Default value 19999 to 99999 This setting can be used when the alarm type is other than none Upper and lower limit alarm Upper and lower limit range alarm or Upper and lower limit alarm with standby sequence 6 Related setting data Alarm type Alarm setting level P 8 54 Alarm latch Alarm setting level P 8 55 Alarm hysteresis Alarm setting level P 8 56 Standby sequence restart Alarm setting level P 8 57 Auxiliary output non exciting Alarm setting level P 8 58 CH Bank alarm upper limit 1 Bank alarm upper limit 2 Bank alarm upper limit 3 Bank
272. is now possible in both the cascade closed and cascade open states 3 13 I Section 3 Typical Control Examples M Wiring Thermocouple K close to the heater is connected to IN2 thermo couple K in the oven is connected to IN1 and a power adjuster is connected to OUT1 When using the E5AR QQ43DW FLK wire as shown below Sensor 2 Heater Sensor 1 5 0 m 6 6 m Power adjuster 4 20mA M Settings Inputs 1 and 2 are set to thermocouple K and the control mode is set to cascade standard control The related setting data and settings are as follows Input 1 type switch TC PT initial setting Input 2 type switch TC PT initial setting Input 1 input type 2 K 200 0 to 1300 0 C initial setting Input 2 input type 2 K 200 0 to 1300 0 C initial setting Output type of output 1 1 Linear current output Output type of linear current output 1 1 4 to 20 mA initial setting Control mode 5 Cascade standard control SP 180 0 The control mode and SP are set in the following and the initial settings are used for all other parameters Input initial setting level 4 1 Turn on the power and then hold down the _ key for at least 3 seconds to move from RUN level to Input initial setting level 2 Press the _ key less than 1 second to move from Input initial setting level to Control initial setting leve
273. key to change the value to 10 0 2 4 26 4 12 Starting and stopping control i 4 12 Starting and stopping control E Control run Control stop To start control set Run Stop to Run To stop control set Run Stop to Stop MV at stop If you wish to output during stop in standard control set an MV of 5 0 to 105 0 in MV at stop The initial setting is 0 076 In heating cooling control set to 105 0 to 105 096 e In position proportional control Open Closed or Hold state can be selected in MV at stop In the Open state only the open output is ON in the Closed state only the closed output is ON and in the Hold state both open and closed outputs are OFF The initial setting is Hold 6 Operation at power gt This selects the operation state when the power of the E5AR ER is ON turned on The following 3 selections are available Resumes the state of the system before the povver Continue vvas turned off Control is stopped when the power is turned on Enters manual mode when the power is turned on e Setting values for operation at power ON and additional items are shovvn belovv Operation after Additional items povver ON Continue Run Stop Hold Auto Manual Hold MV From initial MV in auto mode Hold in manual mode Stop Run Stop Stop Auto Manual Hold MV Hold if in manual mode before povver off MV at
274. l hu w al Sy X d KJ yu cx wa a a e gt 2 Press the IA key to switch an Manual The MANU indicator lights up and the mode changes to manual ua 1 To resume control follow the same procedure to switch back to Alita Auto The MANU indicator goes off and the mode changes to auto Svvitching betvveen auto and manual is also possible by event input or communication For event input svvitching see 5 7 Using event input P 5 29 For communication svvitching see 5 9 Using com munication functions P 5 34 4 30 4 14 Changing channels I 4 14 Changing channels E Changing channels e On multi point input type the channel number increases by 1 each Present value PV SP Display 2 B gt CH SV ur al al MV o El H gt lt lt OUT1 OUT2 OUT3 OUT4 STOP RSP PF1 C D gt co NA S gt L J C J C J 3 R CEC A
275. l 4 5 Selecting the temperature units When the input type is set to temperature input input from a thermocouple or a platinum resistance temperature input sensor C or F can be selected for the temperature units When using a multi point input type set the temperature units separately for each input 2 to 4 as appro priate for the number of inputs Selecting C wy f 1 Hold the _ key down for at least 3 seconds to move from RUN level to Input initial setting level ir c rx 2 Press the tel key to select idu Input 1 Temperature units Select C F with the AINM key r C F F 3 Hold the 1 key down for at least 1 second to return to RUN level re udi lt 4 6 Selecting the control mode l 4 6 Selecting the control mode The control mode allows various types of control to performed Standard control Heating cooling control The control mode is initially set to standard control Performs standard heating or cooling control The Direct reverse operation setting is used to select heating reverse action or cooling direct action When using PID control the Proportional band P Integral time 1 and Derivative time D settings m
276. l a 2 Output 1 output type will appear Press the key to set to 1 Linear current output Output 1 Output type 3 4 Cascade control of reflovv ovens I 2 Z p a mn r a L I Control mode Z l 2 ane ad cx Ex j gt w y c Present value PV SP MV 2 E Adjustment RUN level 4 m l al ms be heme hem P a ju wa 4 4 yur se Dv 621 v Present value PV SP MV Present value PV SP MV 4 1 ir Press the kel key repeatedly to select AasdE to select 5 Cascade standard control Control mode Press the Al Hold down the _ at least 1 second to return to RUN level PV SP MV will appear Press the Al key to set the SP to 180 0 Run AT in the secondary loop to obtain suitable PID values VVhen the primary loop achieves stable control close to the SP set the secondary local SP to the
277. l D2 0300 to 0339 4 9 zm Special function setting level D3 I I Expansion control setting level The above setting data is written The number of elements can be set from 2 to 24 to write setting data of contiguous addresses Section 6 Communication CompoWay F Response To specify an address see Appendix Setting list P A 6 Setting data of setting area 1 can be written in setting area 1 An error vvill result if vvritten in setting area 0 To use this command Write via communication must be enabled using the Write via communication operation command To store setting data of Operation Adjustment Adjustment 2 Bank setting PID setting or Approximation setting levels in non volatile memory select Backup with the Write mode command If not set to Backup the setting data will not remain in memory when the power is turned off For more information on the above levels see 4 1 Setting levels and key operation P 4 2 MRC SRC Response code Response codes The above indicates a normal end For the response codes see 6 6 Writing to the variable area P 6 10 M Setting data compound write Communication CompoWay F 6 18 MRC SRC Variable type Address Bit position Data w lr yek Variable type Address Bit position Data m ee Variable Address Setting data type Explanation 0000 to 007F 0100 to O17F C5 to CB 0100 to O17F 2 Setting data of settin
278. l values of the SP ramp of the E5AR ER can be set separately 3 Marks used to indicate Function Setting Monitor and Reference in Setting Data in Section 8 are explained in Section 8 Abbreviations Abbreviations used in the setting data illustrations and text are as follows Abbreviation Meaning Auto tuning A T Unit of industrial quantity Channel Data after scaling is shown in industrial units such as C m and g and EU is used to indicate the minimum increment of such a quantity For example the minimum increment of 50 02 m is 0 01 m and thus 1 EU would be equal to 0 01 m Notation used for settings Letters numbers and abbreviations in settings that appear in the E5AR ER display are as follows R b t d E F L H 2 Pt fa A B c D E F G H L J KILI IM 1 signif icant digit Revision History The revision code of this manual is given at the end of the catalog number at the bottom left of the back cover The follovving table outlines the changes made to the manual during each revision Page numbers refer to the previous version Cat No Z182 E1 03 May 2003 Original production 02 February 2004 1 The following changes were made Other changes were also made to improve general quality 2 Page A 30 DOTC Disturbance time constant under Adjustment level corrected to 0 01 99 997 Introduction Descriptions mainly on precautionary information upd
279. larm value 1 mr 19999 99999 7 AL1H Bank 7 Alarm upper limit 1 19999 99999 7 AL1L Bank 7 Alarm lower limit 1 19999 99999 7 AL4L Bank 7 Alarm lower limit 4 19999 99999 A lkey 1 second or more Control starts _ less than 1 second Bank setting level PID setting level Alarm setting level Display adiustment level __ less than 1 second gt PID Setting Level CH Display PID selection Ft a PID1 PID2 PID3 y Proportional band 0 00 999 99 standard 1 8 1 PID8 Integral time 0 0 3999 9 standard position proportional closed control 2 z 1 18 D PID8 144 Derivative time 1514 10 0 3999 9 MV upper limit MV lovver limit 0 1 105 0 8 OL L PID8 MV lovver limit 5 0 MV lower limit MV upper limit 0 1 temperature of sensor setting range 3 x1 Position proportional type 0 01 999 99 2 Position proportional floating control type 0 1 3999 9 3 Analog type 10 to 110 of scaling display range with a maximum of 19999 to 99999 Communication setting level S
280. lated CRC value is H 1234 this is appended as follows to the command frame Slave Function address mode Data CRC 16 I m Ur H34 H12 1 1 2 bytes s xi CRC 16 calculation range M Response frame 6 Normal response frame Slave Function address mode Data CRC 16 1 fo 2 bytes CRC 16 calculation range Error response frame Slave Function Error address mode code CRC 16 1 1 bi 2 bytes CRC 16 calculation range The number that was specified in the command frame Client address 1 appears here This is the unit number of the responding E5AR ER The function code that was received In an error response frame H 80 is added to the value Function code to indicate that this is an error response Example Received function code H 03 Function code in error response frame H 83 End code that indicates the error Cyclical Redundancy Check This is a check code calcu CRC 16 lated from the client address to the end of the data Two bytes in hexadecimal 7 5 Section 7 Communication Modbus Error codes Communication Modbus Error Description detection H 01 Received an unused function code on code error out of range The number of elements does not agree with the number of data items Number of elements x 2 does not agree with the byte count Variable data error The response length exceeds the communication buffer size 3 priority The operation code or related information in an oper
281. lated gain lt 2 AT hysteresis V 4 w 4 y Limit cycle MV amplitude yum v4 mn mr Temporary A T execution judgement deviation lt These settings are normally used at the default values e AT calculated gain specifies the gain used when PID values are calculated during AT A smaller gain provides greater adaptability while a larger gain provides greater stability e AT hysteresis is used to set the value of hysteresis for ON OFF switching during the limit cycle while AT is being run e Limit cycle MV amplitude is used to set the MV amplitude during the limit cycle while AT is being run e This is effective when P z 0 00 in standard control or when closed is selected in proportional control e Temporary AT execution judgement deviation is used to judge if temporary AT is excute or not for running temporary AT When AT is excuted while the deviation is greater than the set value temporary AT runs 3 AT calculated gain 0 1 to 10 0 0 11 Limit eycle MV amplitude 5 0 to 50 0 0 0 to 100 0 FS 10 0 judgement deviation 8 78 8 16 Expansion control setting level L Eu Related information 4 10 Determining the PID constants AT manual settings P 4 20 Reference Related setting data AT Execute Cancel Adjustment level 8 13 CH Bumpless at RUN
282. le MV an amplitude 100 AT start AT end 4 21 I Section 4 Settings Required for Basic Control E Manual settings To set the PID constants manually set values for the Proportional band P Integral time 1 and Derivative time D f you already know the control characteristics directly set the PID constants and adjust control The PID constants are set in Proportional band P Integral time 1 and Derivative time D e 1 Integral time and D Derivative time can be set to O to select propor tional action In the initial settings the manual reset value is set to 50 0 so that the proportional band is centered on the SP When P Proportional band is changed Slovv rise and a longer rectifi cation time but no over shoot VVhen P is increased Overshoot and hunting occur but attains the set value quickly and stabilizes When P is decreased Longer time to attain the SP The rectification time is longer but there is less hunt ing overshoot and under shoot When P is increased Overshoot and undershoot When P is occur decreased Hunting occurs Quick rise Less overshoot and under VVhen P is lt shoot rectification time but increased fine hunting occurs at own changes Overshoot and undershoot increase and more time is needed to return to the SP When P is decreased 4 22 4 11 Using auxiliary output I 4 11 Using auxiliary outpu
283. led OFE ON Extraction of square root 4 enabled OFF ON SCL2 Straight line approximation 2 enabled OFF ON Broken line approximation 1 enabled OFF ON CALB RL 3 a Motor calibration ransfer output 3 lower limit OFF ON MOT Travel time 8 45 l Section 8 Setting data Control Transfer output 1 allocation qazi Control Transfer output 3 allocation g zi Control Transfer output 2 allocation 2 1 41 bos b ot yu ya Ya Control Transfer output 4 allocation ye e Use this setting to assign output content to outputs Setting range a O Disable 0 Setting CH1 control output heating or open For control output 1 CH1 control output cooling or close For control output 2 CH1 SP 3 CH1 ramp SP 4 CH1 PV 5 CH1 control output heating or open For transfer output 6 CH1 control output cooling or close For transfer output 7 CH1 valve opening 8 CH2 control output heating For control output 9 CH2 control output cooling For control output 10 CH2 SP 11 CH2 ramp SP 12 CH2 PV 13 CH2 control output heating For transfer output 14 CH2 control output cooling For transfer output 15 Similarly Default value CH3 17 to 23 CH4 25 to 31 I The default value is set according to
284. level P 8 55 Alarm hysteresis Alarm setting level P 8 56 Standby sequence restart Alarm setting level P 8 57 8 13 Display adjustment level 1 4 8 13 Display adjustment level 1 4 This level contains settings for adiustment of the display contents including selection of the PV SP display screen bar graph display item display refresh period monitor item level setting and display scan Povver on Adjustment 2 om mm mm mim m mmm im m m m im m m m m om im m m om im im m om om m im m om im im m im om im m m m im m im om im im im im im om im im im m im m im om im m im m m im m im im m im im im m om im im im ou m im um om key 1 second level Adjustment level key Less L Ady than 1 second key Less than 1 second key 3 seconds key Less than 1 second key less than 1 Bank setting level second key Less than 1 second PID setting level p gt key Less than 1 second Approximation setting level Control initial setting Alarm setting level HE Display adiustment level 227 Input initial setting level Control initial setting level 2 level key Less than 1 second key Less than 1 secon
285. lling en o SAAD ua 5 24 PrO Ceca access estate EE 5 24 Alarm adjustment functions 5 26 Alarm aa a ada bd 5 26 Standby seguente A oll 5 26 Alah 506067 0000600000 0 5 27 Close in alarm Open in alarm 5 27 USING event Duty ai 5 29 EVENT INDUT AIIOCATION ea DAD 5 29 USNO ARS ORDULAR k 2 22 u db 3 DL senses 5 32 Transter Sutput settings uuu Se wie a Da 5 32 Using communication functions 5 34 Setting communication parameters 5 34 Write via communication 5 35 Section6 Communication CompoWay F 6 1 COMMUNICATION MEtNO 2 xu 22 2 mn 2 ena usos 6 2 CompoWay F communication protocol 6 2 Communication specifications 6 2 Transfer protocol Communication CompoWay F 6 2 Frames Communication CompoWay P 6 4 Command Trame uyu u uu yana aa satu 6 4 FOSDORS faner nasua a a lala 6 5 Fis minktext zu 6 6 VAN ADI arcas uuu u l u as 00 000
286. lly registered as calibration data only when all items have been calibrated to new values So be sure to temporarily register all items when you calibrate the EBAR ER When calibration data is registered it is registered regardless of whether or not the EB5AR ER has been calibrated by the user Prepare separate measuring devices and equipment for calibration For details on how to handle measuring devices and equipment refer to the respective instruction manuals 9 4 9 3 Thermocouple input calibration 9 3 Thermocouple input calibration e Thermocouples are calibrated in two groups according to thermocouple type Group 1 input types 2 4 7 8 10 14 and Group 2 input types 3 5 6 9 11 12 13 Do not cover the bottom of the thermocouple during calibration Also do not touch the input terminal or compensation wire Preparations E5AR E5ER Input power supply Cold junction compensator 0 C 32 F Compensating wire e For the cold junction compensator use a compensator for calibration of internal thermocouples and set to 0 C The internal thermocouple should be disabled tip open e STV in the diagram indicates a DC reference current voltage generator Prepare a compensation wire appropriate for the selected thermo couple For thermocouples R S E B and W a cold junction compensator and compensation wire for thermocouple K can be used junction compensator touched during thermocouple cali
287. losed 3 4 Cascade control of reflovv ovens I 9 Press the key and then press the L l repeatedly to select At AT AT Execute Cancel Execute Cancel of the primary loop ch 1 Press the A key to change the set value to Z and run primary AT During AT the automatically selected PID Set No is displayed and display 1 blinks When AT finishes display 2 changes to 622 and display 1 RE stops blinking w cx This completes PID adjustment for the primary and secondary loops Operation when a primary loop input error occurs When an input error occurs in the primary loop MV at error is output for the primary ch 1 MV and the secondary loop continues control using a remote SP equivalent to the MV at error of the primary loop For this reason be sure to set MV at error for the primary loop Section 3 Typical Control Examples 3 5 Ratio control of dyeing machines Ratio control is used to maintain a constant proportional relationship between two or more variables E Application 3 18 This machine mixes a constant proportion of flowing sand and dye in order to dye the sand a uniform color Ratio control that maintains a constant weight ratio between sand and dye Dye Sand Color liquid Flow meter I k u EEA 7 Sand weight meter ee ee a ay x r
288. lowing is displayed depending on the Display screen selection setting 1 Display 1 Display 2 2 Display 2 Display 3 3 Display 1 only 4 Display 2 only A 30 Level I BANK Bank No n 0 7 AT AT execute cancel CMWT Write via communication SPMD SP mode LSP RSP Cooling coefficient C DB Dead band 199 99 999 99 Manual reset value 0 0 100 0 Hysteresis heating 0 01 99 99 CHYS Hysteresis cooling 0 01 99 99 Control period heating 0 2 99 0 DB Position proportional dead band Open close hysteresis 0 1 20 0 SPRU SP ramp time unit EU sec S EU min M EU hour H CHa 2777 00 SPRH SP ramp rise value 0 99999 0 Disable SP ramp function SPRL SP ramp fall value 0 99999 0 Disable SP ramp function MV S MV at stop 5 0 105 0 standard type 1 MV E MV at PV error ii 1 5 0 105 0 standard type 1 ORL MV change rate limit heating 0 0 100 0 CORL MV change rate limit cooling 0 00 100 0 ISI 1 Input value 1 for input correction 19999 99999 ISS 1 Input correction 1 199 99 999 99 151 2 Input value 2 for input correction 19999 99999 ISS 2 Input correction 2 199 99 999 99 DOGN Disturbance gain 1 00 1 00 DOTC Disturbance time constant 0 01 99 99 DO
289. ls control is stopped input initial settings control initial setting control initial settings 2 alarm settings display adjustment communication settings advanced function settings expansion control settings and calibration Note that control will stop on all channels if you move to any of these levels Display 3 shows the current level The characters and the corre sponding levels are as follows Protect level RUN level Aids Adjustment level thn Banksetingivet SSS PiDsettingievel SSS LEFT Approximation setting level Technica tan Monitoritemievel 6 1 mputnital settinglevel tf Control nital seting level 2 Goniri intial seting2 esi 13 Alamsetingiv 6 1 Display adjusimentievel 0 15 Communications setting sssi Special function setting level Expansion control seting lev EER Cain 85 May appear depending on the selected setting data 4 3 I Section 4 Settings Required for Basic Control 4 2 Set values The values selected for each setting are called set values There are two types of set values numbers and characters Set values are displayed and changed as follovvs Changing a numeric set value 1 Press the Al key continuously to increase the set value When the upper limit of the setting is reached the set value will blink and cannot be further increased
290. lt communi cation gt are insulated from each other with functional insulation lt Input event input voltage output current output communication lt relay output gt lt transistor output gt are insulated from each other with basic insulation If reinforced insulation is required input event input voltage output current output and communication terminals must be connected to a device that have no exposed chargeable parts and whose basic insulation is suitable for the applicable maximum voltage of connected parts Power supply Event input voltage output current output Paeinforced insulation Relay output Basic insulation Transistor output Functional insulation Section 3 Typical Control Examples 3 1 Standard control o 3 2 Meating cooling control of a chemical reaction device 3 5 8 S 3 3 Position proportional control of a ceramic kiln 3 9 g 3 4 Cascade control of reflow ovens 3 13 3 5 Ratio control of dyeing machines 3 18 I Section 3 Typical Control Examples 3 1 Standard control The following is an example of basic single loop control whereby temperature control of a heater plate for semiconductors is carried out example of combined sensor and heater E Application VVhen controlling a heater plater for semiconductor vvafers vvith the E5AR the control mode is set to s
291. lty with the controller use the following checklist to solve the problem Check the display Check switches and wiring Check setting data Infer from conditions Check the operating state of the E5AR ER as indicated by the display Error messages and indicators are explained in 10 2 Error messages P 10 3 If an error message appears refer to this section to solve the problem Check switch settings and wiring 6 Power supply s the power turned on e Are the terminal voltages within the permitted ranges 6 Input type switch s the switch set to the correct setting for the sensor you are using Wiring e Are the terminal connections correct Are the polarities correct e Are any wires loose e Are any wires or cables broken or not making contact 6 Communication conditions Do the communication conditions match those of the host system If you are unable to identify the problem from the above or cannot solve the problem investigate in more detail e Are the setting data correct e Check for restrictions on the function you are using See if the cause of the problem lies in your settings If you were not able to identify the cause of the problem by checking the above refer to the tables in 10 2 Error messages P 10 3 and following 10 2 Error messages 10 2 Error messages VVhen an error occurs Displays 1 and 2 shovv error messages Refer to the following table to check the meaning
292. max V PT 0 20 mA DC 500 Q max Current Voltage Thermocouple Switch using output type setting Resistance thermometer J Section 2 Preparations E5ER QT3DW FLK 2 loop Control E5ER CT3SDW FLK 2 loop Control E5ER AW 500 E53 ARB4 ESER AVV 500 E53 ARB4 24 VACIDC 1100240 VAC uma 24VAC DO 100 240 VAC A B m gt vent inputs ae ars vent inputs 1106 L 2 Eva m r Input power supply depends Input power ah depends PPPE 1 on the model on the model 3 100 to 240 VAC Eve 100 to 240 VAC a or 24 VAC DC polarit or 24 VAC DC no polarit no polarity EV5 no polarity EV5 ES3 ARQO3 EV6 Hao E53 ARCC3 2 EV6 B XD asses 2000 B COM A 2 A 2 IH aa OUT2 H Voltage output 3 Current output B 27 i 12V 40 mA 4 20 mA DC 500 Q max r r OUTI HA 0 20 mA DC 500 0 max 4 3 if Voltage output F Switch using output z HHH 12V 40 mA or ype setting Tol 1 4 H Current oput Current output 5 HE 4 20 mA DC 500 max 4 20 mA DC 500 Q ri 0 20 mA DC 500 0 max m max 6 Z il Switch using output type setting 0 20 mA 500 Q max DP h z Svvitch using output type setting CIDIE la gt N r h 53 2 53 2 E5ER AW 500 Auxiliary outputs Auxiliary outputs 57 Tra
293. mber If PV SP MV is displayed Display 3 becomes a monitor that shovvs the MV e In cases other than the above the display goes off E Other display and key adjustment functions Other display and key adiustment functions are available These functions are explained in Section 8 Setting data e PV SP display screen selection Display adjustment level e Bar graph display item E5AR only Display adjustment level e Display auto reset Display adjustment level Display refresh period Display adjustment level Monitor item level setting Display adjustment level e Display digits after PV decimal point Initial setting level 5 23 I Section 5 Functions and Operations 5 5 Protecting settings M Protect Operation adjustment protect RUN adjustment protect Initial setting protect Initial setting protect 5 24 The protect function is used to restrict access to settings in order to prevent accidental changes to the settings Protect functions include Operation adjustment protect Initial setting protect Setting change protect and PF key protect This function restricts key operation in Operation Adjustment Adjustment 2 Bank setting PID setting Approximation setting and Monitor item levels Bank setting PID setting Approximation s
294. mber of enabled channels settings Povver on Operation level gt key Less key 1 second or more key 3 seconds or more m m m m mom m m m m than 1 second w Y u 1 second or more Advanced function setting level Oe L than 1 second Adiustment level MEEN Input initial setting 1 51 Control initial setting gt 55 ie key Less Ed 6 Less than 1 second ES key Less key less than 1 second than 1 second than 1 second key less than 1 second Adjustment 2 gt Bank setting gt PID setting level P 222 fF sar teyt ss level p 222 than 1 second than 1 second than 1 second than 1 second than 1 second Control initial setting gt Alarm setting gt Display adjustment 2level 17 2 level UT 5 level VT H L key Less gt than 1 second Approximation setting L 20 key Less level Communication setting eS level C Control in progress C Control stop To move to Advanced function setting level set Initial setting level protect in Protect level to 0 and then enter the password 169 in Move to Advanced function setting level Input initial setting level Advanced function
295. me Explanation Variable type Specify a variable type First address of write Specify the address for the beginning of the write Not used on the Specify 00 Specifies the number of variables to be written Number of elements max of 25 H 19 Not needed for a compound MRC SRC Specifles the FINS mini monitor value setting data write command write Write data Enter data to be written FINS mini response text Response code MRC SRC MRES SRES Data name Explanation MRC SRC FINS mini command text appears here Response code Result of execution of the command Response codes code Command length The command is too short 1002 too short 1101 Area type error Incorrect variable type Number of ele The specified number of elements does ments Data num not agree with the actual number of data ber do not agree elements i i Bit position specification other than 00 1100 Parameter error l Written data was outside of setting range Write via communication is disabled Write to setting area 1 was attempted from setting area 0 Write to setting data of protect level was 1003 2203 Operation error attempted from other than protect level AT is running Calibration level in progress Unit error unit change display unit error internal non volatile memory error 6 10 6 7 Operation commands Communication CompovVVay F 6 7 Operation commands Communication C
296. mm o pd O SOL 01 0 SOL V VT00000 H 01 938444434 H 1009 yeOH 1002 1804 psepue s 0 901 01 0 S VL700000 H 0 32 441 1 1H p epuels 10419 Ad ye AN 22 0 1100 u do l ldulo2 1 10000000 H plou 0 00000000 H Ieuonuodoid uonisod u do jdw09 1 1 1 dols ye AN 02 0 0100 0 01 01 0 SOL j V LF00000 H 01 938444434 H loo5 29H 1002 1804 piepue s i l 0 901 01 0 S 000 0 39444444H p epuels dos 18 AN 4120 4000 d indul uonouni duue1 qS p lqesiq 0 66666 0 0 o Bulp4029V 4698 L000 H 01 00000000 anjea Ile dues dS ed indul uonouni dwel qS p lqesiq 0 66666 01 o 46981000 01 00000000 S qS z inou n3 Z0000000 H 1 IN ultu n3 L0000000 H 0 S 38s n3 00000000 h n wy dues qS U 0 02 01 170 89000000 H 01 L0000000 H sis 1 1s u solO uedO i 0701 170 79000000 H 10000000 H pueq peep jeuoyiodoid uonisod 120 V000 0095 x 0 66 0 270 30600000 0 Z0000000 H 1009 poled jouoD 21 0 6000 i i 0766 01 2100 44600000HH 01 20000000 poled lonuoo SA U 66 66 91 1070 40ZZ0000 H 01 L0000000 H 1002 sis 1 s H SA l 66 66 91 1070 402Z0000 H 01 0000000 H sis l sAH U l 07001 01 0 0 83600000 01 00000000 jase fEnUE N 66 66 01 66161 40 20000 01 128 1 1 pueq pe q 66 66 0
297. mmands Communication CompoWay F P 6 11 MN Control Run Control Stop Instruction Related MRC SRC code information Related information Control state 01 U 2 4 1 1 Run P FO un This is used to run or stop control This command can be used in both setting area 0 and setting area 1 If All channels are selected only those that are enabled will be affected by this command To use this command Write via communication must be enabled using the VVrite via communication operation command 6 21 Section 6 Communication CompoWay F Response M Bank change 6 22 Response MRC SRC Response code Response codes The above indicates a normal end For the response codes see 6 7 Operation commands Communication CompoWay F P 6 11 Instruction Related MRC SRC code information Related This command is used to change banks there are 8 banks numbered 0 to 7 An SP alarm values and a PID Set No are stored in each bank This command can be used in both setting area O and setting area 1 An operation error will result if AT is running in the selected channel To use this command Write via communication must be enabled using the Write via communication operation command MRC SRC Response code Response codes The above indicates a normal end For the response codes see 6 7 Operation commands Communication CompoWay F P 6 11 M AT execute M AT ca
298. mode address code information CRC 16 1 1 2 2 2 bytes Related Description mformaton Local SP Remote SP Local SP Cascade open Remote SP Cascade closed Local SP Remote SP Use this command to select the SP mode Local SP Remote SP The command can be used when cascade control or remote SP is in use This command can be used in both setting area 0 and setting area 1 If AT is being run in the specified channel an operation error will result To use this command Write via communication must be enabled using the Write via communication operation command 7 9 Commands and responses Communication Modbus VVhen the control mode is set to cascade control perform the local SP remote SP operation command of CH2 Slave Function Write start Instruction Related Response address mode address code information CRC 16 1 2 2 2 bytes E The above indicates a normal end For information on error responses see 7 7 Operation commands Communication Modbus P 7 14 M Echo back test Slave Function Write start Command address mode address Test data CRC 16 1 2 2 This command is used to perform an echo back test The command can be used in any state of the EBAR ER The test data can be any two bytes of hexadecimal data Slave Function Write start Response address mode address Test data CRC 16 1 2 2 2 bytes E 2 bytes The above indicates a normal end For information on error responses see 7 7
299. mpound write controlla bility may be affected Pay attention to the following points Command Maximum of 3 setting data sets can be written Response 50 ms or higher 7 3 Section 7 Communication Modbus 7 2 Frames Based on the Modbus RTU communication protocol commands from the host computer and responses from the E5AR ER take the form of frames The data comprising command frames and response frames are explained belovv In the following explanation an H at the beginning of a numeric value for example H 02 indicates that the value is a hexadecimal number A number or letters enclosed in quotation marks for example 00 is an ASCII character E Command frame 6 Example of CRC 16 calculation CRC 16 calculation method As indicated at right the value from the client address to the end of the data is calculated and the result set in CRC 16 7 4 In RTU mode each frame begins and ends with a silent time interval that is at least 3 5 characters long Slave Function address mode Data CRC 16 CRC 16 calculation range Silent interval at least 3 5 characters long Specify the Unit No of the E5AR ER Set in hexadecimal Client address from H O0 to 63 0 to 99 When broadcasting to all units specify H 00 Responses are not returned to a broadcast The function code indicates the type of command from the I host computer The code is set in hexadecimal and is 1 Function code I I
300. n This level includes SP PID set and alarm settings for each bank To move to a bank use Display bank selection which appears at the beginning of Bank setting level Power on process 75 o I Adjustment Adjustment 2 level Bank setting level Operation level Approximation PID setting setting level key less 1 Ras key less L Paz than 1 second than 1 second key less key less than 1 sec than 1 second X Bank setting level key less level level key less m q m wm wm m m Qam am am mm ew eee eee ee than 1 second than 1 second C Control in progress 7 LSP Bank 7 LSP SP lower limit SP upper limit 7 PID Bank 7 PID set number 0 8 7 AL 1 Bank 7 Alarm value 1 19999 99999 7 AL1H Bank 7 Alarm upper limit 1 19999 99999 7 AL1L Bank 7 L Alarm lower limit 1 19999 99999 7 AL4L Bank 7 Alarm lower limit 4 L 19999 99999 CH L md di w lt w 1 Display bank selection Use this setting to select the bank that you vvish to display r e Set the number of th
301. n y EP K W Event input 6 allocation v bee Ml aa ma ya Event input 3 allocation Da e Use these settings to assign event input functions Setting range Units Default value e Disable 0 Write via communication OFF ON 1 Setting CH1 Bank No Bit 0 2 CH1 Bank No Bit 1 3 CH1 Bank No Bit 2 4 CH1 Run Stop 5 CH1 Auto Manual 6 CH1 SP mode Remote Local 7 CH2 Bank No Bit 0 8 CH2 Bank No Bit 1 9 CH2 Bank No Bit 2 10 CH2 Run Stop 11 CH2 Auto Manual 12 CH2 SP mode Remote Local 13 Similarly CH3 14 to 19 CH4 20 to 25 If the same setting is selected for different event input assignments the event input for which ON OFF is determined last will be effective Note that when the power is turned on and the same bank No assignment is repeated the event input with the higher number is given priority SP modes Remote Local of CH2 to CH4 are disabled When the control mode is set to cascade control assign the following CH2 operation commands e CH2 Run Stop 11 e CH2 Auto Manual 12 CH2 SP mode Remote Local 13 Cascade open Cascade open closed 6 Related information 5 7 Using event input P 5 29 8 47 I Section 8 Setting data is Lim Xi Da bos Auxiliary output 1 allocation Auxiliary output 3 allocation Lim r 4
302. n key if the key is set to the corre sponding function 5 21 I Section 5 Functions and Operations 5 22 Monitor Setting item PF1 monitor Setting item 1 Setting PF1 setting or PF2 setting can be set to Monitor Settings PF ar to display monitor settings using a function key The content to be displayed is set for each channel in Monitor Setting item 1 through Monitor Setting item 5 of the corresponding function key The selections are shown in the following table for the setting or monitor ranges see the respective explanations of the setting data mans Remarks Description value Monitor Setting Display Disabled 0 oswa 7588027 1 PVISP Bank No Gans t 6P 1 2 PViSP MV Canses 3 PViDeviaton Monroy 4 Proportional band 5 Cans P 5 integraltim Case eS 6 Derivative time 0 Case 4 7 nam 8 Alarm upper imitf anset RN Alam lover imiti Ganset Ri 10 Aam2 az 11 Alarm upper limit Canset Ran 12 Alam lover mit Canset Alarms Cast a3 14 Alarm upper limit3 anset RtiN 15 Alam lover imit Canset A3 16 Alama R 17
303. n propor tional control the amount of valve opening is manipulated e To perform manual operation or manually set the MV or valve opening set the Manual Auto setting to an Manual or hold down the key at least 1 second Standard type e MANU lights up in the operation display while in manual mode The PV appears in Display 1 the MV appears in Display 2 and du appears in Display 3 e To change the MV press the keys The MV is updated every 50 ms e When switching between manual mode and auto mode the action of the MV is balance less and bumpless Other setting level can be moved to in manual mode Hovvever AT Execute Cancel cannot be selected and does not appear in the display Switching between auto and manual is possible a maximum of 100 000 times e During cascade control if the primary loop is switched to manual control when the secondary loop is in any of the following conditions the manual MV is disabled e The SP mode of the secondary loop is local cascade open e The secondary loop is in manual mode Operation at error is taking place in the secondary loop Position e When a potentiometer is connected MANU lights up in the proportional type operation display while in manual mode The PV appears in Display 1 the valve opening appears in Display 2 and appears in Display 3 When a potentiometer is not connected Display 2 shows e To turn on open output pre
304. ncel Response 6 9 Commands and responses Communication CompoWay F nstruction Related MRC SRC code information Related information Ch Command 00 to 08 man selected PID Set No 01 to 08 Specifies PID Set No 1 to 8 10 to 18 10 Currently selected PID Set No 11 to 18 Specifies PID Set No 1 to 8 Sih aia 20 Currently selected PID Set No 21 to 28 Specifies PID Set No 1 to 8 uzel 30 Currently selected PID Set No 31 to 38 Specifies PID Set No 1 to 8 m su nasi FO Currently selected PID Set No G uki F1 to F8 Specifies PID Set No 1 to 8 This command runs AT On the E5AR ER the PID Set No must be specified when running AT To specify the currently selected PID Set No the PID set currently used for operation set the lower byte of the related information to 0 This command is used in setting area 0 If used in setting area 1 an operation error will result An operation error will also result in the following situations Hun Stop of the specified channel is set to Stop e Auto Manual of the specified channel is set to Manual To use this command Write via communication must be enabled using the VVrite via communication operation command MRC SRC Response code Response codes The above indicates a normal end For the response codes see 6 7 Operation commands Communication CompoWay F P 6 11 Instruction Related MRC SRC code in
305. nds Communication CompoWay F P 6 11 nstruction Related MRC SRC code information iy lv lv This returns all settings to the initial settings This command is used in setting area 1 If used in setting area 0 an operation error vvill result To use this command Write via communication must be enabled using the Write via communication operation command MRC SRC Response code Response codes The above indicates a normal end For the response codes see 6 7 Operation commands Communication CompoWay F P 6 11 6 27 Section 6 Communication CompoWay F MH Cancel latch M SP mode 6 28 Response Instruction Related MRC SRC code information Related information Command 1 Cancolalam lah Cancel alarm latch This command cancels alarm latch The command is used when the alarm latch function is in use This command can be used in both setting area 0 and setting area 1 If AT is being run in the specified channel an operation error will result e To use this command Write via communication must be enabled using the Write via communication operation command MRC SRC Response code Response codes The above indicates a normal end For the response codes see 6 7 Operation commands Communication CompoWay F P 6 11 Instruction Related MRC SRC code information Related Description information Command m Local SP Remote SP 10 Local SP 2 Cascade o
306. necessary cool the products using a fan or other cooling method 2 Provide sufficient space around the product for heat dissipation Do not block the vents on the product Use the product within the noted supply voltage and rated load Be sure to confirm the name and polarity for each terminal before wiring the terminal block and connectors Do not connect anything to unused terminals Use the specified size of crimp terminals M3 vvidth 5 8 mm max for vviring the terminal block 7 To connect bare wires to the terminal block use AWG22 to AWG14 cross sectional area 0 326 to 2 081 mm to vvire the povver supply terminals and AWG28 to AVVG16 cross sectional area 0 081 to 1 309 mm for other terminals Length of exposed wire 6 to 8 mm 8 Ensure that the rated voltage is achieved no longer than 2 s after turning the povver ON 9 Turn OFF the povver first before dravving out the product Never touch the terminals or the electronic components or subject them to physical shock VVhen inserting the product do not allovv the electronic components to contact the case 10 Do not remove the inner circuit board 11 Output turns OFF vvhen shifting to the initial setting level in certain modes Take this into consideration when setting up the control system 12 Allovv the product to vvarm up for at least 30 minutes after the povver is turned ON 13 Install surge absorbers or noise filters in devices near the pr
307. ned to this operation command 7 25 Section 7 Communication Modbus E Move to setting area 1 M Move to protect level 7 26 Response Response Slave Function Write start Instruction Related address mode address code information CRC 16 im im r Hoo 1 1 2 2 2 bytes Use this command to move to setting area 1 The command is used in setting area 0 Nothing happens if the command is used in setting area 1 If the command is used when lnitial setting level protect is set to 2 Disable move to input initial setting level an operation error will result To use this command Write via communication must be enabled using the Write via communication operation command Slave Function Write start Instruction Related address mode address code information CRC 16 H00 H00 H07 H00 1 1 2 2 2 bytes The above indicates a normal end For information on error responses see 7 7 Operation commands Communication Modbus P 7 14 Slave Function Write start Instruction Related address mode address code information CRC 16 H00 H00 H08 H00 1 1 2 2 2 bytes Use this command to move to protect level Protect level is explained in 4 1 Setting levels and key operation P 4 2 This command is used in setting area 0 If used in setting area 1 an operation error will result To use this command Write via communication must be enabled using the Write via communication operation command Slave Func
308. nel 1 Channel 1 Alarm 1 RSP 1 Channel 1 Remote SP Local Remote SP mode Channel 1 Alarm 2 MVH 1 Channel 1 MV heating side BNKO 1 Channel 1 bank bit Channel 1 Alarm 3 MVL 1 Channel 1 MV cooling side BNK1 1 Channel 1 bank bit 1 Channel 1 Alarm 4 VLVO 1 Channel 1 MV open side BNK2 1 Channel 1 bank bit 2 Channel 1 Input error VLVC 1 Channel 1 MV closed side RNRS 1 Channel 1 RUN STOP Channel 1 Remote SP input error MNAT 1 Channel 1 manual auto Multi point input types have the same setting data for channels 2 to 4 depending on the number of input points Cascade standard control Cascade heating cooling control position proportional control and ratio control are also available See Section 3 Typical Control Examples page 3 1 I Section 1 Overview MH Main functions Input After selecting the temperature input TC thermocouple or PT resis tance temperature input sensor or analog input current input or voltage input vvith the input type svvitch select the input type in parameter setting If the input type SVV is set to temperature input resistance temper ature input sensor or thermocouple the temperature unit can be set If the input type SVV is set to analog input current input or voltage input scaling and the decimal point position can be set Input Input type SW Input type Temperature input Resistance temperature input sensor Pt 100 Thermocouples K J T E L U N R S B W
309. nel 2 If All channels are selected only those that are enabled will be affected by this command To use this command Write via communication must be enabled using the Write via communication operation command Slave Function Write start Instruction Related address mode address code information CRC 16 1 1 2 2 2 bytes The above indicates a normal end For information on error responses see 7 7 Operation commands Communication Modbus P 7 14 Slave Function Write start Instruction Related addess mode address code information 16 1 1 2 2 2 bytes Related Description information Selected Bank No 00 to 07 0 to 7 H 10 to 17 2 0 to 7 H 30 to 37 O to 7 H FO to F7 0 to 7 This command is used to change banks there are 8 banks numbered 0 to 7 An SP alarm values and a PID Set No are stored in each bank This command can be used in both setting area 0 and setting area 1 An operation error will result if AT is running in the selected channel 5 H 20 to 27 0107 To use this command Write via communication must be enabled using the Write via communication operation command Slave Function Write start Instruction Related address mode address code information CRC 16 1 1 2 2 2 bytes The above indicates a normal end For information on error responses see 7 7 Operation commands Communication Modbus P 7 14 M AT execute M AT cancel Response 7 9 Commands and responses Communicat
310. nformation see 5 2 Control functions W Banks P 5 9 Changing the SP from a temperature of 0 0 C to 150 0 C lt m al l 1 The display normally shows PV SP The SP is 0 0 C bom p Rasa X Da a a a a a w Je 2 Use the AIM keys to set the SP to 150 0 a 2al l Section 4 Settings Required for Basic Control 4 9 Performing ON OFF control ON OFF control consists of setting an SP and then having the control output turn off when the temper ature reaches the SP during control When the control output turns off the temperature begins to fall and once it falls to a certain point the control output turns on again This action is repeated around a certain position ON OFF control requires setting Hysteresis heat to the temperature drop from the SP at which it is desired that the control output turn on The Direct reverse operation setting is used to determine whether the MV is increased or decreased with respect to an increase or decrease of the PV E ON OFF Control 4 18 Hysteresis 6 3 position control e On the E5AR ER switching between advanced PID control and ON OFF control is accomplished using the proportional band setting VVhen the proportional band is set to 0 00 ON OFF control is per
311. ng PID setting or Approximation setting level the data is not written to internal non volatile memory RAM write mode 1 When SP tracking or PV tracking is ON and the mode is changed to remote SP mode or manual mode the SP is not written to internal non volatile memory Note that when a change is made by key operation the data is written to non volatile memory When the write mode is changed from RAM write mode to Backup mode the setting data of Operation Adjustment Adjustment 2 Bank setting PID setting and Approximation setting levels is written to internal non volatile memory Each level is explained in 4 1 Setting levels and key operation P 4 2 The time required for RAM backup varies depending on the number of settings that were changed in RAM backup mode The more settings that were changed the longer the time required For example if all settings in Operation Adjust ment Adjustment 2 Bank setting PID setting and Approxi mation levels were changed the most time would be required which is about 2 seconds Response M RAM data store Response M Software reset Response 6 9 Commands and responses Communication CompoWay F MRC SRC Response code Response codes The above indicates a normal end For the response codes see 6 7 Operation commands Communication CompoWay F P 6 11 Instruction Related MRC SRC code information This writes the setting data of Operation Adjustment A
312. ng Manual MV Operation level e When Output default value is selected the value specified in Manual MV default value is used This can then be changed using Manual MV Operation level Examples of how the MV changes using the two methods are shown below MV MV Manual MV initial value Time Time m gt d4H__ Auto mode Manual mode Auto mode Manual mode Setting At MV hold At Initial value output Hold MV Manua ouput menog Output initial value 5 0 to 105 0 22 Standard Manual MV initial value 105 0 to 105 0 Heating cooling Related information 4 13 Performing manual control P 4 29 Related setting data Manual MV Operation level P 8 5 8 7 I Section 8 Setting data CH MV change rate limit mode arin e Use this setting to select Mode or Mode 1 for the MV change rate limit e When Mode 1 is selected the MV change rate limit only functions with respect to increases in the MV Setting range Units Default value 1719 1 Mode 1 Setting 6 Related information 5 2 Control functions W PID sets P 5 12 6 Related setting data MV change rate limit heat MV change rate limit cooling Adiustment level P 8 19 CH 2 Ua yr 4 Control mode key heating cooling control and position proportional control floating During cascade heating cooling control only channel 1 is displayed AT calcu
313. ng event input I 5 7 Using event input Event input can be used on the E5AR LILIB 2 input EBER L L1B 2 point E5AR LILID 4 point E5ER LILID 4 point and E5AR L IDB 6 point e An order of priority exists for event input key operation and commu nication settings with the most recent setting taking precedence Operation changeover takes place when event input switches OFF ON and ON OFF M Event input allocation e Function settings for event input using external contact input are configured using Event input allocation 1 to 6 Event input 1 assignment On a multi point input type assignment data can be set for channels o and higher as appropriate for the number of channels Event hk 25 Cramer Ban ote a hansl Bank Ne rn Channel 1 Bank No bit 57 E o Event input yun F Channel 1 1 SP mode r Channel 2 SP mode remote local x Communication e When the event input is ON setting data can be written with the vvrite OFF ON communication function and the CMVV indicator lights up The content of the event input is reflected in Communication OFF ON Adiustment level This setting data is an operation command that is common to all channels e Operation is as follows based on the event input ON OFF st
314. ng to the error potentiometer and valve drive motor and then try motor calibration again Set value Input type switch Set the input type switch for the blinks error input you are using so that it accords with the displayed Input type setting mr bog t t yn nr m e e Me ii _ a If the system does not operate as expected after configuring settings check the wiring and set values once again If there is still a problem unintended set values may have been accidentally configured in the setting data In this case you can initialize the unit and then re configure your settings Initializing the unit will return all settings to the factory default settings The fac tory default settings may cause unexpected output so disconnect all output A Caution wires and eliminate effects to the system before initializing the unit In addition write down your settings prior to initialization 10 3 Section 10 Troubleshooting 10 3 Inferring causes from conditions abnormal measured values 6 The measured value is abnormal or measurement is not possible Ps Possible cause The polarity or connections to the temperature sensor are Connect the wires correctly not correct A temperature sensor that cannot be used with the E5AR Change to a temperature sensor that can be used with The temperature sensor has a broken wire a short circuit Replace the temperature sensor or has deteriorat
315. ns on off when control output 2 is ON OFF Common indicator 2 orange Turns on off when control output 3 is ON OFF 2 Turns on off when control output 4 is ON OFF 2 Turns on off when the output function assigned to auxiliary output 1 is ON OFF Turns on off when the output function Common indicator assigned to auxiliary output 2 is ON OFF Turns on off when the output function assigned to auxiliary output 3 is ON OFF Turns on off when the output function assigned to auxiliary output 4 is ON OFF Turns on when operation stops Otherwise is Single channel off indicator orange 1 Turns on during control at an event input or when run stop is switched to stop Single channel Turns on when the SP mode is set to remote indicator orange Otherwise is Off Single channel 5 on when operation is set to manual indicator orange mode Otherwise is Off Common indicator Turns on off when write via communication is orange ON OFF enabled disabled Single channel Turns on when the displayed channel is 2 indicator orange Otherwise is Off k 6 Indicates that the model has the function Note that function may be disabled depending on the settings and in this case the indicator is alvvays Off Indicates that the model does not have the function 1 5 I Section 1 Overview When the control output is current output the indicator turns off when the MV is 096 or less and turns on when t
316. nsistor outputs Transistor outputs Input 2 L Input 2 an Hehe EL I npu EE moe mi V PT TC PT TC Curent Voltage Thermocouple Current Voltage Thermocouple Resistance thermometer Resistance thermometer J Y E5ER PRTDF E5ER PRQ43F FLK E53 ARB4 ESER PAF 500 B E5ER PAF 500 Al B E53 ARR4 24 VACIDC 100240 AC Event inputs 24 VACIDC 100 240 VAC ET Ef Auxiliary outputs 6 iis D 6 EE e i Relay outputs Input power supply depends Input power supply depends 3 on the model EV4 o ac on the model 100 to 240 VAC 100 to 240 VAC or 24 VAC DC 4 bd or 24 VAC DC no polarity EV5 x 4 no polarity EA I EV has 6 9 E53 ARRR3 bli E53 ARRR 6 6 ee o 2 Relay output ir Relay output 250 VAC TA 121 it il 250 VAC 1A ii 3 b ib D Es3 ART2 f ESER PAF 500 oe 5 55 Potentiometer o Auxiliary outputs W Transistor outputs W 2 2 2 Voltage output 3 C L 3 c 12V 40 mA SUB1 OUT3 Voltage output at 5 5 12V 40 mA or lt 1 L lt Current output 6 6 SUB2 4 20 mA DC 500 Q max pe SSE ci a PT TC 0 20 mA DC 500 2 max cna V
317. nstallation M Dimensions E5AR E installation Panel cutout dimensions E5ER 92 33 45 85 110 or higher 3 60 or higher 92 120 or higher 120 or higher 2 2 2 1 Installation I Installation procedure E5AR E5ER If the front of the unit needs to be watertight attach the provided watertight packing If the front of the unit does not need to be watertight the watertight packing does not need to be attached 2 Insert the unit into the cutout in the panel 3 Insert the accompanying fittings into the grooves on the top and bottom of the rear case Watertight packing D Watertight packing Gradually tighten the screws in the top and bottom fittings alternating between each so that they are balanced Tighten until the ratchet turns without engaging Pulling the unit out Normally there is no need to pull out the unit however it can be pulled out if needed for maintenance purposes When pulling the unit out place a cloth over the screwdriver to prevent scratches and other damage 2 3 Section 2 Preparations 2 2 How to Use the Terminals Verify the layout of the terminals A 1 using the engravings on the top and sides of the case E EDAR
318. nstant Adjustment level 2 P 8 22 Movement average 1 enable i Movement average 3 enable A u 3 Movement average 2 enable r Movement average 4 enable A 8 50 e Use these settings to enable or disable move average for each input A Setting range Units Default value e Setting Related setting data Move average Move average count Adjustment level 2 P 8 23 8 11 Control initial setting 2 level i lt him Ua bos Extraction of square root 1 enable 58 1 Extraction of square root 3 enable ke hm yum ae P ag Extraction of square root 2 enable oor Extraction of square root 4 enable e Use these settings to enable or disable extraction of square root operations for each input n Setting 6 Related setting data m Extraction of square root Lovv cut point Adiustment level 2 P 8 24 ae Proportional control Straight line approximation 1 enable bm pP g Straight line approximation 2 enable e Use these settings to enable or disable straight line approximation Setting Related setting data Reference Straight line approximation input 1 Straight line approximation input 2 Straight line approximation output 1 Straight line approximation output 2 Approximation setting level P 8 33 Broken line approximation 1 enable Pred r e Use this setting to enable or disable b
319. nt assignment Setting data transfer position output 1 SP SP lovver limit to 1300 0 200 0 k on SP upper limit k type Ramp SP SP lower limit to 1300 0 200 0 on SP upper limit type Lower limit of sensor setting Upper and range to upper lower limit of Depends on limit of sensor sensor setting input type setting range range temperature 19999 to 99999 Scaling display kk on analog value 2 1 kk type Control output 7 j heating or 777 100 0 0 0 cooling 0 0 to open 105 0 Control output cooling or 0 0 to 105 0 100 0 0 0 1 close Valve opening 10 0 to 110 0 100 0 0 0 1 Will be initialized if the input type temperature units scaling display value SP upper and lovver limit or applicable control transfer output assignment is changed Related information 5 8 Using transfer output P 5 32 Related setting data Input type Input initial setting level P 8 36 Control Transfer output assignment Control initial setting 2 level P 8 46 8 49 I Section 8 Setting data First order lag operation 1 enable LAL 7 First order lag operation 3 enable RL 3 First order lag operation 2 enable 2 First order lag operation 4 enable L e Use these settings to enable or disable first order lag operation for each input 1 FF Disable Enable Setting Related information 5 1 Input adjustment functions P 5 2 Related setting data First order lag operation Time co
320. ntrol e This setting is used to select which MV is displayed in PV SP MV Operation level during heating cooling control Heating MV or Cooling MV can be selected Setting range Units Default value 0 Heating MV Setting m Cooling MV 8 60 8 13 Display adjustment level 1 4 me 24 yr Bar graph display item ku e Use this setting to select the contents of the bar graph display of the E5AR e The bar graph of the E5AR is 10 segments Setting range Units Default value si No bar graph display Deviation 1 EU segment Setting Deviation 10 EU segment Deviation 20 EU segment Deviation 100 EU segment Standard type Heating MV Position proportional type Valve opening Standard type Cooling MV Display auto return time 26 e This setting is used to select the amount of time without key operation that must elapse for the display to revert to the PV SP screen when in Operation level Adiustment level Adiustment level 2 Bank setting level PID setting level Approximation setting level or Monitor item level e When 0 is selected the function is disabled no auto reset Setting range Units Default value Setting mn i xi Display refresh period e This setting is used to lengthen the refresh period of the monitor value display This only slovvs the display refr
321. ntrol period must be set for each channel 1 9 I Section 1 Overview Position proportional type The position proportional type only uses standard control 2 Control Transfer output Control mode 1 input type 2 input type 4 input type S oe Standard con trol OUT1 Channel 1 control output open side OUT2 Channel 1 control output closed side Direct Reverse action Control whereby the MV is increased as the present value increases Direct action When the present value PV is higher than cooling the set point SP the MV is increased in pro portion to the difference between the PV and the SP Control whereby the MV is decreased as the present value increases Reverse action When the present value PV is lower than heating the set point SP the MV is increased in pro portion to the difference between the PV and the SP e Floating control and closed control can also be selected for the position proportional type Floating control allows position propor tional control without a potentiometer 6 Control Transfer Use this setting to assign vvhat type of data is output from each output output allocation For the multi point input type assignment data can be set for channels o and higher as needed for the number of channels Control transfer output allocation Channel 1 Channel 1 control output heat Channel 1 control output cool Channel 1 SP Channel 1 ramp SP
322. o 20 mA DC 4 to 20 mA DC 500 O load max including transfer output output p Resolution Approx 54000 at 0 to 20 mA DC approx 43000 at 4 to 20 mA DC Position proportional control type open close 555 1a 250 V AC 1 A including inrush current inductive load Relay output 1a 250 V AC 1 A resistive load Auxiliary output OUD Maximum load voltage 30 V DC maximum load current 50 mA p Residual voltage 1 5 V max leakage current 0 4 mA max Input ON 1 kO max OFF 100 kO max Non contact Input ON Residual voltage 1 5 V max OFF Leakage current 0 1 mA max Short circuit current Approx 4 mA Remote SP input See Sensor input Potentiometer input 100 Q to 2 5 kO Transfer output See Control output Control method Advanced PID or ON OFF Setting method Digital setting by front panel keys setting by communication 7 segment digital display and LED indicators Indicator method E5AR Character height PV 12 8 mm SV 7 7 mm MV 7 7 mm E5ER Character height PV 9 5 mm SV 7 2 mm MV 7 2 mm Ambient operating 10 to 55 C no condensation or ice formation 3 year warranty 10 to 50 C temperature Ambient operating humidity Relative humidity 25 to 85 Storage temperature 25 to 65 C no condensation or icing 1 100 to 240V AC and 24 V AC DC are on different models Please specify when ordering 2 Multi input Switch between temperature and analog input by input type switch Basic insulation between power supply in
323. o2 A 7 Appendix Status E5LIR Communication CompoWay F Free Error Output 0 Bit position olcrlorl o S 2 PT O 31 gt gt olololo O O of G G oO O O O O olcrl o olololo x if x x 5 5 5 15 lu lx 5 a 918 8 8 u ju j u u L Sel o j o Y O O xi un of o o o z Z Z Z DIT o 5 D ol S _ ol S dl gt lt o Ol O 515 2 ele ikgis9is 2 5 o o S Y C I o ol isi S 3 g Z goQlol xi ol g G 6 amp minlmili S uul olo lt I I I a a oma a a o ia a a o a a o a ii a c A 8 Setting list I Ou ut 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 15 Bit position el T ee iv e fe heat side type output output Control output Pulse voltage inear current Dnm Y i a k i k 2 xx oxo x x o o o As follows when read in setting area 1 e HSP input error
324. odbus 7 14 mo OL RO TA d smala T bii 7 16 7 9 Commands and responses Communication Modbus 7 17 Monitor value read Communication Modbus 7 17 Read setting data Communication Modbus 7 18 Write setting data to protect level 7 19 Write setting data Communication Modbus 7 19 Write via COMMUNICATION u la aaa as a Bala a 7 21 Control Run Control Stop 7 21 Bank Chan OS n d a l a a 7 22 7 23 Re Er 0000 7 23 Wate 936 7 24 RAM data add ad 7 25 SOMWANE TESEI la daa ukasa 7 25 MOVe to set ng Tea n say s R d E 7 26 Move to protect level 7 26 POLO Man al laq baa 7 27 Maze Setiinds a OD D uuu aS sss 7 27 Cancellato r da asl ama casa 7 28 SP MOTE u D n 7 28 ECNO Dara 7 29 XVI Section 6 Setting data Section 9 User calibration Section 10 Troubleshooting Appendix index 8 1 How to use this section q 8 q 8 58 558u855 8es888 8 2 8 2 Protect level a555 u usa 8 3 8 3 Operation level 000 8 5 8 4 Adiustment level 060 O o
325. odbus Slave Function Write start Instruction Related address mode address code information CRC 16 H00 H00 H04 1 1 2 2 2 bytes The above indicates a normal end For information on error responses see 7 7 Operation commands Communication Modbus P 7 14 Slave Function Writestart Instruction Related address mode address code information CRC 16 1 1 2 2 2 bytes This writes the setting data of Operation and Adjustment levels to internal non volatile memory Operation and Adiustment levels are explained in 4 1 Setting levels and key operation P 4 2 This command can be used in both setting area 0 and setting area 1 To use this command Write via communication must be enabled using the VVrite via communication operation command Slave Function Write start Instruction Related address mode address code information CRC 16 H00 HOO H05 H00 1 1 2 2 2 bytes The above indicates a normal end For information on error responses see 7 7 Operation commands Communication Modbus P 7 14 Slave Function Write start Instruction Related address mode address code information CRC 16 H00 H00 H06 H00 1 1 2 2 2 bytes A software reset causes the same operation as turning the power off and on This command can be used in both setting area 0 and setting area 1 To use this command VVrite via communication must be enabled using the VVrite via communication operation command No response A response is not retur
326. oduct that generate noise in particular devices vvith an inductance component such as motors transformers solenoids and magnetic coils If a noise filter is used for the power supply check the voltage and current and install the noise filter as close as possible to the product Separate the product as far as possible from devices generating strong high frequency noise e g high frequency vvelders and high frequency sevving machines or surges Do not tie noise filter input output wires together 14 Keep the wiring for the product s terminal block and connector separate from high voltage high current povver lines to prevent inductive noise Do not run the vviring parallel to or in the same cable as povver lines The influence of noise can also be reduced by using separate vviring ducts or shield lines 15 Install an external switch or circuit breaker and label them clearly so that the operator can quickly turn OFF the power 16 Do not use the product in the follovving locations Locations where dust or corrosive gases in particular sulfuric or ammonia gas are present Locations where icing or condensation may occur Locations exposed to direct sunlight Locations subject to excessive shock or vibration Locations where the product may come into contact with water or oil Locations subject to direct radiant heat from heating equipment Locations subject to extreme temperature changes 17 Cleaning Do not use t
327. of the PID set that you wish to display Up to 8 PID sets PID Set Nos 1 to 8 can be used PID values MV upper and lovver limits and automatic selection range upper limit are stored in each PID set R Setting data Setting data Setting range Units Default value 1 Display PID fies selection Setting Selected PID set 6 Related setting data Reference Bank No Adjustment level P 8 13 8 30 CH PID Proportional band PID Integral time PID Derivative time 1 to 8 8 7 PID setting level FP ei kK 4 g a Advanced PID control These settings are used to store PID values in each PID set If AT is run the values are set automatically CH PID MV upper limit PID MV lower limit 1 to 8 1 Setting ks P action Control action using an MV proportional to the deviation action Control action using output that is proportional to the time integral of the deviation P action causes an offset and thus it is used in combination with action As time elapses the offset disappears and the controlled temperature and SP equalize D action Control action using output that is proportional to the time derivative of the input P action and action serve to correct the control result and thus respond slowly to sudden temper ature changes D action corrects control by adding an MV that is proportional to the slope of the temperature ch
328. oltage q e sen cae Thermocouple Switch using output type setting Resistance thermometer Resistance thermometer 2 10 2 2 How to Use the Terminals I M Precautions when wiring To avoid the effects of noise wire the signal wires and the power line separately Use crimp terminals to connect to the terminals e Tighten screws to a torque of 0 40 to 0 56 Nem e The crimp terminals should be type M3 and either of the following shapes 5 8 mm or less 1 a mm or less M Wiring The inside of the frame around terminal numbers in the schematics indicates the interior of the unit and the outside of the frame indicates the exterior 6 Power supply e Connect terminals A1 to A2 as follows terminals The input power supply varies depending on the model 100 240 V AC or 24 V AC DC no I x polarity Input voltage 100 240 V AC 50 60Hz 22 VA 17 VA 24 V AC 50 60Hz 15 VA 11 VA 24 V DC no polarity 3 6 2 _ 3 411 5 1 56 1 Be C I Section 2 Preparations Inputs terminals 1 6 Control outputs Transfer outputs terminals AE 1 Jon s Joo ro gt For Input 1 141 connect terminals K4 to K6 on the E5AR or E4 to E6 on the E5ER as follows according to the input type For a multi point input type
329. ompoWay F Operation commands are sent using the following FINS mini command text format FINS mini command text nstruction Related MRC SRC code information Explanation MRC SRC Specify the FINS mini operation command Specify an operation code Related information Specify information related to the command Operation commands for the E5AR ER are shown in the following Operation 7 Related information Description code Higher Byte Lovver Byte VVrite via 07 0 OFF Disabled communication 1 ON Enabled Run Stop Oto3 F 2 0 Run 1 Stop Bank change Oto3 F 2 0 to 7 0107 Bank 0 to 77 0 to 7 run 0 to 3 F 2 0 selected PID Set No 1 to 8 PID Set No VVrite mode 0 Backup mode 1 RAM write mode 7771771777 Auto Manual 0 to 3 F 2 0 5 mode 1 Manual mode 3 Cancel latch 0 to 3 F 2 SP mode 0 to 3 F 2 0 1 RSP 1 Operates for all channels 2 Specify for each channel 0 CH1 1 CH2 2 CH3 3 CH4 F All channels A software reset will not respond no service PDU response When all channels are specified only enabled channels will respond and processing will begin from Channel 1 If an error is detected on any one channel an Operation error will result If all channels end normally Normal end results When cascade control is selected for the control mode specify channel 2 commands for the following operation commands e Run Stop e Auto Manual e SP mode
330. on Expansion control setting level setting level Less than 1 seconds Password input Set value in general 1201 Control in operation Control is stopped on all Calibration level Control stopped channels of multi point input Reset from calibration level is by power off lype 4 2 4 1 Setting levels and key operation I Level Protect level Settings to prevent accidental key input RUN level Basic display and settings for operation Adjustment level Option settings and control adjustment Adjustment 2 level Settings that can be adjusted during operation function control During Bank setting level SP PID Set No and alarm settings of each bank operation PID setting level P 1 D values of each PID set and limit settings Approximation setting level approximation and straight line approximation eu operation Is Communications setting level Communications speed communication data length and stopped other communication settings Special function setting level Initialization of settings and PF key settings Expansion control setting level Advanced control settings and position proportional settings Calibration level Calibration by the user To move to the special function setting level set Initial setting protect in the Protect level to 0 gt LHdac Adjustment 2 level In following each leve
331. on Indicates possibility of electric shock under spe cific conditions General Prohibition Prohibition Indicates non specific general prohibitions General Caution Indicates non specific general cautions warn ings and dangers Mandatory Caution Precautions A CAUTION Do not touch any of the terminals or terminal blocks while power is being supplied Doing so may occasionally result in minor injury due to electric shock Do not touch the terminals or electronic components or patterns on the PCB within 1 minute after turning OFF the power Doing so may occasionally result in minor injury due to electric shock Do not allow pieces of metal wire clippings or fine metallic shav ings or filings from installation to enter the product Doing so may occasionally result in electric shock fire or malfunction Do not use the product in locations where flammable or explosive gases are present Doing so may occasionally result in minor or moderate explosion causing minor or moderate injury or property damage Do not attempt to disassemble repair or modify the product Doing so may occasionally result in minor injury due to electric shock Tighten the screws on the terminal block and the connector lock ing screws securely using a tightening torque within the following ranges Loose screws may occasionally cause fire resulting in minor or moderate injury or damage to the equipment Terminal block screws 0 40 to 0
332. or Channel indication nun Bar graph CH LI Indicator 1 Indicator 2 Operation indicator Indicator 3 Function key 1 Auto Manual key Up key Function key 2 Dovvn key Channel key Level key Mode key Operation indicator N H R u Indicator 1 Indicator 2 Indicator 3 Mode key Dovvn key y imi Function key 1 Function key 2 Auto Manual key Channel key 1 2 Part Names and Functions I E How to read the display Display 1 Shows the present value and the setting data s name or error name Red Display 2 Shovvs the set point value and the set value of the setting data Green Display 3 Shovvs the Manipulated Variable MV and the bank number or level name Orange Channel indication Shows the set channel number Only appears on a multi point input type On a single input type the display is alvvays off Orange The E5ER shows the corresponding channel when the CH2 operation indicator is lit Bar graph Shovvs a bar graph of the settings 6 Operation indicators Operation Sout l indicator Single Explanation indicators channel indicator Turns on off when control output 1 is ON OFF 2 Tur
333. or use uses involving potential chemical contamination or electrical interference or conditions or uses not described in this manual e Nuclear energy control systems combustion systems railroad systems aviation systems medical equipment amusement machines vehicles safety equipment and installations subject to separate Industry or government regulations e Systems machines and equipment that could present a risk to life or property Please know and observe all prohibitions of use applicable to the products NEVER USE THE PRODUCTS FOR AN APPLICATION INVOLVING SERIOUS RISK TO LIFE OR PROPERTY WITHOUT ENSURING THAT THE SYSTEM AS A WHOLE HAS BEEN DESIGNED TO ADDRESS THE RISKS AND THAT THE OMRON PRODUCTS ARE PROPERLY RATED AND INSTALLED FOR THE INTENDED USE WITHIN THE OVERALL EQUIPMENT OR SYSTEM PROGRAMMABLE PRODUCTS OMRON shall not be responsible for the user s programming of a programmable product or any consequence thereof Disclaimers CHANGE IN SPECIFICATIONS Product specifications and accessories may be changed at any time based on improvements and other reasons It is our practice to change model numbers when published ratings or features are changed or when significant construction changes are made However some specifications of the products may be changed without any notice When in doubt special model numbers may be assigned to fix or establish key specifications for your application on your request Please consult
334. otect level C7 Adjustment level C8 0200 to 027F 3 Adiustment level 2 CA R op 7 2 PID setting level CB 0300 to 037F Approximation setting level CC Setting data of setting area 1 CD Input initial setting level CE 0100 to 0139 2 Control initial setting level CF Control initial setting 2 level Do 0200 to 0239 3 Alarm setting level D1 hadd Display adiustment level D 4 Communications setting level Da 2 Special function setting level Expansion control setting level This command is used to read setting data The number of elements can be set from 0002 to 0019 to allovv successive reading of 2 to 25 items of setting data in contiguous addresses To specify the variable type or address see Appendix Setting list P A 6 The upper limit of an address vvill vary depending on the variable type This command can be used in both setting area O and setting area 1 VVhen used in setting area 1 the response for the remote SP monitor ramp SP monitor and valve opening monitor is 0 and the response for the status is as indicated in the notes in Appendix Setting list Status P A 8 MRC SRC Response code Data Er PB Response codes The above indicates a normal end For the response codes see 6 5 Reading the variable area P 6 9 6 15 Section 6 Communication CompoWay F E Monitor value setting data compound read Communication CompoWay F 6 16 Response
335. pen No output valve opening hold Open output ON Valve completely closed MV at PV error Position propor tional type Note The order of priority of the MV settings is Manual MV default sat Stop gt MV at PV error 5 4 Display and key adjustment functions I 5 4 Display and key adjustment functions M Display scan 6 Display scan start stop Begin display scan after povver on Display scan is used to automatically change display channels on a multi point input type This function only applies to channels that are enabled in the Number of enabled channels setting If the Number of enabled channels is 3 channels 1 2 and 3 are displayed Display scan can be started automatically after power on or by pressing the key To stop display scan hold down the key for at least 1 second Use the Begin display scan after power on and Display scan period settings to specify how display scan operates Begin display scan Display scan scan after i power on using 24 key Disabled Disabled Enabled OFF O OFF Disabled Disabled e When display scan is enabled use the key to start or stop display scan To start display scan hold down the key in the Operation Adjustment Adjustment 2 Bank setting PID setting Approximation setting or Monitor item level Display
336. pen Remote SP Cascade closed Use this command to select the SP mode Local SP Remote SP The command can be used when cascade control or remote SP is in use This command can be used in both setting area 0 and setting area 1 If AT is being run in the specified channel an operation error will result To use this command VVrite via communication must be enabled using the Write via communication operation command Response 6 9 Commands and responses Communication CompoWay F MRC SRC Response code Response codes The above indicates a normal end For the response codes see 6 7 Operation commands Communication CompoVVay F P 6 11 M Read machine attributes Response This command reads the E5AR ER model and communication buffer size The command can be used in any state of the EBAR ER MRC SRC Response code Format Buffer size Response codes The above indicates a normal end For the response codes see 6 7 Operation commands Communication CompoWay F P 6 11 Model 0 1 2 4 5 6 7 8 9 5 ON F BB 1 Bytes 7 to 9 are blank Size Symbol Size A size 96 x 96 mm E size 96 x 48 mm 2 Constant program Symbol Constant program Blank Constant 3 Standard Position proportional Symbol Standard position proportional Blank Standard Position proportional 6 29 Section 6 Communication CompoWay F E Controller status rea
337. ppears as the leading digit of the setting data lt irs rr w _ da D I Section 5 Functions and Operations PID Set No PID Set No Alarm values Alarm value 1 n xu K K Operation procedure RUN level 5 10 e To select and use a PID Set No select 1 to 8 and then specify one of PID Set No 1 to 8 for each bank e Normally the initial setting 0 Auto selection is used To use this setting data see IS PID sets P 5 12 e To check the bank number view the leading digit of the setting data e Set alarm values for alarms 1 to 4 according to the alarm type Alarms that have Alarm type set to 0 Alarm function OFF are not displayed See 4 11 Using auxiliary output P 4 23 for the setting procedure e To check the bank number view the leading digit of the setting data The procedures for setting the local SP and PID Set No in Bank No 2 and for running Bank No 2 are explained in the following Local SP PID Set No
338. put terminals power supply output terminals 3 voltage output for E5AR QQUILILIWW LILIL is 21 mA max 12 V DC 40 mA max 5 vvith short circuit protection circuit A 2 Specifications M Unit performance specifications Standard control heating control or cooling control heating cooling control Standard control vvith remote SP 2 input type only Heating cooling control with remote SP 2 input type only Control mode Cascade standard control 2 input type only Cascade heating cooling control 2 input type only Ratio control 2 input type only Position proportional control control valve control type only Thermocouple input 1 0 1 of indication value or 1 C whichever is greater 1 digit max i Not using internal cold contact compensationl 0 1 of indication value or 1 C vvhichever is smaller 1 digit max 2 Indication accuracy Analog input 0 1 FS 1 digit max Platinum resistance temperature sensor input 0 1 of indication value or 0 5 C whichever is greater 1 digit max Position proportional potentiometer input 5 FS 1 digit max Temperature variation Thermocouple input R S B W influence 1 of PV or 10 C whichever is greater 1 digit max Voltage variation influence Other thermocouple input 1 of PV or 4 C whichever is greater 1 digit max K thermocouple at 100 C max 10 C max 3 Platinum resistance thermometer 1 of PV or
339. r example if the number of elements is 0010 the first 8 elements of data H 10 from the address are specified In Modbus protocol one element is two bytes of data however setting data on the E5AR ER is four bytes 6 Set values Values read and written to the variable area are expressed in hexadecimal and disregard the decimal point position negative values are expressed as a two s complement Example D 105 0 H0000041A The variable is an 8 digit number in hexadecimal Negative values are expressed as a two s complement The decimal is disregarded For example if the PV of the E5AR ER is 105 0 it will be read as H 0000041A 105 0 1050 H 0000041A Use of the variable area on the E5AR ER is explained in the following sections 7 9 Section 7 Communication Modbus 7 5 Reading the variable area The variable area is read by setting the required data in the following command frame Command frame Slave Function Read start Number of address mode address elements CRC 16 oli 1 1 2 2 2 bytes Explanation Specify the Unit No of the EBAR ER Set in hexadeci mal from H 01 to H 63 1 to 99 The function code for variable area read is H 03 Specify the address of the setting data that you wish to First address of read read For more information on addresses see Appendix Set ting list Specify the number of setting data items that you wish to read x 2 for the number of elements
340. r lights up Related information 4 12 Starting and stopping control P 4 27 Related setting data PF1 setting PF2 setting Advanced function setting level P 8 68 m PF1 setting Auto Manual and PF2 setting Auto Manual e Use to select Auto or Manual ce The initial setting is Alia Press the keys to select Atita Auto for Auto mode or Manual for Manual mode When Manual mode is selected the MANU indicator lights up This setting does not appear if either PF1 setting or PF2 setting is set to Auto Manual PF1 setting is initially set to Auto Manual to enable use of the 4 key and thus the setting does not appear Related information 4 13 Performing manual control P 4 29 Related setting data PF1 setting PF2 setting Advanced setting level P 8 68 Section 8 Setting data 8 4 Adjustment level 1A This level contains settings for the purpose of adiusting control such as change bank No AT Auto tuning enable disable vvrite via communication hysteresis adiustment input shift settings and SP ramp settings Adiustment level q m m Approximation setting J Adjustment level Ss PID setting lt Adiustment 2 level Bank setting level
341. rea P 6 9 E Monitor value setting data compound store read 6 20 Response This is used to read by a single command the multiple monitor values or setting data items that were stored using Monitor value setting data compound read store write This command can be used in both setting area O and setting area 1 lf an area type error or a setting data error occurs in any of the data being read no data will be read SRC Response code Variable type Data MRC 0000 Monitor value Setting data Variable type Data Monitor value Setting data Response codes The above indicates a normal end For the response codes see 6 5 Reading the variable area P 6 9 6 9 Commands and responses Communication CompoWay F M Write via communication Response nstruction Related MRC SRC code nformation Related information P00 Write via communication disable Write via communication enable This command is used to enable or disable Write via communication When sent it changes the set value of Write via communication When write via communication is disabled communication cannot be used to write setting data or send operation commands such as Run Stop The initial setting is disabled This command can be used in both setting area 0 and setting area 1 MRC SRC Response code Response codes The above indicates a normal end For the response codes see 6 7 Operation co
342. refresh period OFF 0 5 1 2 4 MONL Monitor item level setting 1 SC M Start display scan at power ON OFF ON SC T Display scan period 0 99 setting level less than1 second Communication Setting Level PSEL Protocol selection CWF MOD U NO Communication unit No 0 99 BPS Communication speed 9 6 19 2 38 4 LEN Communication data length 7 8 SBIT Communication stop bit 1 2 PRTY Communication parity NONE EVEN ODD SDWT m Transmission wait time 0 99 OFF ON ALH4 Control initial setting level Control initial setting 2 level Alarm setting level Alarm 4 hysteresis Display adjustment level Communication setting level 0 01 99 99 Advanced function setting level L REST Expansion control setting level L EXC Standby sequence restart Condition A Condition B SB1N Auxiliary output 1 non exciting Close in alarm N O Open in alarm N C SB N Auxiliary output 2 non exciting Close in alarm N O Open in alarm N C SB3N Auxiliary output 3 non exciting Close in alarm N O Open in alarm N C SBAN Auxiliary output 4 non exciting Close in alarm N O Open in alarm N C Operation Adjustment Adjustment 2 Level level level Approximatio setting level m m m m m Se m m m m m m m m w mm um um um um um um um ee
343. roken line approximation for input 1 A Setting range Units Default value m Setting 8 51 I Section 8 Setting data CH Motor calibration CH Travel time 8 52 r Operation bili A Setting 6 Related setting data Broken line approximation 1 Input 1 to Broken line approximation 1 Input 20 Broken line approximation 1 Output 1 to Broken line approximation 1 Output 20 Approximation setting level P 8 34 ya ua 203 p x Position proportional type e Use this setting to run motor calibration If you are going to monitor the valve opening be sure to execute this setting During execution the display cannot be changed e Executing this setting also resets Travel time e When this setting is accessed the set value is 62 Select z n to run motor calibration e When motor calibration ends the setting automatically reverts to Hu mu 6 Related information 3 3 Position proportional control of a ceramic kiln W Settings for position proportional control P 3 12 Related parameters Travel time Control initial setting 2 level P 8 52 Position proportional type e Set the time from valve completely open to valve completely closed e This parameter is automatically set when Motor calibration is run Setting range Units Default value 6 Related information 3 3 Position proportional control of a ceramic
344. rolla bility may be affected Pay attention to the following points Maximum of 3 sets of setting data can be written Response 50 ms or higher 6 3 Section 6 Communication CompoWay F 6 2 Frames Communication CompoWay F Based on CompoWay F protocol commands from the host computer and responses from the E5AR ER take the form of frames The data comprising command frames and response frames are explained below In the following explanation an H following a numeric value for example 02H indicates that the value is a hexadecimal number A number or letters enclosed in quotation marks for example 00 is an ASCII character E Command frame 6 4 FINS mini STX Node No Sub address SID command text ETX BCC li Per vi 1 2 2 1 1 1612 BCC calculation range Code that indicates the beginning of the communi cation frame 02H Be sure to set this code in the leading byte This number specifies the destination Node No Specify the Unit No of the EBAR ER When broadcasting to all units specify XX Responses are not sent to a broadcast Sub address Not used on the E5AR ER Be sure to set to 00 FINS mini The text of the command Command text OO EX Code that indicates the end of the text 03H Block Check Character This stores the result of the BCC calculation from Node No to EXT STX SID Not used on the E5AR ER Be sure to set to 0 Service ID ETX CC B
345. rt address Bit position Number of elements 2 2 2 4 2 0001 to 0019 Data name Explanation Specifies the FINS mini monitor value setting data MRC SRC read command Variable type Specify a variable type First address of read Specify the address for the beginning of the read Bit position Not used on the E5AR ER Specify 00 N umberof elements Specifies the number of variables to read max of 25 H 19 Not needed for a compound read FINS mini response text Response code MRC SRC MRES SRES Data to be read wT o 2 2 4 Number of elements x 8 bytes for compound read number of elements x 10 bytes Data that was read Response codes code 1001 Command length too long The command is too long i Command length too The command is too short ue short 1101 Area type error Incorrect variable type 110B Response length too long Number of elements gt 25 H 0019 R i Parameter error Specified bit position is other than 1100 00 Operation error Unit error unit change display unit 2203 error internal non volatile memory error ee 6 9 Section 6 Communication CompoWay F 6 6 Writing to the variable area Write to the data area by setting the required data in the following FINS mini command text format FINS mini command text Variable Starting address Number of MRC SRC type of write Bit position elements Write data ee ee 2 2 2 4 2 0001 to 0018 4 Data na
346. rtional control type to monitor the amount of valve opening or perform closed control connect a poten tiometer PMTR as shown in the following E5AR For information on the potentiometer see the manual for the valve you are connecting Terminal number meanings are as follows O OPEN W WIPE C CLOSE The input range is 100 Q to 2 5 kO Between C to O 2 2 How to Use the Terminals I Event inputs To use event input on the E5AR connect event inputs 1 and 2 EV1 terminals and EV2 to terminals K1 to K3 and event inputs 3 to 6 EV3 to EV6 to terminals numbers E2 to E6 The number of event input points varies depending on the model To use event input on the E5ER connect event inputs 1 and 2 EV1 and EV2 to terminals E2 to E3 and event inputs 3 to 6 EV3 to EV6 to terminals numbers B2 to B6 The number of event input points varies depending on the model 2 15 I Section 2 Preparations 2 16 The number of input points of each model is as follows E5AR _ILILIB E5ER LILILIB 2 points EV1 and EV2 E5AR L L D ESER LILID 4 points to EV6 EV3 EV4 EV5 ee EV5 Using contact uei non contact 111 6 points EV1 to EV6 input input EV3 EV4 EV4 EV5 EV5 EV6 EV6 Using contact Using non contact input input E5AR Using non contact input Using contact input Using contact Using non contact input input e Input ratings of each input ar
347. s Default value 5 Standard control P MV lower limit 0 1 to 105 0 MV upper limit Setting Heating cooling control of 100 0 0 0 to 105 0 Standard control RA MV lower limit 5 0 i MV UPPE limit 0 1 Heating cooling control 105 0 to 0 0 The following MVs take precedence over the MV limits e Manual MV Manipulated variable at stop e MV at PV error 6 Related information 5 3 Output adjustment functions W MV limit P 5 16 CH w rsnn c rr T rs rr sssVIJInIIsIr F PID Automatic selection range upper limit Fir 1 to 8 When using automatic selection of PID sets use this setting to set an upper limit for each PID set e Set the automatic selection range upper limit for PID Set Nos 1 to 8 Note that the limit for PID Set 8 is fixed at 110 of the sensor setting range and thus does not need to be set e This value is applied to the PV present value or DV deviation set in PID set automatic selection data The initial setting is PV A Setting data Setting range Units Default value e Automatic selec tion range upper 19999 to 99999 FU 1450 0 Setting limit 6 Helated information 5 2 Control functions W Banks 5 9 uu 5 2 Control functions II PID sets 5 12 Related setting data PID set automatic selection data Expansion control setting level P 8 74 8 32 we 8 8 Approximation setting level L EZL 8 8 Approximation setting level L
348. s Display 2 will show Note that you can proceed to the next stop before the display shows 0 5 Press the key to obtain the display at left The count value that was input will appear in Display 2 in hexadecimal Set the STV as follovvs For input types 2 4 7 8 10 and 14 53 mV For input types 3 5 6 11 12 and 13 22 mV Wait until the count in Display 2 is sufficiently stable and then press the s key This tentatively saves the calibration data at this point 6 Press the key ce to obtain the display at left Set the STV to 6 mV Wait until the count in Display 2 is sufficiently stable and then press the s key This tentatively saves the calibration data at this point 9 3 Thermocouple input calibration I I r 2 p gt 7 Press the key to obtain the display at left 8 Change the wiring as shown below Open vvithout connecting Short circuit ZERO CON Compensating wire of selected thermocouple OUTPUT INPUT However for thermocouple E R S W and B compensating wire of thermocouple K is used Disconnect the STV and enable the thermocouple in the cold junction compensator Make sure that the STV is disconnected at this time 9 Wait until the count in Display 2 is sufficiently stable and then press the key
349. s than 1 second than 1 second Protect levels OAPT Operation Adjustment protect 0 4 c m m m m eee m I WTPT Approximation P D setting lt Bank setting _ Setting change protect setting level OFF 0 ON 1 L EEL key less Prd leyes level p rap i than 1 second than 1 second sz ee ee ee ee i F key protect oF FF 0 ON 1 C Control in progress HC l1 sec sec or longer or longer Operation adjustment protect anre Initial setting protect L LE Setting change protect UhPr PF key protect PFPE The range of setting data protected is indicated Initial settings are shaded Operation adjustment protect Restricts key operation in the Operation Adjustment Adjustment 2 Bank setting PID setting Approximation setting and Monitor item levels 5 Setting Adiustment PID settings values Adjustment 2 Approximation settings Setting Monitor items Display change Yes Display Yes x Display Change levels No When the set value is O protection is not enabled 8 3 l Section 8 Setting data 8 4 m Setting e Setting Setting e nitial setting protect Restricts movement to the Input initial setting Control initial setting Control initial setting
350. ss the key To turn on closed output press the 1521 key The MV is updated every 50 ms e When switching between manual mode and auto mode the action of the MV is balance less bumpless Other setting screens can be moved to in manual mode However AT Execute Cancel cannot be selected and does not appear in the display Switching between auto and manual is possible a maximum of 100 000 times 4 29 I Section 4 Settings Required for Basic Control The procedure for switching to manual mode during control and changing the MV is explained in the following 6 When Auto Manual is selected with the PF1 setting or PF2 setting Initially the PF1 setting is Auto Manual 1 Hold down the key for Auto Manual at least 1 second The MANU indicator lights up and the mode changes to manual gt w af r 1 c cx wa 4 4 yu X s m l L I g J II g wa lt a To return to auto mode hold down the key at least 1 second The MANU indicator goes off and the mode changes to auto j gt w cx MANU X 6 When Auto Manual is not selected with either the PF1 setting or PF2 setting 1 Press the cel key repeatedly to select 7 A Auto Manua
351. ssible to perform operations such as writing initial setting data which are not possible in setting area 0 When the power is turned on setting area 0 is selected To access setting area 1 use the Move to setting area 1 operation command To return to setting area 0 from setting area 1 turn off the power or use the Software reset operation command Software reset instruction Setting area 0 Move to setting Setting area 1 area 1 instruction Control in progress Control stop Variable A ee Rk Setting area 0 During control Setting area 1 Display adjustment level Control stop 6 13 Section 6 Communication CompoWay F 6 9 Commands and responses Communication CompoWay F The E5AR ER provides a set of applied commands that make use of variable area read write commands operation commands and other services provided by the CompoWay F communication protocol E5AR ER applied commands are explained below E Monitor value read Communication CompoWay F Variable Command MRC SRC type Address Bit position Number of elements Vari able Address Address Data name 0000 PV 0200 Status 0002 I Internal SP 0202 Internal SP 0004 MV monitor heat 0204 MV monitor heat 0005 M cooling 0205 Co MV monitor cooling Status 0102 0105 0003 0004 0005 0006 0007 0008 Ci 0009 0103 0104 0105 0106 0107 0108 0109 0000
352. stment FUNCTIONS u u uu u u uuu u 5 2 RD BSB oaa kumu a ab DL k saw akaqa yasa 5 2 First order lag operation 5 5 Move average ea DAA s d aa t aaa 5 5 Broken line approximation 5 6 Extraction of square root operations 5 7 Other input adjustment functions 5 7 5 2 5 3 5 4 5 6 5 7 5 8 5 9 CO Ol TUN CHONG uyu xu S 5 8 oErampec o o o s ll 5 8 Bul ii o ii pu usanta 5 9 olmu b Unus m Sasa aaa ssp uta su 5 12 SSS uuu E maqa 5 12 Disturbance overshoot adjustment 5 14 Output adjustment functions 5 16 NIV TINTS ae AY m asl 5 16 WIV CHANG Ale 100 1016577756585555900 0000000000 00000 5 17 o nu 5 18 WING FP MCT o 0077000000 77 7000000000 5 18 Display and key adjustment functions 5 19 SCB a msds 5 19 PF settings function keys 5 21 Other display and key adjustment functions 5 23 P roleelilig Se
353. t Auxiliary output assignment Alarm type Alarm value Alarm upper limit and Alarm lower limit are explained in this section M Auxiliary output assignment This setting assigns the type of data that is output from each auxiliary output On multi point output types data assignments can be set for channels 2 and higher as appropriate for the number of channels Auxiliary output Auxiliary output assignment Channel 1 alarm 1 Channel 1 alarm 2 Channel 1 alarm 3 Channel 1 alarm 4 Channel 1 input error mu Channel 1 RSP input error Ha m A ALM output IM Channel 1 el 2 All channels RSP input error OR output U ALM output is an OR output overall alarm of alarms 1 to 4 of all channels The initial settings are as follows 1 point input type 2 point input type E5AR LILILIW E5ER LILILIW ch1 alarm 1 chi alarm 2 ch1 alarm 3 ch1 alarm 4 4 point input typeE5AR LWW The E5ER LJ2UIL and E5ER UTULI auxiliary output 2 point types are not equipped with SUB3 and SUB4 4 23 I Section 4 Settings Required for Basic Control M Alarm types 1 21 1 6 6 6 6 4 24 SP Set point Set value er output function in general sauna Alarm value X is positive Alarm value X is negative Alarm function OFF Output OFF Upper and lower limit deviation i SP X Upper limit deviation OFF SP Lower limit d ovver limit deviation
354. t or turn the power off and on to make the change effective Setting range Units Default value a oo 7 1 71 Setting Communication speed HPS e After changing the communication speed setting execute a software reset or turn the power off and on to make the change effective R Setting range Units Default value e Setting j 8 64 Communication data length m 1 Setting Communication stop bit 1 Setting Communication parity A Setting 8 14 Communication setting level 1 5 Protocol is CompoWay F e After changing the communication data length setting execute a software reset or turn the power off and on to make the change effective Setting range Units Default value Ic Protocol is CompoWay F e After changing the communication stop bit setting execute a softvvare reset or turn the povver off and on to make the change effective Setting range Units Default value e After changing the communication parity setting execute a software reset or turn the power off and on to make the change effective 8 65 l Section 8 Setting data Transmission wait time Ddk e After changing the transmission wait time setting execute a software reset or turn the power off and on to make the change effective a Setting 8 66 Ie 8 15 Advanced function setting level This level includes setting initialization PF key and nu
355. t value for each input type At this time the count value that vvas input vvill appear in Display 2 in hexadecimal Set the 6 dial as follows e Input type 0 390 Q Input type 1 160 Q cuw Manu 1 1 PT 6 Wait until the count in Display 2 is sufficiently stable and then press the key This tentatively saves the calibration data at this point 9 10 9 5 Resistance temperature input sensor calibration I Input type 0 7 Press the ce to obtain the display at left Set the 6 dial as follovvs e Input type 20 O Input type 1 40 Q 8 Wait until the count in Display 2 is sufficiently stable and then press the key This tentatively saves the calibration data at this point 9 Press the el key to obtain the display at left Note that this display will not appear if not all of the required data has been tentatively saved Press the A key Display 2 will show HE 5 Two seconds after the key is released or when the el is pressed the tentatively saved calibration data is stored in non volatile memory If you do not wish to save the data in non volatile memory press the key instead of the A key
356. t whether to stop control or switch to floating control and continue when a potentiometer error occurs during closed control In the event that a break occurs in the O or C wires of the potentiometer potentiometer errors may not be detect able thus this function stop control or switch to floating control does not operate 3 4 Cascade control of reflovv ovens I 3 4 Cascade control of reflow ovens Cascade control is used to reduce the effects of disturbances in the manipulated system disturbances in the secondary loop by adding a second PID loop to the regular PID loop Cascade control is also used in situations where a sensor is added close to the object to improve control performance E Application Conventional temperature control of reflovv ovens is performed using only a sensor installed near the heater In lead free reflovv ovens the melting temperature of solder is higher and in order to minimize heat induced deterioration of the electronic components a second sensor is added inside the oven near the board to enable a higher precision of temperature control G3PX Power controller Conveyor N Heater Temperature sensor e A thermocouple or platinum resistance temperature input sensor can also be directly connected to input 2 previously input 2 only supported 4 to 20 mA or 1 to 5 V and an external converter was required e Auto tuning
357. tandard control and instrumentation is as shown in the following example Sensor Heater The control period can be set from 0 2 sec to 99 0 sec onds on the E5AR ER The shortest setting on our previ ous models vvas 1 sec For high precision control applications that previously required the combined use of our cycle control unit G32A EA and an SSH the G32A EA is novv no longer needed a Wiring The platinum resistance temperature input sensor Pt100 is connected to the IN1 terminal and the OUT1 terminal is connected to the SSR Wiring for the EBAR QA4B is shown in the following schematic Sensor 3 2 3 1 Standard control I M Settings Set the control period to 0 2 sec for high precision temperature control with the SSR Related setting data and settings are as follows Input 1 type switch TC PT initial setting Input 1 input type 1 Pt100 150 00 to 150 00 C Output 1 output type 0 Pulse voltage output initial setting Control mode 0 Control mode initial setting Action r r Reverse action initial setting SP 115 00 C Control period heat 0 2 The following explains how to set the input type the output type of output 1 the SP and the control period heat and how to check the control mode Input 1 type switch 1 Before turning on the power check that the input 1 type switch is set to TC PT 2 Turn on the power and then hold do
358. temperature difference or when an external cold junction compensator is used for increased accuracy FF External A Setting range Units Default value m l an Internal nm Internal Setting Related setting data Input type Input initial setting level P 8 36 8 5 l Section 8 Setting data CH CH PV tracking 8 6 L m L e This setting is normally used at the default value This sets the advanced PID constant o Setting range Units Default value Setting 4 pr D uc e This setting is used to have the local SP track the PV when in manual mode e The setting prevents abrupt changes in the MV when switching from manual mode to auto mode Auto mode Manual mode Auto mode Time 5FF Disable If an input error occurs during PV tracking the local SP vvill change to the upper limit of the sensor setting range m Setting 8 16 Expansion control setting level L Eu CH Manual output method Ya al m Ya al Sapa Manual MV initial value This setting is used to specify hovv the MV is output vvhen svvitching from auto mode to manual mode e When Hold MV is selected the MV at the time of switching is held after which it can be changed usi
359. the control mode setting If transfer output is assigned to a bank output 3 to 8 in the case of CH1 the output will be OFF Control Transfer Control Transfer Control Transfer Control Transfer Control mode Input type output 1 output 2 output 3 output 4 assignment assignment assignment assignment tint 1 O 07 090 Standard control 1 19 j 0 0O inputs 1 Dt O tint ot 2 0 j Heating cooling control 2inputs 1 97 9 9 t Ainas h Aa F 22 M COC Cwt O e 158017 Remote SP standard 2inputs 1 0 0 j 2 inputs inputs o 055 CA SE e cooling Ezinpis r J a a 757777 r dinputs l 6 BB 0 l 21 0 Aip i B 615 j Proportional control 1 2inpusi 1 Z 0 0 Amps A ee Re io tnpa eC o Cascade standard 2inputs 9 0 0 0 2 inputs b linbif555 5 711 65 asa Os s Lat L s 1 5 0 9 um inputs Od 0 1 0 C 9 4inptis 101 A 878102 8 46 Position proportional 1 input control 8 11 Control initial setting 2 level L 2 6 Related setting data Reference Linear current output type Control initial setting level P 8 42 Output 1 output type Output 3 output type Control initial setting level P 8 42 yu mn k r Event input 4 allocation mr v r Event input 1 allocation Event input 2 allocation Event input 5 allocatio
360. ting data items 6 Display conditions for related setting data CH AT run stop Setting data name Operation conditions A setting will only appear in the display of the E5AR ER when the conditions of use for the setting are satisfied conditions of use are indicated to the right of each setting in this section Protected settings are not displayed regardless of the conditions of use although they are in effect n the case of settings that can be configured separately for each channel on a multi point input type appears to upper left of each of these settings in this section 2 yr K 1 eo L I w k a During control using advanced PID control Display symbol Display 1 Setting data for each channel Level indication Display 3 Order of explanation of settings 8 2 Settings are explained by level 8 2 Protect level L Fr E 8 2 Protectlevel L Prt Protect level consists of four types of protection Operation adjustment protect Initial setting protect Setting change protect and PF key protect Each is used to protect the corresponding settings and prevent accidental changes to the settings Power on 12 Operation level HAdiustment Adjustment 2 key s s level 242 key ess evel Raz than 1 second than 1 second key less _ key les
361. tion function is enabled e These settings are used to set the time constant of the first order filter of each input Data after the first order lag filter elapses is shown below e The filter is used to filter out noise elements in the input 8 22 TI 8 5 Adjustment 2 level L Aag PV before filter i PV after filter Time constant Setting range Units Default value Setting Related information 5 1 Input adjustment functions W First order lag operation P 5 5 Related setting data First order lag operation Enable Control initial setting 2 level P 8 50 4 a a x x as Ki w h r Move average 1 Move average count x i w a Move average 2 Move average count 2 7 X r Move average 3 Move average count al 4 ya Move average function is enabled X r Move average 4 Move average count e These settings set the move average count for move averaging for each input Data following the move average is shown below Input data Operation result Time e This function is used to reduce changes in the input due to distur bances in the fluid surface when controlling fluid level A Setting range Units Default value 1 2 4 8 16 32 Number 1 Of times Setting 8 23 I Section 8 Setting data Related
362. tion Write start Instruction Related address mode address code information CRC 16 H00 HOO H08 H00 1 1 2 2 2 bytes The above indicates a normal end For information on error responses see 7 7 Operation commands Communication Modbus P 7 14 MH Auto Manual Response Initialize settings Response 7 9 Commands and responses Communication Modbus Slave Function Write start Instruction Related address mode address code information CRC 16 1 1 2 2 2 bytes Related Description information Operation mode H 00 Auto H 01 Manual 1 2 H 20 3 Auto H 21 Manual 4 H 30 Auto H 31 Manual H FO All Auto H F 1 Manual Use this command to select auto or manual operation This command is used in setting area 0 If used in setting area 1 an operation error will result To use this command Write via communication must be enabled using the Write via communication operation command When the control mode is set to cascade control perform the Auto Manual operation command of CH2 H 10 Auto H 11 Manual Slave Function Write start Instruction Related address mode address code information CRC 16 1 1 2 2 2 bytes The above indicates a normal end For information on error responses see 7 7 Operation commands Communication Modbus P 7 14 Slave Function Writestart Instruction Related address mode address code information CRC 16 H00 HOO H00 1 1 2 2 2 bytes This returns all settings to the initi
363. tion conditions are the host system the same Communication conditions The number of parallel connections exceeds the Do not exceed the rating rating e For RS 485 a maximum of 31 units can be connected The length of the communication path exceeds the 1 Do not exceed the rating rating e For RS 485 the total maximum length is 500 m Another unit has the same unit number Make sure there are no duplicate unit numbers Noise is corrupting the communication data e Separate the communication cable from the noise source e Use shielded communication cable e Use an optical interface e Have the program resend the command when a problem is detected in the response Connections Incorrect use of communication devices Verify the method of use in the literature for each e Optical interface device e 232C 485 converter Incorrect installation of RS 485 terminators Install terminators only on the devices on the ends of the communication path Communication begins as soon as the power ofthe Wait at least 2 seconds before beginning E5AR ER is turned on communication after the power is turned on Unstable signals that occur when the E5AR ER is Initialize the host system reception buffer at the turned on or off are read as host system data following times Before sending the first command e After the power of the E5AR ER is turned off The host system sends a command before Ensure that the program always reads the receiving
364. tp 28 2 T R 57 B Relay outputs 2 FE o S H SUBt Input power supply SUB2 Input power supply depends on the model 100 to 240 VAC or 24 VAC DC no polarity depends on the model 100 to 240 VAC or 24 VAC DC no polarity COM SUB3 5 4 JJA inputs 53 E5ER AB 500 o EV1 o Event inputs EV1 2 EV2 OUT2 EV2 Voltage output 6 COM Current output 12V 40 mA Ar 4 20 mA DC 500 Q max COM OUT1 T 2 0 20 mA 500 Q max a Voltage output i Poa Switching by output bi 12V 40 mA or ui ss type setting 5 Current output Ly OUT1 4 20 mA 500 Q max C x Current output 0 20 mA DC 500 Q max 4 20 mA 500 max I V PT Switch using output type setting Resistance 0 20 mA 500 Q max Current Voltage Thermocouple Switch using output type setting Resistance thermometer N 7 E5ER Q43B FLK E5ER C43B FLK E5ER AB 500 E53 ARR4 E5ER AB 500 E53 ARR4 100 240 VAC B Auxiliary outputs 100 240 VAC Auxiliary outputs N nn Relay outputs f Relay outputs a 17 3 4 4 s HE E53 ARQC3 1 bi b 8 RS
365. tput type are as follows Specifications Output voltage 12 V DC 15 2096 Max load current 40mA with short circuit protection circuit 0 20 mA DC resolution approx 54 000 s 4 20 mA DC resolution approx 43 000 Oo Load 500 Q max The value for the ESAR QQLILILIWW LILIL is 21 mA max e The position proportional type has relay outputs 250 V AC 1 A Control output 1 OUT1 is open output and control output 2 OUT2 is closed output E5AH E5EH OUT1 e Relay output specifications are as follows 250 V AC 1 A including inrush current Auxiliary outputs On the E5AR L 400 auxiliary outputs 1 to 4 SUB1 to 4 output to terminals terminals B1 to B6 EBAR ESAR a BE eo 1 MEH 2 6 lejals jojn AUU T On the E5ER LI4UI_ auxiliary outputs 1 to 4 SUB1 to 4 output to terminals B1 to B6 On the E5ER UTULI auxiliary outputs 1 to 2 SUB1 to 2 output to terminals D3 to D6 EBER Li4l U C 2 13 I Section 2 Preparations Potentiometer inputs terminals E5AR 2 14 Relay output specifications are as follovvs 250V AC1A On the E5ER LITLILI auxiliary outputs 1 and 2 SUB1 and 2 output to terminals D3 to D6 E5ER I T I Transistor output specifications are as follows Max load voltage 30 V DC Max load current 50 mA Residual voltage 1 5 V max Leakage current 0 4 mA max If you wish to use a position propo
366. transfer output assignment is SP or ramp SP the set values are initialized to the SP upper and lovver limits When the control mode is changed initialization takes place of added channels in the same vvay as the initlalization of related parameters of Input type A on previous page Based on the PID set selection data this is setting upper limit setting range x0 1 in the case of PV and setting range x1 1 in the case of DV The default value is normally 0 however on occasion the default value may also be the value clamped by the SP upper and lovver limit This becomes the clamp value only when clamped by the SP upper and lower limit The default value is 0 This is remote SP in the case of the secondary loop of cascade control and local SP in all other cases Upper lovver limit of sensor setting range and scaling display values 1 and 2 are initialized If Closed Floating is Float in position proportional control or if Operation at potentiometer input error is Continue this is initlalized if the integral time is 0 This is the upper and lower limit of the sensor setting range For temperature input this is the range 4 20 mA Initialized only if the control mode is changed to ratio control Temperature Initializes to upper and lower limits of sensor setting range Analog Initializes to scaling display values 1 and 2 lf the applicable channel is used for heating cooling control this is 100 otherwis
367. trol mode is control with remote SP When the event input is ON the remote SP RSP is used as the SP and the RSP operation indicator lights up When the event input is OFF the local SP LSP is used as the SP The content of the event input is reflected in SP mode Adjustment level This setting data is an operation command that is particular to a single channel Operation is as follows based on the event input ON OFF state enba Setting data Level y name Display 3 Event input 1 to 6 Control initial Specify event assignment setting 2 L input L x 1 to 6 5 31 I Section 5 Functions and Operations 5 8 Using transfer output M Transfer output settings Control Transfer output assignment Transfer output scaling 5 32 e For transfer output use an output that is not used for control output Transfer output can be used to output one of the following 6 types of data as selected in Control Transfer output assignment For more information see 8 11 Control initial setting 2 level L Control Transfer output 1 to 4 assignment P 8 46 SP ramp SP PV MV heat MV cool valve opening Note that the heating and cooling MVs can only be output from a standard type and the valve opening can only be output from a position proportional type vvith a potentiometer connected Output Channel 1 Channel 1 control output heat side Channel 1 control output cool side C
368. ts 1 to 4 of a multi point input type correspond to channels 1 to 4 First select a channel with the key and then set the corresponding input shift values 5 1 Input adjustment functions I Obtaining input Temperature readings are taken using the E5AR ER at any two points shift values 2 and the actual temperature at the required location the object is point correction measured at the same two points Preparations 1 Set the input type based on the sensor 2 Obtain a temperature sensor that can measure the temperature of the object similar to that shown in Figure 1 A EBAR Digital Controller B Thermometer Figure 1 Configuration for input shift 6 Procedure for 1 Correction will be performed of the temperature readings at two points one using 2 point near room temperature and one near the desired SP Measure the temperature correction of the object when it is near room temperature and when it is near the SP B and check the corresponding readings of the controller A 2 Set Input shift 1 to the difference between the temperature of the object B and the controller reading A when near room temperature Obiect temperature B Controller reading A and set nput value for input shift 1 to the controller reading A 3 Set Input shift 2 to the difference between the temperature of the object B and the corresponding controller reading A when near the SP Obiect temperature B Controll
369. tween two variables Cascade control is performed using standard control Input 1 is for the primary loop ch1 and input 2 is for the secondary loop ch2 Cascade control is performed using heating cooling control Input 1 is for the primary loop ch1 and input 2 is for the secondary loop ch2 4 13 I Section 4 Settings Required for Basic Control 4 7 Setting output parameters E Control period e The output period control period must be set A shorter control period improves controllability however when a relay is used to control a heater a control period of at least 20 seconds is recom mended to preserve product life After setting the control period in the initial settings readiust it as necessary using trial runs e Set the values in FP Control period heat and 2 22 Control period cool The default value is 20 0 sec e Control period cool can only be used in heating cooling control e When each channel is used independently for control set the control period separately for each channel E Direct operation cool Reverse operation heat e Control that increases the MV as the PV increases is called direct operation cool and control that increases the MV as the PV decreases is called reverse operation heat 2 KI
370. umentation is as shovvn in the follovving example 5777ESR o QS Dx Wam water Temperature tank sensor gt lt X X XX Outer tank Solenoid valve Coli water In addition to control of chemical reactions and other pro cesses that naturally generate heat heating cooling con trol is also being increasingly used to shorten heating and cooling cycles for improved production efficiency in batch process production Example Heating cooling control of a flip chip bonding machine 3 5 I Section 3 Typical Control Examples E Wiring M Settings Input initial setting level 3 6 The input is connected to IN1 according to the input type the heating system is connected to OUT1 and the cooling system is connected to OUT2 Wiring for the 4 is shown at left Chemical reaction device Sensor VVhen the obiect has different heating and cooling characteristics set the cooling coefficient of heating cooling control to 0 50 Related setting data and settings are as follovvs Output type of linear current output 1 1 4 to 20 mA initial setting Output type of linear current output 2 1 4 to 20 mA initial setting Control mode 1 Heating cooling control Action ar r Reverse action initial setting Cooling coefficient 0 50 Dead band 0 00 C initial setting
371. ust be set to the desired values among 0 to 19 below e Each time a PF key is pressed the display scrolls to the next monitor setting item in order from Monitor setting item 1 to Monitor setting item 5 Default o mome setting item 1 PV SP Bank PF1 Monitor Configurable SP onfigurable i PV DV Monitor only Proportional band P Configurable ntegral time 1 Configurable setting item 4 Derivative time D Configurable PF1 Monitor Alarm 1 Configurable setting item 5 Alarm upper limit 1 Configurable 1 PF2 Monitor Alarm upper limit 2 Configurable Alarm lower limit 2 Configurable Alarm 3 Configurable Alarm upper limit 3 Configurable setting item 3 Alarm lower limit 3 Configurable Alarm 4 Configurable setting item 4 Alarm upper limit 4 Configurable PF2 Monitor Alarm lower limit 4 Configurable Bank No Configurable PF2 Monitor Alarm lower limit 1 Configurable setting item 1 Alarm 2 Configurable setting item 5 Related setting data PF1 setting PF2 setting Advanced function setting level P 8 68 8 69 I Section 8 Setting data Number of enabled channels RAM write mode 8 0 e Setting m r m Setting m Multi point input type e This setting is used to set the number of enabled channels when using multiple channels on a multi point input type Setting range Units Default value 5 O
372. ust be configured These PID constants can be set using AT Auto tuning or manually When the proportional band P is set to 0 00 control becomes ON OFF control Performs heating and cooling control When using PID control in addition to the Proportional band P Integral time 1 and Derivative time D settings the Cooling coefficient and Dead band settings must be configured The PID constants can be set using AT Auto tuning or manually while the Cooling coefficient and Dead band must be set manually When the proportional band P is set to 0 00 control becomes ON OFF control and 3 position control is possible The following control modes can only be selected on 2 input types Standard control vvith remote SP Heating cooling control with remote SP Ratio control Cascade standard control Cascade heating cooling control An external DC current or voltage signal is input into the remote SP input input 2 and standard control is performed using the remote SP input as the SP Input 2 can be used within the permitted setting range determined by the input 2 type An external DC current or voltage signal is input into the remote SP input input 2 and heating cooling control is performed using the remote SP input as the SP Input 2 can be used within the permitted setting range determined by the input 2 type Ratio control is used to maintain a set proportional relationship be
373. ut as Fa 4 is When open in alarm is selected the alarm output state is inverted 2 oy pnaam before output e Close in alarm Open in alarm is set separately for each auxiliary output in Auxiliary output 1 4 non exiting x bes Ene The initial setting is 4 3 Close in alarm Auxiliary I Setting data output Auxiliary Operation i output indicator function Close in alarm a a OFF OFF Off Open in alarm ae Of e When the power is turned off and for about 2 seconds after the power is turned on the auxiliary outputs are OFF open Alarm operation e The following example summarizes alarm operation Lower limit summary alarm standby sequence and Close in alarm are selected Alarm type With lower limit standby sequence s M E en sssi Al lue gt Alarm hysteresis anm value P ss essere os oe ee PV L Time Cancel standby sequence Alarm output function OFF nI T ON closed Alarm output 5 27 l Section 5 Functions and Operations i characters name Display 3 Latch L 3 hold Hysteresis L 3 hysteresis Standby Alarm setting Sets standby sequence sequence reset 1 3 restart conditions Auxiliary Alarm setting outputs 1 to4 L 3 Open in alarm Close in alarm Open in alarm 5 28 5 7 Usi
374. utput allocation 1 10 8 46 Cooling coefficient 3 8 8 15 Dead band 3 8 8 15 Decimal point position 8 37 Derivative time 8 31 DIMENSIONS annen ua kuyay us 2 2 Direct operation 4 14 Direct Operation cooling 1 9 SD aY uu u unta asa ada sa 1 5 DiSp ay2 uya s 1 5 d l 1 5 4 3 Display adiustment level 8 59 A 24 Display auto return time 8 61 Display PID selection 8 30 Display refresh period 8 61 DISDIAY Scan aa ada uama 5 19 Display scan period 8 62 Disturbance gain 5 14 8 21 Disturbance judgment vvidth 8 21 Disturbance overshoot adiustment 5 14 Disturbance overshoot adjustment function 5 14 8 80 Disturbance rectification band 8 21 Disturbance time constant 8 21 Down KEY z o 1 6 ECHO OACICICSI ou ada o d 33 d 7 29 End codes Communication CompovVVay F 6 5 Error messages 10 3 EVeniinp t adaya asas da an 5 29 Event input allocation 5 29 8 47
375. values 10 4 10 4 Inferring causes from conditions abnormal control 10 5 10 5 Inferring causes from conditions abnormal output 10 7 10 6 Inferring causes from conditions communication problems 10 8 PECilicalion5 a ba B daya umanan isuwa a a md ayy apa n ha a A 2 Unun a E d s assa A 2 Unit performance specifications A 3 Sensor input setting ranges Indicator control ranges A 4 ASCIGo065S u uui l E OGOR A 5 571107 ii 0 ii i ii asas A 6 Initialization due to setting changes A 28 SOMO 2120 a a ay ama A 30 XVII XVIII Section 1 Overviev gt s gt o gt O 1 1 Main Features of the ESAR ER 1 2 1 2 Part Names and Functions 1 4 1 3 Input output Configuration and Main Functions 1 7 l Section 1 Overview 1 1 Main Features of the E5AR ER The E5AR ER is an advanced controller that features high speed and high precision control The E5AR ER has the following features E Inputs High speed sampling High accuracy high resolution Multi inputs Multi point inputs
376. vel H 1100 to 110C Communications setting level H 1200 to 1218 Special function setting level H 1300 to 1332 1300 to 1332 Expansion control setting level Expansion control setting level setting level Ku 4000 added to above Same setting data as channel 1 addresses H 8000 added to above Same setting data as channel 1 addresses H C000 added to above Same setting data as channel 1 addresses This command is used to write setting data The number of elements can be set from H 0004 to 0068 4 to 104 to allow successive writing Of 2 to 52 items of setting data in contiguous addresses To specify the variable type or address see Appendix Setting list P A 6 Write setting data to setting area 1 from setting area 1 If written from setting area O an error will result To use this command Write via communication must be enabled using the Write via communication operation command To store setting data of Operation and Adjustment setting levels in non volatile memory select Backup with the Write mode command If not set to Backup the setting data will not remain in memory when the power is turned off For more information on Operation and Adjustment levels see 4 1 Setting levels and key operation P 4 2 Slave Function Write start Number of address mode address elements CRC 16 1 1 2 2 2 The above indicates a normal end For information on error responses see 7 6 Writing to the variable area P 7 12
377. vver limits can be set vvithin the input setting range If SP limits are set and the SP local SP falls outside the limits the SP will be changed to either the upper or lower SP limit Example Initially the SP is 200 C the SP setting upper limit is 300 C and the SP setting lower limit is 100 C If the SP setting upper limit is changed to 150 C the SP will fall outside of the SP limit range of 100 to 150 C and thus will be changed to 150 C If Input type Temperature units or scaling is changed the upper and lower SP limits will be reset to the upper and lower limits of the input setting range The SP limits are set separately for each channel Input temperature setting range I Target limit i Y Setting range St Change to lt B Tim A X upper limit value Change SP j upper limit 7 C SP Input temperature setting range i When input type SP V is changed s C setting is possible l l 1 setting not possible I 1 gt A Set value in general Y Upper and lower SP limit v Upper and lovver limit of sensor M PID sets The E5AR ER allows setting data to be grouped for use in PID control A group of setting data is called a PID set PID sets consist of the following s
378. wb s NI0L Z0000000 H 1 yuawbas NI uoNelAeq L0000000 H 0 4 10 00000000 w Aejdsip udelb 122 OO 1 Sullo02 AW 10000000 H une H AN 00000000 H uonp l s eldsip AW 2001 1000 J O 0 20000000 O 00000000 dPd 000 UORO T S u 19S EldSip dS Ad 0001 0000 uonsod anjea ssolppy ss sppy ajqeuen 4OWUOW uoneolunululo Ag 195 s njea ale S n BA 195 Ul p PIIPUI H I A ju usn pe Aejdsiq A 24 Setting list S Jaye uuo5 q s um s uoneolunuluo u s B6ueuo 66 01 0 29000000 01 00000000 OUl HEM UOISSIUSUEIL DOLL 9000 z ado ppO Z0000000 H 1 N3A3 u AZ 1 0000000 0 INON ON 00000000 uoneolunululo2 000 1 2 0000000 0 1 00000000 H 10 0015 uoleolunululo2 Y000 1 8 10000000 00000000 uoreolunululo2 z 86 20000000 1 261 10000000 p ds 8 0118010 0 9 6 00000000 H ON Wun uoneolunuluuo2 66 0 0 29000000 01 00000000 1 GOW snqpolW L0000000 H 0 AMO 4 AeModwod 00000000 H UOH l S ODOIOId uonsod ene sseuppy ss Jppv adh 2106 oc wod ewoea neea JE 1555 mu 5 yemoduoo 4OHUOW 1 Aq 195 S D PA JOWUOW S D BA 195 Ul papu H 2
379. wn the key at least 3 seconds to move from RUN level to Input initial setting level X f amp Input 1 input Input 1 type type H Press the 521 key to select the setting 1 Pt100 150 00 to 150 00 C lt a 3 Press the key less than 1 second to move from Input initial setting Output 4 level to Control initial setting level a 1 k Output 1 Output type will Output type appear Check sure that the set value is 0 Pulse voltage output 4 Press the repeatedly to select ag Control mode Check that the Control mode mn setting is 0 Standard control N N o ws ane o Hold down the for at least 1 second to return to RUN level PV SP Present value PV SP MV MV will appear Press the A key and set the SP to 115 00 3 3 I Section 3 Typical Control Examples Adjustment level 6 Press the 1 key less than 1 second to move from RUN level to Adiustment level 2 period 7 Press the repeatedly to select EP Control period
380. y digits after PV decimal point is set to OFF for temperature input digits follovving the decimal point are not shovvn mu Monitor range P Appendix Sensor input setting ranges Indicator control ranges P A 4 H Setting or monitor range Default value Local SP SP lovver limit to SP upper limit FU PV Remote SP Remote SP lovver limit to remote SP upper limit Note that the SP limits are in effect At Display 1 Display 2 the bank number appears in Display 3 At Display 2 the MV appears in Display 3 Display screen selection Display adiustment level can be used to set the display sequence to Display 1 Display 2 Display 2 Display 3 Display 1 only or Display 2 only The initial setting is Display 2 Display 3 PV SP MV PV SP Bank No 6 Related setting data Input type Input initial setting level P 8 36 nput temperature units Input initial setting level P 8 37 Scaling input value 1 Scaling display value 1 Scaling input value 2 Scaling display value 2 Decimal point position Input initial setting level P 8 37 Remote SP upper limit Remote SP lower limit Input initial setting level P 8 38 PV decimal point display Input initial setting level P 8 39 SP upper limit SP lower limit Control initial setting level P 8 43 SP mode Adjustment level P 8 14 PV SP display screen selection Display adjustment level P 8 60 Local SP control mode s

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Communication/CompoWay/F

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents